Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
04-1967
' OWNER ' THE CITY OF DENTON DENTON, TEXAS 1 ' SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF ' THE DENTON MUNICIPAL BUILDING FOR THE CITY OF DENTON DENTON, TEXAS j ' O'NEIL FORD & ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS 528 King William Street San Antonio, Texas 78204 FEIGENSPAN & PINNELL STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 6836 San Pedro Avenue San Antonio, Texas 78216 D. W. TORRY & ASSOCIATES MECHANICAL ENGINEERS 13333 North Central Expressway ' Dallas, Texas 75240 0' Neil Fort, F. A.1, A. ' April, 1967 Texas Reg. Vo. 331 I INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS r For the Construction of ' THE DENTON MUNICIPAL BUILDING f or ' THE CIT OF DENTON, DENTON, TEXAS Title Page . Index..... . Advertisement for Bids 1 ' Information for Bidders IB-1 to IB-6 DIVISIONS ' 1 General Conditions and Supplements , 1-1 to 1-13 2 Special Conditions . 2-1 to 2-13 3 Demolition - Site Clearing . . 3-1 to 3-2 ' 4 Site Work...... 4-1 to 4-2 5 Earthwork - Drilled Footings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 to 5-4 6 Poured-in-Place Concrete Work , . . 14 , . . . 6-1 to 6-7 ' 7 Structural Steel . 7-1 to 7-2 8 Open Web Steel joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 9 Lift Slab Operations 9-1 to 9-4 ' 10 Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . , 10-1 to 10-6 11 Roof Deck, Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 to 11-2 12 Roof Insulatipn 12-1 ' 13 Roofing and Sheet Metal.... o 13-1 to 13-4 14 Waterproofing, Dampproofing & Caulking 14-1 to 14-2 15 Dry Wall and Ceiling Construction 15-1 to 15-2 16 Miscellaneous Metals 16-1 to 16-3 17 Glass and Glazing, 17-1 to 17-2 18 Resilient Flooring , , 18-1 to 18-2 19 Carpet. 1. . . .1 #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 20 Clay and Ceramic Tile 20-1 to 20-2 21 Carpentry and Finish Woodwork . . 21-1 to 21-5 ' 22 Metal Toilet Partitions & Toilet Accessorieo , , . 22-1 to 22-4 23 Metal Doors, Frames & Metal Window Frames 23-1 to 23-3 24 Steel Windows, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 ' 25 Finish Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1 to 25-8 26 Painting and Finishing 26-1 to 26-4 27 Miscellaneous Specialties 27-1 to 274 ' 28 jail Equipment. . a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1 to 28-20 29 Allowance for Special Items . . . 29-1 ' 30 Door Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1 to 304 31 Room Finish Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1 to 314 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning M-1 to Md 32 Electrical..., 00 of, . . . . E-1 to E-28 Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 to P-27 r ' ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ' OWNER: City of Dent01L Denton, Texas Separate sealed Bids for the construction of the Denton Municipal Building for the ' City of Denton, Denton, Texas, will be received by the City of Denton at the Municipal ' Building, Denton, Texas, until , 1967, and then at said place publicly opened and read aloud, The Information for Bidders, Form of Bid, Form of Contract, Plans, Specifications, ' and Forms of Bid Bond, Performance and Payment Bond, and other Contract Documents may be examined at the office of O'Neil Ford & Associates, Architects, 528 King William Street, San Antonio, Texas 78204. Copies may be obtained by approved Bidders at said ' offices upon payment of $50.00 for each set. Any unsuccessful Bidder, upon returning such set promptly and in good condition, will be refunded his payment, and any non-bidder upon so returning such a set will be refunded $40.00. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities or to reject any or all ' Bide. Each Bidder must deposit with his bid, security in the amount, and subject to the ' conditions, provided in the Information for Bidders. ' No Bidder may withdraw his Bid within thirty (30) days after the actual date of the opening thereof. 1 1 , INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS ' 1. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS: ' The City of Denton (herein called the "Owner"), invites bids on the form attached hereto, all blanks of which must be appropriately filled in, Bids will be received by the Owner at the Municipal Building, Denton, Texas, until 2:00 o'clock p, m., ' C. D. T. , 1967, and then at said place publicly opened and read aloud. The envelopes containing the bids must be Fealed, addressed to City Manager, the City of Denton, Denton, Texas, and designated as: "BID FOR THE ' DENTON MUNICIPAL BUILDING." The Owner may consider informal any bid not prepai ,d and submitted in accordance with the provisions hereof and may waive any informaliti;9 or reject any and all bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the, opening of bids or authorized postponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and ' date specifi.od shall not be considered, No Bidder may withdraw a bid within 30 days after the actual date of the opening thereof. t 2. PREPARATION OF BID: ' Each Bid must be submitted on the prescribed form. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. ' Each Bid roust be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the navie of the Bidder, his address, and the name of the project for which the Bid is sub- mitted. If fozwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the Bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed as specified in the Bid Form. 3. TELEGRAPHIC MODIFICATION: Any Bidder may modify his Bid by telegraphic communication at any time prior ' to the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids, provided such telegraphic com- munication is received by the Owner prior to the closing time and, provided further, the Owner is satisfied that a written confirmation of the telegraphic modification ' over the signature of the Bidder was mailed prior to the closing time. The tele- graphic communication should not reveal the Bid Price but should provide the addi- tion or subtraction or other modification so that the final prices or terms will not be known by the Owner until the sealed bid is opened, If written confirmation is not receive d within two days from the closing time, ne consideration will be given to the c alegraphic modification, IB-1 1 METHOD O~' F~'~IDDING: ' The Ownsr'invites the following Bid: Complete construction of the Municipal Building, as described in the Con- tract Documents, ' S. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER: The Owner may roake such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ab+.lity of the Bidder to perform the work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or ' investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is pro- Yly qualified.to carry out'the obligation of the Contsact and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional Bids will not be accepted. 6. BID SECURITir Each Bid most be accompanied by ash, certified check of the Bidder, ore Bid Bond, duly executed by the Bidder as principal and }awing as surety thereon a ' . Surety Company approved by the' Owner, in the amount of 3% of the Bid. Such cash, checks or Bid Bonds-will bi returned to all except the three lowest Bidders within three (3) days, after the opening of Bids, and the remaining cash, checks, ' or Bid Bonds will be returned promptly after the Owner and the accepted Bidder have executed the Cohtract, or, if no award has been made within 30 days after the date of the opening of Bids, upon demand of the Bidder at any time thereafter, ' a3on4 as he has not been notified of the acceptance 4 his Bid. ' 7. LI2VIDATED DAMAGES FORPAILURE TO ENTER INTO CONTRACT; The successful 'Bidder, upon his failure or refusal to =*cut* and deliver the Con- tract and Bonds ri~rairsd'within 10 days after he has received notice of the accep- tance of his Bid, shall forfilt to the Owt►e~r, as liquidated damages for such failure ' or refusal, the security deposited with his Bid.' ' 8, TIME OF, COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Bidder must agree to commence work on or before a date to be specified in a ' written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the Project within the stated umber of calendar days Wicated on his Bid, 1 IB-Z ' 9, CONDITIONS OF WORK ' Each Bidder must inform himself fully of. the conditions relating to the construc- tion of the project and the employment of labor thereon, Failure to do so will not relieve a successful Bidder of his obligation to furnish all material and labor neces- sary to carry out the provisions of his Contract. Insofar as possible the Contractor, in carrying out his work, must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of or interference with the work of any other Contractor, 10. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS: ' No interpretation of 'the meaning of the Plans, Specifications or other pre-b!d documents will be made to any Bidder orally. Every request for such interpretation should be addressed in writing to O'Neil Ford & Associates, 328 King William Street, San Antonio. Taos 78204, and to be given ' consideration, must be received at last three days prior to the date fixed for the opening of Bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written adderda;Obe S~pecifications which, if issued, will be mailed by certified mail with return rwmipt requested to all prospective bidders (at the respective addresses furnished for such purposes), not later than two days prior to the date fixed for the opening of Bids. Failure of any Bidder to receive any such Addendum or interpretation shall riot relieve such Bidder from any obUgs- tion under his Bid as submitted. All Addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents, i1 11. SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE: Simultaneously With his delivery of the executed Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a Surety Bond or Bonds in the amount of 100% of the Contract price as security fox faithful. performance of this dontract and for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project under We Contract and furnishing water- ials in connection;Joith this Contract, as specified in the General Conditions-included t herein. The Surety on such bond or bonds %M U be a duly authorised surety company satisfactory to the Ovmer, ' 13, POWER OF ATTORN,-S ' Attorneys-in-fact who sign %*bonds or contract bonds must file with each mAd a certified and effectively dated coley of th4lr power of attorney, 1 ~ ~l TB-3 ' 13, LAWS AND REGULATIONS: ' The Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract ' throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written out in full. 14, METHOD OF AWARD - LOWEST QUALIFIED BIDDER: 1 If at the time this Contract is to be awarded, the lowest Base Bid submitted by a responsible Bidder does not exceed the amount of funds then estimated by the owner as available to finance the Contract, the Contract will be awarded on the ' Base Bid only. If such Bid exceeds such amount, the Owner may reject all Bids or may award the Contract on the Base Bid combined with such deductible Alternates listed in the Form of Bid, as produces a net amount which is within the available ' funds. ' 15. OBLIGATION OF BIDDER: At the time of the opening of Bids each Bidder will be presumed to have inspected ' the site and to have read and to be thorough y familiar with the plans and contract documents (including all Addenda). The failure or omission of any :udder to examine any form, instrument or document shall in no way relieve any Bidder from any obli- gation in respect of his Bid, 16, UNIT PRICES: a, Bidders are required to give unit prices on the following items on the Bid ' Form, b. They are as follows for General Construction Bidders: 1 (1) * GREATER DEPTH: Unit price per lineal foot of excavation, steel, and concrete in place (2) * LESSER DEPTH: Unit price per lineal foot of excavation, steel, t and concrete in place (3) CASING: Unit price per pier * Based on difference in actual depth totals vs, base bid totals, ' IBS 1 ' 17. ALTEF:NATES: Bidders are requested to submit Proposals for Alternates as described under ' SPECIAL CONDITIONS as a part of their Bid. 18. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION: ' Contractor's Option on "POUR-IN-PLACE CONCRETE" or "LIFT SLAB" Concrete Slab shall be as described under SPECIAL CONDITIONS. ' 19. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: For the convenience of Bidders, Subcontractors and material men, Drawings and Specifications shall be placed on file as follows: Office of F. W. Dodge Corp. in Dallas, Ft. Worth and Wichita Falls, T"s. Office of The Texas Contractors' Association, Dallas, Texas. ' SCAN, 1040 MockingHrd Lane, Dallas, Texas 75207. 20. ENUMERATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS & ADDENDA: Following are the Plane, Specifications and Addenda which form a part of this Contract, as set forth in Paragraph 1 of GENERAL CONDITIONS, "Contract and Contract Documents" a. DRAWINGS: ' ARCHITECTURAL Sheets I thru 10, B-1, B-2 ' STRUCTURAL Sheets S-1 thru 8-10; SB-1 thru SB-2 ' MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING Sheets M-1, M-2, MB-1, P-1, PB-1 ELECTRICAL Sheets E-1, E-2, EB-1 b. SPECIFICATIONS: BIDDING REQUIREMENTS GENERAL CONDITIONS Division 1 ' GENERAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Divisions 2 thru 31 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Divisions 1 thru 52 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Divisions 1 thru 41 ' PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS Divisions 1 thsa 44 ' IB-5 1 C. ADDENDA: NO. 1 (dated NO. 2 (dated ' NO. 3 (dated ) ' NO. 4 (dated } NO. 5 (dated _ r r r r r r r r r r . r r r 1B-6 i ' DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONWTIONS AND SUPPLEMENTS ' 1. NOTICE: ' a. "GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT," as issued by the American Institute of Architects, form a part of these Specifications. ' b. "GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT," A. 1. A., are not bound here- with, but are on file in Architect's office, where they may be examined. co The following Supplementary General Conditions shall take precedence over and modify any Article or statement of "GENERAL CONDITIONS" (A. 1, A.) and shall be used in conjunction with them as a part of the Contract Documents. ' Article . 1 - Definitions Article 2 - Documents Article 5 - Shop Drawings (Shop Drawings and Brochures) Article 8 - Samples Article 11 - Surveys, Permits, Laws, Taxes and Regulations t Article 12 - Protection of Work and Property Article 16 - Claims for Extra Cost Article 17 - Deductions for Uncorrected Work ' Article 20 - Correction of Work after Final Payment Article 23 - The Contractor's Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract Article 24 - Application for Payment ' Article 25 - Certificates for Payment Article 27 - Contractor's Liability Insurance (Contractor's Insurance) Article 29 - Fire Insurance with Extended Civerage (Fire Insurance) Article 30 - Guaranty Bonds Article 32 - Liens Article 34 - Mutual Responsibility of Contractors ' Article 33- Architect's Status Article 39 - Architect's Decisions Article 40 - Arbitration (Alrbitration and Suits) Artic1c 15 - References Article 46 - Standards of Quality Article 47 - All Legal Provisions Deemed Included ' Article 48 - job Meetings ' MODIFICATIONS AND SUPPLEMENTS ' 2. Article 1 - Definitions: Omit (h) and add in its place: ' The term "by others" shall refer to work to be furnished by the Owner, or by Contractors other than the Contractor to whom this Contract is awarded Mfr ♦ a., 'j~ `I ' or by this Contract ar and?r an agreement _)t]4er than this Contract. ' Add the follawirg defiritions (i The terms "as show r," as rndILatc,d." "as r,,ted," and CU. like used in the Contract D.)cuments, refer t and sh,uld b supplemented by 1Fe phrase "an the drawsng5" ar,dr',)r "ir the Spec tfi(atu,rs." (j) Where typical Jr represertatnve details are sh)wr, such details ' shall constitute standards in material, w )rl.tttiinshtp and cocnstructian required throughout in similar and/,,r c ~rrespordinb parts of the work. ' (k? The term "substartial tomplotim " as used it the C zintract Documents shall be construed to nean the cordrtion of the structure existing when it has been made suitable and satisfa( t -ry to the Owner for the int-coded use but still •:equires miscelisret+us work to c*..~mplete Conti act requirements including all rnodificati)r:s there,..)f., ' '1) When the words "Gars-_,r; C:mtr~ctor" are u5ed in these Contract Documents, they shad mean the Cantract.)r specifically contracting with ' the Owner to perform s)r lhave executed all Gereral Construction work in the project. ' (m When the term "C intract ir" is used in these Coraiact Documents, it shall mean the Contrak-tor •_-Ir Sabi +r tractor performing ary part )f the work and d-)es not necessarily ;imit its neaning to the C-eneral C-,;tractor. ' (n) The tern "Specifi( atr)rs" shat; m,,.in al) writteu descriptions, pro- visions and require:n nts, tog• t1xr %iti, all written agriremonts :Wade or ' to be made pertaining to tht• tne~ Y. d and :aarrer of perE:Prmirg tEku Nork, or to the quantities and q.salities :d :nat. rrals to b? furnished under this Contract. ' (o) The term "extra work" as used F,erein refers to and includes wank required by the G;4ner, which tit th,: }udgcnert of the Architect ,*nvjlws ' changes in or addttiors t? that required by the Contract Documents in their Contract f=irm. ' (p) Whenever they refer to work ar its performance, "directed," "re- quired," "permitted," "ordered," "designated," "prescribed," and words of like imp,!rt, sha.i mply the direction, requirement, permission, ' order, designatior or prescripti-in. of the Architect, and "approved," "acceptable," "satisfactory," "in tho judgment of," ar.d words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable to Or satisfactory to or in ' the judgment of the Architect. 1-2 t , q) When the tertri "equal" is used in this Specificati.>n it shall mean equal in the opinion of the Arc hit 4,,( t, &K) will t )nstder appearance as well ' as function and quality. Cortrdc t irs may prop )se substitutions in writirg, and if approved, such-appr -val wil: be giv,-n in the form )f approved sh.)p drawings or in thca f, Arm )i t Cl,at,ge Ur der. ' (ri Wherever the terrns "as approved," "as directed," and similar ex- pressions appear in the Contract D:)cuments, they shall be interpreted t~ ' mean "as approved by the Architect," "as (Airectedby the Architect," etc. ' (sj Owner City of Debtor, Texas. ' (t) Arc}dtects - O'Neil cord & Ass-xtates, Archite(ts (u j inspector - An auth.~rized representative of the Architect, assigned ' t7 make any and ull necessary observations of the work parforined, and materials f,.trni-lied by tl-e C j ,tract.-,r. ' (v) Site - The area designated T the Plat Man located on the property of the City of Dort -,r,. Texas. ' 3. Article 2- DJCUtnents: ' Add th? following- In event of r.•:'ntiict betwet-'r (:.)rttact Djt-t,;,Ienks, Specifications shall take precedence )vor drav:tn5s, '.arge sca1N clrawirgs shall take precedence over general draw:rgs. fig'i es shalt tak: pri_cederce )vet scaled dimen- ' si9ris, and descriptive n )tos shali take precedence ;ver g-:neral rites or code indications. 1 4. Article 5 - Shop Drawings. Change title to Shop Drawings and brochures. In the 4th line, change 113 copies" to "1 sepia capy." In the 12th line, change 112 corrected copies" to 113 correcte,' copies " Add the following paragraph: Furnish to the Architect for apprc.val, five (S', copies of brochures for all ' equipment and materials furnished under this soc tion. These brochures shall be published by the rnarAiifacturer of the equipment or materials, and 1-3 ' shall cc,ntain c-mp,ete and detai;ed engineering ar.d dimensional information. To facilit ate the checking of these brochures, the following procedure must ' be strictly follo,xed. if the brochure; are n, t compiled in the manner de- scribed below, they will be r,aturr.ed fc.r resubmittal. Submit brochures that contain only that irforcnation which is relative to the particular equipment ' or materials to be flrrnished. Do n-)t submit catalogs that describe several items other than those to be used, unless all irrelevant information is com- pletely rnazked gut, leaving only the information that pertains to the items ' submitted f-~r appr-wal. ' S. Article S - Sam~iles; Add the following serterce- Normally, sectiors ~)f products will be Sufficient, but where full size sub- missions are requ,red, they may be incorporated into the wr&k if satis- factory. 6. Article 11 - Surveys. Perrnits,_I s, Taxes and Regulatirins: Add the following paragraph- The Contract :r shall comply with applicably provisions of the labor laws ' and all other state laws and federal and local statutes, ordinances and regulations which art- applic ablr to the performar.ce of this Contract. The Contract -)r an.i'.l z c gwra at' Subcontractors likewise to comply and ' conform witb all s,sc h- federal, state ar:d local labor laws, ardinances and regulatic.r.s. 7. Article 11 - Pr ~tecti -n of W ?tk and Pr, pert y ' Add the following paragraphs: The Contractor shall be hell resp;nsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, sigrs, lights and watchmen to protect it; and when- ever evidence is found of such damage, the Architect may order the damaged portion immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at his cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, ' sign i, and lights, for pro6dirg watchmen shall not cease until the project shall have been accFpted by the Owner. All broken glass shall be replaced at once and all scratched and defective glass shall be replaced, all at the Contract,)r's expense. ' 8. Article 16 - Claims for Extra Costs Add the following: No extra costs will be granted unless presented in writing and approved by r.' 1•-4 , ' Architect and Owner before execution or the work. Such extra work will be authorized by separate agres_ments or Change Orders issued by Architect. ' 9. Article 17 - Deduction, for Uncorre-ted Wrwk; ' Omit and add in its place: if, in the opinion of the Architect, it is un•3esirable to replace any defec- tive or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor hereun3er shall be reduced ' by such amount as in the judgment of the Architect shall be equitable. 10. Article 20 - CorrPCtaon of Work, &`ter Final Pyment: A d the following paragrapl.: ' In the event notice of observed defects %as been given to the Contractor by the Owner or Architect within one year from. date of final payment or from ds.te or Owner's 5ubstential occupalcy of the protect, whichever is ' earlier, and all observed defects have not been remedied by the Contractor within the year, the Contractor shall be responsible for and at his oym cost shall ze:redy remaining defects an3 Barrage resulting therefrom until, in the girdon of the Owner and the Architect, 2.efects and damage have been completely :mmoved. If after ten dais after the sending of • the written notice of any defect, the Contractor tails to remedy such ' de-ect, the Owner may do Fo with his ovvn cr^ployees or by any other means he deems expedient. In the event of an emergency, the Cwaer shall not be required to give any notice but may orthwith remedy the defect or B.e- ' ficiency. T'ne Contractor a11all be liable fcr and agrees to pay the Owner, of dervand, any sums expended by him pursuant to this section. All guar- antee provisions contained in the Contract Documents are in addition to ' and not in limitation of the statutory and common law rights of tle Owner. ' 11. Article 23 - The Contractor's Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract: In the first paragraph, omit the last of the sentence reading, "and any proven loss sustained upon any plant or materials and reasonable profit and damages." ' 12. Article 24 - Application for Payments: Omit the first paragraph and add in its place:- The Contractor shall? submit to the Archtect an application for each payment. Each application for payment, excepting the first such appli- cation, shall be accompanied by receipts or waivers proving payznents for 1 1-S materials and lab:,r to date, including all payments to Subcontractors as required by Article 37. Application for payment shall be submitted to the Architect at least ten days before payment is due to permit proper ' audit. After the last paragraph add the following paragraphs: ' Payment date shall be the first day of each month except when on Satur- day or Sunday, then it shalt be on the following Monday. Payments shall be made on work completed and materials purchased and delivered. Each ' payment shall have 10% withheld until 75% of the Contract is complete. Thereafter, 5,% of payments shell be withheld. Final payment shall be due fifteen days after completion and acceptance of the building by the Owner. No materials or supplies for the work shall be purchased by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage, or under a con- ditional sale, or other agreemeat by which an interest is retained by the Seller. The Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him it the work. 13. Article 25 - Certificates for Payments: ' Add after the first sentence of the sec:,nd paragraph: When advised by the Contractor that the work is substantially completed, ' the Architect and the Contractor shall, within a reasonable time, make an inspection of the work and if the Architect shall determine that the work is substantially (r,,;-npleted, he shall then prepare a Certificate of ' Substantial Ccmpleti;n which shall be submitted to the Owner and the Contractor. ' 14. Article 27 - Contractor's Liability Insurance: ' Omit and add in its place: The Contractor shad not commence work under this Contract until he has ' obtained all of the insurance required under this Article and until such insurance has been approved by the Owner or the Architect. The Contractor shall not allow a Subcontractor to commence work on Ws subcontract until ' all the insurance required of the Subcontractor has been obtained. The Con- tractor shall furnish the Owner and Architect certificates in triplicate indicating carriage of all insurance required by the Contract Documents. Such certificates shall provide for not less than ten (10) days written nptice to the Owner and Architect in the event of change in or cancellation of any coverage. r 1-6 ' (a) COMPENSATION INSURANCE. The Contractor shall take out ' and maintain during the life of his Contract, Workmen's Compensa- tion Insurance for all of his employees employed at the site of this project and, in ease any work is sublet, the Contractor shall require ' each Subcontractor similarly to provide Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all the latter's employees unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor. In case any ' class of employees engaged under this Contract in hazardous work at the site of the project are not protected under the Workmen's Com- pensation statute, then the Contractor shall provide and shall cause ' each Subcontractor to provide adequate insurance for protection of his employees not otherwise protected. ' (b) PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE. The Contractor shall take out and shall maintain for the life of the Con- tract, such public liability and property damage insurance as shall pro- tect him, the Owner and the Architect, form claims for damages for bodily injury, including accidental death, as well as from claims for property damage, which-arise from operations under this Contract, ' whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly o:, indirectly employed by either of them and the amounts thereof shell be as follows: ' Public Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $200, 000 for injuries, incl,iiiing wrongful death, to any one person and ' subject to-the same limit for each person, in an amount not less than $500,400 on account of any one occurrence. ' Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than $200,000 f-)r damages on account of any one occurrence and in an amount not less than $200, 000 for dam ages on account of all occurrances. ' (c) CONTINGENT LIABILITY. The above policies for public liability and property damage insurance shall be written to include contingent ' liability and contingent property damage insurance to protect the Con- tractor against claims arising from operations of Subcontractors en- gaged by him. (d) COM!'LETED OPERATIONS COVERAGE. The policies required for public liability and property damage insurance shall be continued ' in force during the life of the Contract and shall be augmented by completed operations coverage (in the came amounts stated in para- graph (b) above) to continue in force throughout the period of guarantee ' as described in Article 20 of the General Conditions of the Contract as amended above. (e) INDEMNIFICATION COVERAGE. The Contractor shall take out and shall maintain for the life of the Contract, such insurance as shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Architect from and 1-7 t against any and all loss, damage, claims, dt:rrands, suits, costs or expenses which the Owner and/or Architect may suffer, sustain or be subject to, directly or indirectly, causeF, wholly or in part by ' reason of the performance of the work. 15. Article 29 - Fire Insurance with Extended Coverage: Omit and add in its place: The Owner vill effect and maintain fire insurance including extended coverage prwtection against windstorm, vandalism and malicious rdschief ' on the work to be performed under this Contract to 100% of the insurable value thereof, including labor and materials in place on the site and to be used as part of the work, including surplus materials, miscellaneous ' materials and scaffoldings, stages and equipment not owned or rented by the Contractor, the cost of which is included in the cost of the work, pro- vided they are on the site. The Owner will not insure tools owned by mechanics nor tool e, shanties, storage sheds, temporary office, etc. owned or rented by the Contractor, whether or not upon the site. In case of loss, proceeds from insurance shall be distributed in accordance with ' agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or under an award of arbitrators appointed one by the Owner, one by the Contractor and another by joint action of other parties in interest, other procedure being as pro- vided below herein for arbitration. The Owner, Contractor and all Sub- contractors hereby waive all rights, each against the others, for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by insurance provided for under the terms of Article 29, e.KCept such rights as they may have to proceeds in case of loss. ' 16. Article 30 - Gauranty•Bc,rds: ' Omit paragraph and add in its place! The Owner shall have the Contractor furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising ' thereunder, in such form as the Owner may prescribe and with such sure- ties as he may approve. The premium shall be paid by the Contractor as part of the cost of the work. 17. Article 32 - Liens: ' Omit paragraph and add in its place: Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens and all claims for which liens may be filed arising out of this Contract, properly executed for record and an affidavit that such 1 1-8 ' release includes all labor and material for which a lien might be filed, but the Contractor may, if any Subcontractor refuses to furnish release ' or receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner, indemnifying him against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Caner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and attorney's fees. ' 18. Article 34 - Mutual Responsibility of Contractors: Omit paragraph and add in its place: Should the Contractor-cause damage to any separate Contractor on the work, the Contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such Con- tractor by agreement or arbitration, if he will so settle. If such separate Contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractor's expense. If any judgment against the Owner arises therefzom, Cw Contractor shall satisfy it and pay all costs incurred by the Owner. r 19. Article 38 - Architect's Status: ' • Omit the third paragraph and in its place add: In case of the termination of the employment of the Architect, the Owner ' shall appointka capable and reputable Architect whose status under the Con- tract shall be that of the former Architect After this paragraph, add the following paragraphs: Inspectors, employed by the Architect and/or Owner, shall be authorized to observe all work executed and materials furnished. Such inspection ' may extend to all or any part of the work, and to the preparation or manu- facture of the materials to be used. ' In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the Inspectors as to materials furnished, or the manner of performing the work, the inspector shall have the authority to reject material or suspend the work ' until the question at issue can be reftrred to, and decided by the Archi- tect. The Inspector shall not be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax or r release .iny requirements of the Specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the work, nor to issue instructions contrary to the Drawings and Specifications. The Inspector shall in no case act as foreman or per- form other duties for the Contractor. Any advice which the Inspector may r 1-9 tr i ' give the Contractor shall in no way be construed as binding the Architect in any way, nor releasing the Contractor from the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. 20. Article 39 - Architect's Decisions: Omit the second and third paragraphs and add: The Architect's decision in all matters, except those relating to the ' payment of monies, shall be final if within the terms of the Contract Documents. 21. Article 40 - Arbitration: Omit this Article and add: Article 40 - Arbitration and Suits: Contrary provisions of the Contract Documents notwithstanding, no provi- sion of this Contract nor any questions concerning the execution of the work shall be submitted to arbitration without the express written crn- sent of the Owner and the Contractor. Any action, suit or proceedings instituted hereunder shall be triable only in courts located within the county where this construction takes place. 22. ADD: ' Article 45 - References: The following references shall apply where they appear in the Specifications. Item qualified by any of the abbreviations shall conform to the latest stan- dards and specifications of the institution referred to: ABBREVIATION ACI American Concrete Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AWS American Welding Society ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and AirConditioning Engineers ASA American Standards Association ' AGA American Gas Association ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 1-10 CS Commercial Standard FS Federal Specifications NEC National Electric Code ' NEMA National Electric Manufacturers' Association UL National Board of Fire Underwriters Laboratories AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ' AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers 23. ADD: I ' Article 46 - Standards of Quality: Catalog numbers and manufacturers' names as noted throughout the Draw- ings and Specifications denote standards of quality required. The Contractor is hereby cautioned to maintain the high standards of quality implied herein while selecting equipment and material to be submitted to the Architect for approval. Material which, in the Architect's opinion, is inferior to that specified or is unsuited for the inti,nded use will be rejected. Wherever the phrases "or equal", "approved equal, " and the like appear in the Contract Documents, the meaning of such shall be construed as "equal in the opinion of the Architect." ' 24. Article 47 - All Legal Provisions Deemed Included: It is the intent and understanding of the parties to this Contract that each and every provision-of law required to be inserted in this Contract shall be and is inserted herein. Furthermore, it is hereby stipulated that every such provision is to be deemed to be inserted herein, and if, through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not,-inserted, or is not inserted in correct form, then this Contract shall forthwith, upon the application of either ' party, be amended by such insertion so as to comply strictly with the law and without prejudice to the rights of either party hereunder. ' 25. Article 48 - Job Meetings: ' Whenever the Architect deems it necessary, he shall call a meeting at the site or at the offiice of the Owner or Arcl.'.tect, at which time the Con- tractor shall be present to discuss all details relative to the progress of the project, or shall be represented by an employee authorized to act on behalf of the Contractor on matters discussed. A representative of the ArOutect shall preside over these meetings. 1 1-11 1 ' SPECIAL SUPPLEMENT TO GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS ' 1. NO DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT: During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: ' a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color or national origin. The Contractor ' will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the fol- lowing- employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruit- ment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of com- pensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this non- discrimination clause. b. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will ' receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color or national origin, C. Vie Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collectivg baz gaining agreement or other contract or under- standing, a notice to be provided advising the said labor unior or workers' repre- sentative of the Contractor's commitments under this section, and shall post . copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants' for employment. ' d. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the ' Secretary of Labor created thereby. e. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations and orders of the said Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records and accounts by the administering agency and the Secretary for purposes ' of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders. f. In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination ' clauses of this Contract or with any of the aaid rules, regulations or orders, this Contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the Con- tractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or Federally- ' ' 1-12 1 . ' assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Execu- tive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions maybe im- posed and remedies invoked as provided in the said Executive Order or by rule, regu- lation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. g. The Contractor will include the provisions of paragraphs (a) thru (g) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exemp ed by rules, regulations or orders, of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of ' September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any Subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such ' provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance. Provioed, however, that in the event a Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. ' h. The applicant further agrees that it will be bound by the above equal oppor- tunity clause in any federally assisted construction work which it performs itself other than through the permanent work force directly employed by an agency of government. I. The applicant agrees that it will cooperate actively with the administering ' agency and the Secretary of Labor in obtaining the compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal opportunity clause and the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish the administering ' agency and the Secretary such information as they may require for the supervision of such compliance, and that it will otherwise assist the administering agency in the discharge of the agency's primary responsibility for securing compliance. The ' applicant further agrees that it will refrain from entering into any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order 11246 with a Contractor debarred from, or who has not demonstrated eligibility for, Government contracts and Federally-assisted construction contracts pursuant to Part II, Subpart D of Exec- utive Order 11246 and will carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of the equal opportunity clause as may be imposed upon contractors and subcontractors by the administering agency or-the Secretary of Labor pursuant to Part II, Subpart D of Executive Order 11246. In addition, the applicant agrees that if it fails or refuses to comply with these undertakings, the administering agency may cancel, ' terminate or suspend in whole or in part this grant (contract, loan, insurance, guarantee), may refrain from extending any further assistance under any of its programs subject to Executive Order 11246 until satisfactory assurance of future ' compliance has been received from such applicant, or may refer that case to the Department of justice for appropriate legal proceedings. ' 1-13 t 1 I e V J I DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY FOR CONTRACTS INVOLVING CONSTRUCTION WORK ' OFFICE OF CIV1L DEFENSE IN EXCESS OF $2,000 Each contract involving construction work in excess of $2,000 and all shall be. referred by the Slate through the Office of Ci1, l DefeTlse, su tracts thereunder shall include as a part thereof the following Office of the Secretary of the Army to the Secrets, 1f 11 abor fcf ' labor standards provisions, in completed form, verbatim: delefiw nation a. ',iACE DETERMINATION DECISION. All mechanics and laborers ernployed by the contractor or subconlractr,r in the per. If the contractor does nut make payments to a trustee cr other tuf.nance of constriction work hereunder will bl, paid urrcondltmouallY third p~lson, In mnay curls+der as part 0 the wages cf any laborer and not N-ss ihan once a week and without suLsequent deduction or or ri,echanic the amount (if any costs reasonably anhc,pated in rebate on ;iny accounl, except such payroll deductions as are per providing benefits under a plain of program of a type expressly milled by Ow Copeland Regular ors 4,rv rr7, rte: r 11 of VIC Secretary listed in the wage deter mmnation decision of the Sr,crOary of of Labor, the full amounts due rl Bole of payn ent corlpulhd al wage Labor which is apart ul Ihis roril,,, : Provided, h^ac ,er, The ' r des oat IPSS than those contained in the wage dcb.nnrnatlun deer Secretary of Labor ham found, upon the wnllen rcyi.°s'. of the Sion of the Secmetiary of I-abar which is atlached hereto and made a conhncior, foal the arnrt,r,ible standards of the Dnv15 Eacr,n Act part hereof regardless of any ronlrar.tual re lahcnship which may be have been met. The Sr,rr0my of Latter may equlrr the con- al leged to exist helwe,ot the cL..Im, luf or sul:i,wil,a,to, and such tractor to set aside uI a f1,,,, to account assets fog the meeting ' aborers and Inechamcs, and the wage detenni'nation decision shall of obllgalioos under the plan or progra,n. fin posted by the contractor at fhe, sill: of the work in a promuwnt pL+ca where It can be, easily seen by the workers. For the purpose of b. OVERTIME RE f)UIREMENTS. (A.% rl.,.v,n do. , i,er.,•, 0,. this cl li,se C('ntrlhntlnn5 Made or Lol is reasonably anticipated under I, wis it1.IN.r4 r%I ' rut,!' 'nm~,III it l, inrrorh• IL :,1Jin.It ,rerrUdrd , section l (b)f[1tlfe0avis BaCiid Atptrn behalf of laborers or No contractor of subcontractor cnntracting for any part of the coo- Mefll,~ltid9"»r! tbf4tdeied Wa~,~ fihfd'fo 5behhMdinay'6rtfleihanhd5; tract work which mey require or involve the emplcyn;enl of laborers rs6b)kl to tit plbJlslMis`of 29 f1F415:5 (d}71ffW?" i AlSa.fof tha! ` or mechanics shalt require of permit any laborer or mechanic to be jiwpuse J this clause, reeofar tantribulam glade Of t6Sts urcuued, employed on such work in excess of eight hours in any calendar day t for more than a weekly period under plans, lunds, or programs, but • or in excess of forty fours in any workweek unless sect, laborer or coveting the particular weekly perfod,,are,deemed to be constructively mechanic receives n mp4snSahon at a rate of not r:,ss, Inan one and made of incurred during such weekly period. oir*%aH IlhMi his basic, tote, of $ay fq ell I** *utleed in excess (l a bPelract ng DlFirw of 6, of ~ t hoMir!t in trfT *0 taleNdfe day of ~r ektest of foi b,%fr in afl~/~11'4bfYlUdehfaSUlILbSRp~lb~.. i , ; 'c. VIOLATY)NS; LiA811-ITY FOR UNPAID WAGES; L01--i, DATeU VAMAGE'S, In lire event of Any Violation of cla ise9 a of (,R i OLI T IC AI ~unl Yes b the tontfatlot •afld arty loibcontrarlM respurrslble fhctefor shall be Sh'all' require that any class of laborersof vilecitahits WbIft is frot` Iiehfe'to any affected emp4n'yee for Ns nrrpaid wages. N IfIldUOn, listed rn If+e wage delerrtiinatiori ahdwhich is t~ tee empluybd under, in the event be any vinlatiorrof clause b, snob test(rtof and Wit ,confracl, shall be tlassifiedor feclassilmedcunfwiiatllyto the contractor shalfbe liable tothe IIT"trdStilltsi,to00A Ivolpr,rterra ' wage dcttrmh;nnli0n,' dud a Tepoft pf the action taken shall be Sent by 11ir,,r 1Wr/Mr'rtdr thA Drr`frra'1 r,l Canr~ltly,, w., 9+,"f,7-j, a .,Kn the Slate, tf}r~~uYh If>e Officif of Civil pefense, Office of the Secretary r „r ,r, Not, 11 h rrlr,a> r, for liquidated damat es. S,.ch liquidated Of VIP Afruy to the $el re'.ary of Ldbar, Ih the k4 lift the interested damAges shall be c"Red, with respect to each ,nOlr J1r:;l laborer patties Wniol agree ore the proper tlassifiealion bf tcclsssfficabo'r or mechanic (iTTtrrhrynr? ,4-to, r,irom arMr r4a+r,l-r ereployeorf sees violation ' of a parGttrtat class Of laborers apd Ihechanncs io be Ir~ed. the gdes• of clause b M the sun ai S10 for each calendar da/ on III sock lion accompanied by the recomriieAQTlibd of the tohtr'attfng officer of empilyee was regdire ru, pormilfed to work In excess of elo,hl hours jr 11 erttess of time stbridimd workweMc of forty hours wiWA"aytoeaf w-m~•r_ ,r, „ M f n♦ 4fit'>7rertime wages rewired by CINISe b. ' IA- T1~.,. s~~„DI V,sION dS. WITHHOLDING FOR LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND UNPAID shall be fefefred by the Slag IhfoArmtl$h to t (he Off ice bf Civil- befense, WA'E$; the- Office e of the Secretary oft y he Secretary of Labor for *,a, rl JN two. NAMP 7 T-E st.tE final determination. - - - not PauulcAL F04EPL raror+ 46ALPUCAeLc The CoAratling officer of the may Nllhhold nr c nmsp to b, v,ithhefd, from any moneys payable on account not wok preformed by the contractor or subcontractor, such r 1N rlAM OF ST A T L Sums as may admumistratively be determined to be necessary to satisty any liabilities rf arch conUactor of subcontractor for liqui-, R PO41 T 1c AL SV b~I V ISION dated darrrages as provided in clause c. In the event of faclure to Of? whenever the III urw wage rate prescr bed is the cOn pay any laborer ti mechanic employed by Ot contactor or subcorr; shall rogl Ile wir b construction -_-_woork hereutder, all or part tract tract fur a class of laborers or rrechanrcS if"ILI des a binge benefrl x in which is not expressed as an hourly wage rate and the contractor is of the wages s raewired d by y the e contract; the--- WRIT[ 11'1• which obligated to pay a cash equivalent of such a fringe benefit, an hourly 1 cash equivalent thereof to be eslablr:ihed, In the event the Interested NAVk o. ,rAt r D,% POLITICSL Su113WIi iy r V parties carat agree upon a cash equivalent of the triage benefit, the ioay, after wrrltten notice to Urd'confratlot, take suth attion as may question accompao" by the fecemmer atrOn of the couractuag offi be necessity to cause file sutpensioa bf any further payment, advance cur of the a guarPatee of funds ur it such III laliolis hear teased, OR POLITICAL 6U Ix DI V ISION oco FORM 748, OCT 6S REFLAC ES OCD FORM 746, MARCH 66, P1HICH WILL NOT BE USED. ' e. PAYROLLS AND BASK RECORDS. Payrolls and basic f. APPRENTICES. Apprentices will be permitted to work as records relating thereto will be maintained during the course of the such only when they are registered, individually, under a bona fide work and preserved tot a period of three years thereafter for all laborers apprenticeship program registered with a State apprenticeship and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records will con- agency which is recdnitrd by the.Bdreau of Apprenticeship ark ' tain the name and address of each such employee, his correct classi• Training, U. S, Department of Labor. The allowable ratio of appren- licaliun, rates of pay onc(utpna ranee tot :,vtri butt on at or costa tices to journeymen In airy craft classification shall not be gTeater :nticir and o1 rbe ttpra dvmt rnLnd in Nrction t (b) (2) ut the than the ratio permitled to the contractor as to his entire work force nova. Wcw ace), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deduc• under the registered program. Any employee listed on a payroll at trons made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor an apprentice wage rate, wtur is not registered as above, shall be has found under 29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iv) that the wages of any laborer paid the wage rate determirwil by the Secretary of Labor for the or mechanic include are amount of any costs reasonably anticipated classification of work he actually performed. The contractor of suer ' in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section contractor will be required to furnish written evidence of the regi- 1(b) (2) (B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain slration of his program and apprentices as well as of the appropriate records which show 'tat the commitment to provide such benefits is ratios and wage rates, prior to using any apprentices on the con- enforceable, that the olan or program is finarreially responsible, and tract work. ' that the plan of program has been communicated in writing to the COMPLIANCE WITH COPELAND REGULATIONS (29 cFtr laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs g• anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits, Part 3). The contractor shall comply with the Copeland Regula• tionS (29 CPR Part 3) of the Secretary of Labor which are herein The contractor will submit weekly a copy of all Mioils to the Incorporated by reference. i h. INELIGIBLE BIDDERS. The contractor hereby certifies as a eonditlor, of the contrart that he is not listed on ll,e Comptroller ' OR voliTlcAL >tu roivl++oN General's list of ineligible bidders published pursuant to regulations issued by the Sectetary of labs (29 CPR Part and the Dmt: accompanied by a statement signed by the employer rr his agent indi• Bacon Actas amended (44 u.s.c. 2?6 a or mea). This certification catinpt that the payrolls are correct Ad complete, that the wage rotes shall constitute a warranty, the falsity of which wilt render void contained therein am not less than those determined by the Secretary this contract or subcontract, as the cast may be. of Labor arW that the classifications set forth for each labooter or me- chanle conform with the work he peifotmet A submission of a 1. SUBCONTRACTS. The contractor will insert In any sutr "Weekly Statement of Compliance" Which Is requititil under this corn contracts clauses a throuo h and j and such other clauses as the tract and die Copeland Re lkilons(7tn CI'R Port 1) of the Secretary Office of Civil Defense, Office of the Secretary of the Amy mayby of labor and the filing with the laltial payroll or any subsepuent pay appropriate instrtwiiorrs require, and also a clause (egtdrint the ' roll of a copy of any findings by W4 Secretary of Labor under 29 CFR subcontractors t6 tnclude these clauses in any lower tier subcoo- 51(a) (1) (iv) shalt satisfy this requirement. The prlme contractor tracts vAlch they '1v enter into, together with a clause requtr)n shall be responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls of all this ift"dion sn any rarer subcontracts Thal may in torn be me~. ' subcontractors. The contractor will make the records requited under the labor standards clauses of the contract available for inspection j, CONTRACT TEHJYNATION; DEBARMENT. A preach of by authorized Rprosentatives of the any of clauses a ttrrouth I may be grounds for teneinaboo of the s contract, and for debarmeall as provVad in 29 CFR 5,6. WRIT IN NAM[ 01117 T[ AND M POLITICAL MUSDIVIIJON, I N ' the Office of Civil Oefensa, Office of the Secretary of the Army, and th1 Department of Labor, and will permit web representatives b Inter- view employees dories woAdng boors on the Job. I 1 1 1 , r r.7 , Or ~4 1, _ _ _ _ _ A14 /t ! 7 ' DIVISION 2 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS ' I. SITE: ' a. Site for this construction is located on the property of the City of Denton, Texas. ' b. Before submitting a Propisal for this work, each Bidder shall be held re- sponsible to have examined the premises and satisfied himself as to the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate and that will in any manner ' affect the work under this Contract. No allowance shall be made subsequently in this connection in behalf of Contractor for any error or negligence on his part, nor for slight discrepancies on Drawings as t ,grades, slopes and elevations. C. No trees outside of the actual building area shall be removed and all trees not removed and within the limits of these operations shall be protected in a ' manner acceptable to Architect; such protection shall be removed upon comple- tion of the Contract. ' 2. SCOPE; ' A. Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, transportation, apparatus, light, energy, scaffolding, barricades Lnd tools necessary fur the entire, proper, and substantial completion of his work and shall install, maintain, and remove upon completion all equipment of the construction. He shall be responsible for the safe, proper, and lawful construction, maintenance and use of same, and shall construct in the best and most workmanlike manner these improvements and every- thing properly incic?antal thereto, as shown on plans, stated in these Specifications, or reasonably implied therefrom or in accordance with the Contract Documents. ' b, Unless specifically stated to the contrary, all of the materials in the build- ing shall be new and of the best of tl;e kinds or grades specified, and all workman- ship shall be up to the best recognized standard known to the various trades. 3. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS; a. Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, with ten (10) copies of Draw- ings and Specifications. ' b. Any additional copies of above required by the Contractor will be furnished to him at cost. C. Additional instructions and detail drawings as may be required to fully ex- plain the work will be furnished during tie course of the job. 1 2-l ' d. All copies of Drawings and Specifications, except the Contractor's ex- ecuted contract sets, remain the property of the Architect and shall be re- turned to him at the completion of the project. e. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not on the Drawings, or vice ' versa, shall be considered as mentioned on both. f. The drawings and specifications are entitled: ' DENTON MUNICIPAL BUILDING FOR ' THE CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS g. The drawings are divided into sections and with the numbers in each ' section running: Architectural ' Structural Mechanical (Heating, Ventilating and hir Conditioning) ' Electrical Plumbing h. The specifications consv%t of one bound volume with sections as listed in the Specification index, i. S2ecification Scope: Wherever materials, operations, methods or devices are mentioned, listed or noted in the Specifications and unless some are speci- fically mentioned as furnished and/pr installed by others, said materials, opera- tions, methods and devices (including all necessary material, labor and appliances in connection therewith) shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as part of this Contract. 1 j. Arrangement of Specifications: Wherever the Specificationa have been separated into individual trade divisions, the separation is intended to simplify procedures for estimating and bidding and to provide a means of easy reference for persons using the Specifications. Any division of the overall work to Sub- contractors shall be at the sole discretion of the Contractor. It is the essence ' of the Contract that the Contractor shall assume;full responsibility for the overall, proper, complete performance of the work. Furthermore, the Archi- tect shall not be expected to act nor will he act as arbiter in determination of ' subcontract items. ' 2-2 r a ' 4. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS: ' a. All materials shall be of very best grade of standard manufacture and first- class in every respect. Every brand mentioned in the Specifications is intended to represent quality and type of material which will be demanded. ' b. Should the successful Contractor desire to use material other than that specified, he shall, within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, request ' in writing the approval of the Architect. Request shall be accompanied by com- plete specifications, performance data, photographs, drawings, and difference in cost each substitution will make in the Contract price. C, If Architect does not consider these items to be equal to those specified, he has the authority to require the Contractor to furnish those specified. After e a list of materials has been agreed upon in writing, no further changes are to be made. 5. SUBCONTRACTS: ' Contractor shall submit to the Architect, within five (S) days after award of Contract, a complete list of Subcontractors. No Subcontracts shall be let until Subcontractors are approved in writing by the Architect. 6. MEASUREMENTS: Before ordering any material or doing any work, Contractor ehall verify all measurements at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness of ' same. No extras will be allowed for variation from Drawings in existing condi- tions or for work performed under this Contract. Atry discrepancies found shall be submitted to Architect for instructions before proceeding. 7. COMPLIANCE WITH ORDINANCES AND PUBLIC SAFETY: Contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits and shall comply' with all Ordinances. He shall provide and maintain suitable temporary walk- ways, where needed, fences and other structures required by law and necessary to protect passersby. Work shall be done in such a manner as not to interfere ' with pedestrian traffic. He shall leave access to fire hydrants and protect ad- jacent property at all times during progress en this Contract. Proper signs shall be posted at truck entrances and all other possible safety precautions observed. Contractor shall also be guided by instructions of Structural Engineer ' as regards proper method of shoring. 1 ' 2-3 f. 8. LAYOUT OF BUILDING a. The General Contractor shall employ an experienced arKI competent Civil ' Engineer and cause him to establish a permanent bench to which easy access may be had during the progress of the work for determining all lines and grades and to verify same, from time to time, as the work progresses. lie shall keep on the ' job, at all times, a complete level and complete transit, and keep same in good working condition, and allow the Architect unrestricted use of same at all times, b. As the work progresses, the General Contractor shall lay ouc on the forms or rough flooring, the exact location of all partitions, as a guide to all trades. ' c. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on the Drawings, and shall report any errors or inconsistencies to the Architect ' before commencing work. d. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain datum points, and such ' points shall be established in duplicate in separate locations, protected from injury. ' 9. SCAFFOLDING: ' a. The General Contractor shall provide, inatall, maintaip, and remove at completion of work, all interior and exterior scaffolding required for the execu- tion of the General Contract. t b. Scaffolding for all other work shall be provided, installed, maintained and removed at completion of work by the Contra--tor requiring such scaffolding. ' c. Trades whose work is to be built into masonry, or whose work progresses with masonry work shall be allowed the use of scaffolding that is provided for ' masonry work, d. All scaffolding that is erected on the job shall be built in accord with the ' requirements of all State and Local Laws and Regulations governing such installa- tion. They shall be maintained at all times in a safe condition to adequately pre- vent accidents. ' e. Scaffolding for exterior masonry shall be erected on the side of the wall on which the facing work occurs. No scaffolding shall be built into any exterior ' face work. 10. TEMPORARY BEAT AND ENCLOSURES DURING CONSTRUCTION: a. All heating required during the entire period of construction shall be furnished 1 2-4 a: and maintained by the General Contractor until the fi-►,. ~:eptance of the building at his expense as a part of the General Contr. b. Heating before the permanent service is installed shall: ' (1) Be by the use of approved portable space heaters of the hot air type with electric blowers, and with combustion chambers provided with flues to outdoors, and all suitably protected with approved safety devices. ' (2) Provide adequate temperatures required for the various phases of the building operations of all trades and for the work of all Subcontractors ' and Contractors. (See Divisions fQr their heat requirements, ) (3) Consist of units of sufficient number and each of adequate size to ' heat the various spaces of the building to the temperatures necessary to protect and/or facilitate the kind of work or finishing being done, or installations being made. C. After the permanent heating and/or ventilating equipment is in operation: ' (1) The system may then be used, providing that the General Contractor assutnes the responsibility for maintainirg the system during the heating time, and when the building is finished, will properly cleizn all radiation, ' filters, pumps, etc, and if necessary repljce any broken or obviously worn parts. (2) The entire system must be left in proper operating condition and the guaranty called for will remain in full force and effect. d. The entire responsibility of heating during construction shfll be assumed by the &neral Contractor, who shall be liable far all damages to an}, work, materials, equipment or installation caused by his failure to supply proper and adequate heat as required, e. All labor, material and appliances required to enclose the building or ' sections thereof, including scaffold enclosures, shall be furnished by the General Contractor so that building operations may be conducted continuously and efficiently throughout. Tarpaulins or plywood partitions and barricades as ' required shall be provided wherever permanent construction has not been suffi- ciently completed to afford suitable weather protection. 11. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER: ' The General Contractor shall make the necessary application to the lighting company and pay for all charges, costa and expense incidental to the installation ' and maintenance of temporary lighting and single-phase power as required in 2-S 1 ' connection with his operations, and he shall pay for all current consumed. Lighting shall be sufficient in all locations to permit the mechanics in the ' various trades to properly and satisfactorily execute their work. Temporary light and power outlets shall be so located that trailers not over 40 feet long shall be used in any part of the building. Power outlets shall be so designated. ' Temporary light and power -hall be maintained until the completion of the building i) for a shorter time when so directed by the Architect, and when its use is no longer required, shall be completely removed. Temporary light and ' power shall be available 15 minutes before and after the regular working day for all trades and for such periods as there is overtime work being performed. Single-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate ' construction equipment of the various trades and to install and test equipment. ' 12. TEMPORARY WATER: a. The Contractor shall provide a temporary water supply to be located and designated for the use of all trades. Supply may be taken from existing water main adjacent to the building but shall be sub-metered. ' b. The Contractor shall pay for meter, connection and for all water consumed in the construction of the building. 13.' TEMPORARY TELEPHONE: ' The General Contractor shall provide one (1) straight city telephone for the use of all employed about the project and cor. Architect's use. This Contractor shall pay for all charges for tHs telephone, except that charges fox long dis- tance messages shall be paid for by the person making same. The telephone shall remain until the full completion of the ,Alork, Coin type telepEones will not be acceptable. 14. TEMPORARY OFFICE-. a. The Contractor shall erect at the site, where directed, a substantial weathertight, insulated office having sufficient glazed windows of ample size t and adequate electric lighting and wall outlets. This building shall be for the use of the Project Inspector and for the Contractor and shall be divWed into two rooms. b. Portable chemical toilet(s) shall be provided by the Contractor for the use of construction personnel, ' c. The room for the Project Inspector shall be large enough to contain the ' following equipment which will be furnished and installed by the Contractor: 2-6 ' I Plan Rack of size to hold all Drawings of the job. 1 Plan Table. ' 2 Chairs, heat, and lights. d. The Contractor shall maintain the offices and toilet(s) in a sanitary ' condition and in proper repair and properly heated during cold weather, furnishing the fuel and paying all utility charges. When directed he shall remove the temporary office from the site and shall repair the site and ' rough grade the area as directed by the Architect. e. When adequate space is available in t~e building, the Contractor may ' transfer all of the above facilities to this space at his option and with the permission of the Architect. 15. STORAGE SHEDS, ETC.: ' a. The General Contractor shall provide, on the premises °ahere directed, suitable storage sheds (substantial and weathertight) in which he shall store all materials subject to damage by weather. All storage sheds shall be of suffic}ent size to hold all materials required on the site at one time and shall have floors raised at least 6" above the ground on heavy joists or sleepers. Storage sheds shall have neat appearance and be painted to match offices. ' b. The Contractors for plumbing, sew•ering and gas fitting; heating and ventilating; and electrical work shall provide such temporary buildings as may ' be necessary to fully protect their materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., during the progress of the work. ' 16. PUMPING: ' The General Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps of adequate capacity as required to maintain excavations, pits and depressions within the Contract Limit Lines as well as the building free of water accumulated at any ' time and as necessary to permit the proper installation of the work required under all Contracts. Disposal of pumped water shall be done with due respect to the rights of others on the site and adjoining property owners. All costs ' in connection with the removal of water on the above provided for shall be borne by the General Contractor. However, such pits, trenches and excavations made by other Contractors for their own installations shall be pumped and ' maintained by the Contractor having made said excavation. ' 17. JAIL EQUIPMENT: Special Conditions covering materials and installation of jail Equipment shall ' be found under Division JAIL EQUIPMENT. 2-7 1 ' 18. PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE PROJECT: ' a, The Contractor shall furnish the Owner progress photographs of the pro- ject as follows: three 8" x 10" glossy prints of each of the following views: ' (1) Two (2) different views of the area in which the building is to be located, taken before excavation starts. (2) Four (4) different views when footings are in place and forms com- pleted. (3) Four (4) different views when foundations are completed. (4) Four (J) different views when general structure is ready for roofing. (5) Four (4) different exterior views at completion. (6) Four (4) interior views, as directed, upon completion, b. A title or legend identifying the view shown by each photograph and date shall appear upon the back of said prints. t 14, JOB CONSTRUCTION SIGNS: The Contractor shall provide and erect where directed, a job si; ti of approximately 25 square feet, actual size, color and design to be shown on a Drawing to be fur- nished by the Architect. Sign shall list the name of the building, the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers, the General Contractor, and whatever Subcontractors the Architect shall decid Lettering work shall be done by an experienced sign ' painter and shall by neat and workmanlike. Background color will probably be dark, and at least two other colors will be used for lettering and border. No other signs shall be allowed on the site, 20. ROOMS USED AS CONSTRUCTION STORE ROOMS: When any room in the building is used for a storeroom, shop, etc., the one making ' use of such room will be held responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning arising from such work, ' 21. TE:P*1'ING LABORATORIES: ' A. All tests and inspections required by these Specifications shall be made by laboratories selected by the Architect. 2-8 ' b. All tests will be paid for under the section where it is required. Duplicate reports giving type of test, area in which located and results shall be sent to ' the Architect and Contractor. ' 22. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MATERIAL LIST: At the time of final complet;.on of the work and as a condition to be fulfilled prior to final payment, the Contractor shall carefully instruct the Owner's specially designated representative in the proper operation, maintenance and service of all work and equipmetit provided hereunder. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner a complete list identifying actual materiais and devices incor- porated in the work. The identificcition shall include source of supply, date of Purchase, model and serial number, etc. as required to facilitate future repairs ' and replacements. 23. CLEANING AND POLISHING: At the completion of the Contract, all windows shall be cleaned, removing all ' labels, paint and stains, all hardware, woodwork and walls shall be cleaned, leaving no spots, etc., all floors shall be cleaned and waxed where applicable. Grounds and walks shall be left clean, free of rubbish. Machinery shall be left clean and free ' of dirt and grease. ' 24. PERMITS: Each Contractor shall pay for all permits required for his part of the work. 25. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: a. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified ' in the Contract of the work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this Contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the ' work order. b. The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, dili•- gently, and uninterruptedly at such --ate of progress as will insure full comple- tion thereof within tha time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, ' by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions ' prevailing in this locality. ' 2-9 y, ' C. If the said Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as a part consideration for ' the awarding of this Contract, to pay to the Owner the amount specified in the Contract, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for such breach of con- tract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contrac- tor shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract for completing the work, d. The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ' ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages which the Owner would sustain and said amount shall be retained from time to time by the Oweter from current peri- odical estimates, e. It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract and of the Specifications wherein a definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the Contract an additional time is allowed for the completion of any wo:k. the new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this Contract. Provided, That the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated 4tamages or any excess cost when the delay in completion of the work is due; (1) To any preference, priority or allocation order d0y issued by the Government. ' (2) To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including, but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another Con- tractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and un- usually severe weather; and (3) To any delays of Subcontractors or suppliers occasioned by any of ' the causes specified in (1) and (2) of this article, f. Provided further, that the Contractor shall, within ten (10) day,; from the beginning of such delay, unless the Owner shall grant a further pei•iud of time prior to the date of. final settlement of the Contract, notify the Owner, in writing, of the causes of the delay, who shall ascertain the facts a;xi extent of the delay and notify the Contractor wit'.tin a reasonable time of his decision in the matter, 1 2-10 26. SUBCONTRACTORS: a, Prior to signing of Contract General Contractor shall submit a list of pro- posed Subcontractors to be employed in the execution of the work covered by this Contract. No Subcontracts shall be let until same are approved, in writing, by Architects and Owner. b. General Contractor shall bind all Subcontractors, the Mechanical Contractor ' and the Electrical Contractor, to the terms of the Contract Documents, C. General Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the Owner for ' the acts and omissions of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. d. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relations between Subcontractor and the Owner, ' 27, SUPERINTENDENT: A competent Superintendent, satisfactory to Architects and Owner, shall be on the job full time from the beginning of the job until its acceptance, regardless of the work that is in progress. ' 28. ALTERNATES: a. Contractor shall indicate on his Proposal the amount of the following Alter- nate methods of construction and/or use of materials and equipment which will be considered and determination of their acceptance will be made upon study of the ' cost difference in each of these Alternates. b. Under this heading, add or deduct the costs of all labor, materials and equip- ment necessary to manufacture and install the following items as detailed on Draw- ings and/or specified in various Sections of these Specifications: ALTERNATE NO. 1 - EMERGENCY OPERATING CENTER (E. O. C. Add costs necessary to complete E. O. C. Area as shown on Drawings and specified herein. ALTERNATE NO, 2 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE: Deduct all resilient floor tile in Rooms No. 1007, 1033, 1047, 1069, and 1093, ALTERNATE NO, 3 - CLAY TILE FLOORS: Add clay tile floor with setting bed in Rooms No, 1007, 1033, 1047, 1069 and 1093 to Base Bid. t ALTERNATE NO, 4 - WOOD STICKS ON BURLAP CLOTH: In lieu of 3/8" gypsum board on 5/8" backing board, add wood sticks on burlap cloth on 5/8" backing board. ALTERNATE NO. 5 - COVERED WALK SOUTH ENTRANCE: Add cost necessary to complete covered walk area as shown on Drawings, 1 2-11 ' 29. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION: ' Bidder agrees that the Bid Ls based on the election to construct concrete slabs designed for optional "LIFT-UP" or "POURED-IN-PLACE" construction by either "Lift-Up" Method or "Poured-in-Place" method, to be designated by the Bidder ' on the Bid Form. 1 ' 30. FORM OF GUARANTEE: a. A copy of the following Guarantee shall be signed by the Gjperal Contractor, ' Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, Elec- trical Contractor, and Jail Equipment Contractor. b. Guarantee: CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS DENTON MUNICIPAL BUILDING ' Gentlemen: The Undersigned guarantees the Owner that he will be responsible for all faulty material,, equipment and workmanship and that he will remedy all de- fects due thereto and pay for all damage to other work:esuiting therefrom, which shall appear within a. period of one year from the date of final acceptance or the date substantially completed, whichever is the earlier. Where guarantees or warranties for the longer terms are written into any of the divisions of the specifications, such longer terms shall apply. During this period, upon written notice to do so, the undersigned Contractor shall proceed with due diligence, and at his own expense, to replace all defective ' materials and/or equipment properly and to perform all labor necessary to correct all defects in the work, including damage to other work resulting therefrom. ' In case the undersigned Contractor fails to remedy such defects within a reasonable amount of time, then the Owner may furnish such materials or labor as are necessary to bring the work up to the standard called for and the Under- signed Contractor agrees to reimburse the Owner fully and promptly. Items guaranteed or warranted for periods longer than one year: 1. Waterproofing, Dampproofing and Caulking - S Years 2. Roofing, Roof Insulation and Sheet Metal - S Years 3. Door Closers Under Hardware Section - 2 Years 2-12 ' 4, Wood Doors - Lifetime Against Warpage ' 5, Metal Windows - 2 Years 6. Refer to Mechanical Sections and Jail Equipment section for ' warranties pertaining thereto. ATTEST: t Name of Company Contracting for General Construction Signature and Title ' Name of Company Contracting for Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning ' Sinture and Title ' Name of Company Contracti6g for Plumbing Signature and Title t Name of Company Contracting for ' Electrical t Signature and Title t Name of Company Contracting for Jail Equipment t Signature and Title 2-13 DIVISION 3 - DEMOLITION - SITE CLEARING ' 1. GENERAL: a. The requirements of this section include the furnishing of all materials, labor and equipment shown on the Drawings, specified herein or required for completion of the work, b. Visit site and become familiar with extent of work required to clear and prepare site for new building. ' c. It is not the intention of this Specification to list specifically all items to be covered by this section. This must be determined by the Contractor prior to submittal of his bid and visit to site and by careful examinati on of the Uravrings. d. Refer to Mechanical section of Specifications for capping, removal, re- t routing, disconnection or relocation of utilities, and make necessary arrangements with the utility company. ' 2. DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL. ' a. All material, including salvageable mater. which is a result of demolition operations, becomes the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the premises by him. ' b. Protect and properly terminate all I,:pes, conduits, and wires encountered; give notice to and obtain necessary permits from interested parties for work neces- sary on account of demolition, etc. C. Remove trash from within building site. Maintain streets, sidewalks, and ' gutters clean. d. Comply with all ordinances and regulations regarding the work. Take every ' means and take every precaution to protect all persons and to protect the property. Install necessary safegaurds-to assure such protection. e. Demolish and remove any existing masonry, concrete slabs, curbs, and side- walks within the area of the site, except those specifically designated to remain. E. Remove foundation walls, beams, columns, or footings of old previously de- l molished buildings that may be encountere3 to a depth of 1211 below existing grades. See EXCAVATION section for removal of these to greater depth. ' g. Protect all trees and shrubs that are not within the building area unless directed by Architect to remove. ' 3-1 h. Remove trees and shrubs in building area and other trees specifie2' y the ' Architects to be removed. i. Grub out stumps and sub-surface roots larger than 3" in diameter and matted ' or ccher roots that will interfere with construction. ' 3. CLEANa-UP: Remove debris as it accumulates. Leave entice premises clean and neat. Provide ' barricades of substantial construction meeting City standards at all points of demolition, excavation and construction to afford r+rotection to workmen and the public. 1 1 3-2 :Y ' DIVISION 4 - SITE WORK ' 1. GENERAL: ' The requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SUPPLEMENTS, and SPECIAL CONDITIONS apply to this section. 2. SCOPE: a. Furnish and place all site work materials and complete all work of this Section as described herein and shown on Drawings, including: ' (1) Clearing site. (2) Excavation. (3) Concrete basins and gratings. (4) Finish Grading. 1 b. The following work is referred to in other Sections of these Specifications: (l) Building excavation and earthwork. ' (2) Detail specifications of concrete, cement finish, masonry and mis- cellaneous metal work. (3) Unde:ground drainage and site utility lines. C. The following items of work will be done by the Owner: I ' (1) L.wn sprinklers. (2) Landscape planting. 3. UNDERGROUND SERVICES: Locate position of all underground Mechanical and Electrical lines before com- mencing to excavate and protect same from damage. Any damage caused to same shall be promptly repaired. t'Tovide temporary supports for all lines exposed by excavations until permanently supported or removed as required. 4. MATI'P.:ALS: Materials shall be as described under the following headings. 4-1 t 5. CLEARING SITE: a. The whole area within limits of ffi ~,sh graded area shall be cleaned of all top soil, vegetation, roots, etc. , to a depth of 8" below finish grade. Remove all debris from site and stockpile earth which is suitable for fill material. ' b. Ail tt'ees, bushes, and other vegetation occurring within construction area whic% are not removed by Owner shall be removed and their roots grubbed out to a ' depth of 8" and debris from same shall be removed from site. All trees and shrubs on site, and which are not actually within area of building or paved area, shall be boxed around and protected from damage. 6, EXISTING GRADES: Existing grades are shown on Drawings. However, Owner doer] not guarantee existing grades to be exactly as shown on Drawings, and any varia,:ion in level that may exist shall be acc.pted and corrected as part of tte work to be per- formed in order to obtain the required finish elevations shown on Drawings and required for drainage. 7. EXCAVATION: Perform all excavation and embankment as required to shape the surface of the grade at proper levels for installation of planting soil and for construction of all structures described herein, Any excess excavation material shall be removed from the site, 8. CONCRETE WORK: ' Concrete basins shall be constructed of Concrete as shown on Drawings and as speci- fied under Division 6, ' 9. FINISH GRADING: All lawn areas shall receive a 6" minimum thickness of rich friable top soil suit- able for sodding. Sodding will be-done by Owner. Surfaces shall be raked smooth, removing clods, stone and debris, leaving grades sm-)oth at elevations intended. Changes in slope shall be uniformly rounded. Positive drainage away from struc- tures shall be provided and entire site must drain with no pockets holding water. ' Grades shall be smoothed out to meeting existing grades to extent shown on Site Plan. 1 ~ 9-z ' DIVISION 5 - EARTHWORK, DRILLED FOOTINGS ' 1. GENERAL: The requirements of this section include the furnishing of all materials, labor, and equipment shown on the Drawings, specified herein or required for comple- tion of the work. 2. LAYOUT: ' a. Establish permanent bench marks - carefully protect and maintain during construction. b. Qualifie Engineer set lines, batterboards and grades and establish floor and other required levels. ' c. Notify Architect of discrepancies before starting work. 3. EXCAVATION: a. Refer to mechanical sections for sealing, capping, or re-routing of exist- ing live utility lines. b. Protect and properly terminate all pipes, conduits and wires encountered; give notice to and obtain necessary permits from interested parties for work necessary on account of excavation, etc. C. Remove and store topsoil from bui'ding and paving areas as may bp required for use in finish grading. d. Provide temporary gutter sections for building under construction and for adjacent structures or obstructions to conduct water concentrations away from 1 building area. e. Remove all obstructions encountered under building area such as old building foundations, etc., that have not been removed as specified under DEMOLITION- SITE CLEARING section. ' f. Excavate under entire building area to depth required by structural drawings. Prewide 30" deep by 481, wide crawl trenches under all interior beama at locatipns which will give easy access to all spaces under building. Shape abrupt changes of grades on 1 : 2 slope. 5-1 1 ' g. At formed walls or beams, extend excavation sufficient distance to allow for proper forming, bracing, waterproofing, inspection, removal of forms, soffit clearance and installation of earth retainers. ' h. Make provisions for removal of all forms from under building. ' i. During excavation, shore as required to prevent banks from caving. j. Interception drains and reception beds: see Structural plans. ' k. Slope entire under-floor area so that water will flow to designated reception pits. 12" minimum slope. ' 1. Remove water in excavations at all times during work, week-ends included, using pumps as required. Prevent water frorn draining into excavations by con- trolled grading. Install swalles, dykes, and side drains at beginning of job and maintain continuously. ' M. Material from excavation which is not required for backf ill dr rough grading: remove from the premises. ' n. Leave excavated area under building raked clean, completely free of debris, and with proper slope as required. ' o. See DEMOLITION - SITE CLEARING section for barricades to protect work- men and the public. ' 4. DRILLED FOOTINGS: ' a. Test boring data shown on Drawings is for information only. The Owner and Architect neither guarantee nor accept any responsibility for test hole data, nor ' for sub-surface conditions at any location on the site. Contractor is responsible for any conclusions he may draw from this data. ' b. Open holes: take every precaution to reduce the hazard of open holes. Cover during non-working hours with 1/2" plywood 36" square. Mound 6" of dirt over ply- wood. Keep unauthorized persons, especially minors, at a safe distance during work- ing hours. co Footing depths shown on Drawings are for estimating purposes only. Actual ' depth for each footing to be -approved by Engineer. d. Keep accurate log of all footing depths. Cost adjustment will be made on ' difference in actual depth totals vs. base bid totals. Unit prices for greater or less depth as stated in Contractor's proposal. S-2 1 1 t e. Shafts and bells: excavate on designated centers. Drill plumb within one inch variation in total height. Tinder-ream concentric with shaft. Transfer center of shaft at ground surface accurately to bottom of footing with plumb- bob, and set a 1/2" by 12" bar to serve as fixed center for rotating checking gage. Hand clean all footings. ' f. Form upper part of shafts with thin wall fiber forms, Sonotube or equal. See flans for length. ' g. Casing: if water bearing strata are encountered, set steel casing in shaft to seal off water so that base may be excavated, reinforcing placed, and concrete poured entirely in the dry. 3" of pea gravel around outside of casing. Casing may be pulled after placing concrete, but only in manner and sequence agreeable to Engineer. Allowance for casing as stated in Contractor's proposal. ' h. Water at bearing level: provide pumps as required to remove bulk of water; then hand-bail to permit pouring of concrete in the dry. ' i. Provide inspection facilities, including template for checking base diameters, and provisions for lowering man and 100 watt lamp. Furnish hand hoisting equip- ment on steel tripod with V or larger diameter rope in new and like-new condition. j. Reinforcing and concrete: as specified under POURED-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ' section. k. Footing reinforcing over 16 feet long: set with mechanical hoisting equipment. ' 1. Length of footing reinforcement: extend from bottom of footing to bfram or column soffit. Never raise above bottom of footing. 40-diameter splices required where steel has been cut too short. Secure Engineer's approval prior to making any splice. ' M. Place reinforcing and concrete only after inspection and approval of Engineer. n. Supervision: General Contractor shall supervise all footing operations and ' must be present on the job at all times that foundation Subcontractor is working. He shall assist in inspection of footings and measure footing depths in presence of the Engineer. 1 S. FILL PREPARATION FOR SLABS ON FILL: See Structural Plans. 6. BACKFILL: ' a. Backfill as soon as the work permits, but not before concrete walls, etc. , have attained design. strength. 5-3 ' b. Material: earth free from rubbish, batts or other debris. ! C. Compact by placing fill in 8" layers (bulk) and tamp to 95% Proctor density. d. Take 8 Proctor density compaction tests by testing laboratory appro:red by ! Engineer (at locations designated by Engineer). Reports of tests to Architect and Engineer. ! e. Precast concrete earth retainers: see POURED-IN-PLACE CONCRETE section. Set carefully in place to prevent backfill from sliding under grade beam. Fit snugly together. Fill all vertical joints and laps at beam or wall with cement ! grout. ! 7. ROUGH GRADING: a. Location: within the area shown on Site Plan. ! b. Cut or fill as required to bring rough grade to 4" below finish elevations. Compact fill in 12" layers. Form terraces or embankments where required. Fill ! free of rocks and debris. C. Drainage: control rough grading in vicinity of excavations so that water ! will not run into excavated areas. Shape grade adjacent to building to give posi- tive drainage away from building. Minimum of 16" slope in first eight feet at all points away from building. ! d. Furnish additional fill if amount resulting from excavation or cutting is in- sufficient. ! 8. FINISH GRADING: ! a. Spread rich, black, silty earth, either stripped from site or otherwise furnished, to 4" depth in areas shown to be graded. Round abrupt changes in ! slope. Break up clods and rake to give neat, uniform surface. Earth free of rocks, stumps and debris. ! b. Shape grade to give positive drainage away from building. Minimum of 16" slope in first eight feet at all points away from building. ! 5-4 ' DIVISION 6 - POURED-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WORK ' 1. GENERAL: a. The requirements of this section include the furnishing of all materials, labor, and equipment shown on the Drawings, specified herein or required for completion of the work. ' b. Concrete work included in other sections of these Specifications that is not specifically described shall comply with requirements of this Section. ' c. Metal sleeves, anchors, hangers, dovetail anchor slots, and all embed- ments: furnish and locate by respective trade or by General Contractor. Secure ' approval of Engineer for installation of all sleeves and conduits in structural mem- ber s. ' 2. MATERIALS: ' a. When requested by Engineer, supplier of reinforcing and concrete materials shall furnish certified evidence that. all materials delivered to the project conform to the Specifications. ' b. Portland cement: comply with A. S. T. M. C-150, type 1. ' c. Concrete aggregates for standard concrete: comply with A. S. T. M. C-33. Maximum aggregate size is 3/4" for columns and floor slabs. ' d. Aggregates for lightweight structural concrete shall be of expanded shale and shall comply with A. S. T. M. Specifications C-330. ' e. Water: clean and free from injurious amounts or organic substances. f.• Admixture for all concrete: pozzolith used in accordance with matwfacturer's recommendations. g. Reinforcing: comply with A. S. T. M. A15 or A16. Deformation: comply with ' A: S. T. M. A305. Wire fabric: comply with A. S. T. M. AISS. In the event steel other than that of domestic manufacture is contemplated to be used, furnish to Engineer laboratory tests made by a Testing Laboratory approved by the Engineer ' that said steel meets all requirements. h. Metal accessories: according to latest revision of "MANUAL OF STANDARD ' PRACTICE FOR DETAILING REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES," ACI 315. Accessories resting on forms where underside is left exposed to view, or where plaster, paint, stucco, or dash coat is to be applied shall be plastic or have plastic leg tips at all points of contact with forms. 6-I f i i. Expansion joint material: preforme%l asphaltic joint material, thickness as indicated, as manufactured by Flintkote Co. or Johns-Manville Co. ' j. Expansion joint sealing compound: Kuhl's "Elastic" expansion joint composi- tion or Servicised Products Corp. Hot Poured Para-Plastic joint sealing compound. k. Curing material: "Clear Bond" as manufactured by Guardian Chemical Co. and "Sisalcraft" paper as manufactured by the American Sisalcraft Co. ' 1. Anchor slots: "Beehive" dovetail type as manufactured by Gateway Erectors, Inc., or approved equal. Install anchor slots vertically at 30" spacing in all ex- terior concrete floor or roof beams where masonry or anchored panels go past beams. Install vertically in columns where masonry abutts or is adjacent to columns. 3. CONCRETE TESTS: ' a. Engage and pay for the services of a testing laboratory as approved by the Engineer to perform the concrete tests outlined below. ' b. Furnish sieve and silt analysis o~ proposed fine and coarst aggregate for class of concrete having smallest aggregate. t c. Contemplated proportions: submit for approval together with results of 7-day compression test made prior to beginning of concreting on job for class of concrete having smallest aggregate. d. Slump and compression tests: all field samples taken by laboratory, not by ' Contractor. For each day's pour, take a set of four cylinders for the first 80 cu. yds. and a set of four cylinders for each additional 80 cu. yds. Only minor items such as walks and small slabs on fill are excluded from above testing schedule. ' Make 7-day test on two cylinders and 28-day test on 2 cylinders. Slump tests: as required by Engineer and laboratory. Report of tests: 1 copy to Engineer, 1 to Contractor, 2 to Architect. Identify all cylinders to show date and exact loca- tion in. structure. e. Core tests: as required by Engineer in event 28-day tests fall below those ' specified. Tests to be paid for by Contractor. Comply with A. S. T. M. C-42. If core tests fall as much as 206 below specified strength, the work in question shall be removed and rebuilt by the Contractor at his expense. 4. CONCRETE STRENGTH: As noted on Structural Plans. 5. CONCRETE SLUMP: 511 to 611. 6-2 ' 6. CONCRETE PROPORTIONS: As established by tests. Use a minimum of 4-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 7. CONCRETE ADMIXTURE: See "Admixture for all Concrete." ' S. WOOD FORMS: a. Unexpised surfaces: #2 common or better, plywood. b. Exposed surfac,-s: new or like-new moisture resistant fir form plywood, ' minimum 5-ply at least 9/16" thick; or plywood forms lined with new fir form exterior, 3-ply, not less than 1/4" thick. Surface must be smooth, completely free from scratches, indentations, unsound surface knots, ripples, etching, prominent grain, depressions, warps or breaks. "Exposed surfaces" include concrete surfaces which are to be painted or dash coated. ' 9. METAL FORMS: ' Steel pan forms must be approved by Engineer prior to their erection. Sizes as indicated. Remove after use. Steel forms in adjacent bays wil; be in exact ' alignment to provide continuity of the joists throughout the work. Narrower standard form widths may be utilized as required to space joists to maintain other details shown. Adjust spacing so that joists will miss plumbing sleeves. Form 8" ' wide headers where required with two 115 bars top and bottom. 10. FORM CONSTRUCTION: a. Form both sides and soffit of all grade beams, subgrade beams, subgrade walls and all other strrctural concrete below and above existing or finish grade unless otherwise shown on plans, and remove all such formwork prior to backfilling. b. Slab and beams on fill: see Structural plans. C. Construct complete with centering, shores, etc. Conform to shape, lines, ' grade and dimensions required by Drawings; use plywood sheets large as practical: all surfaces straight, plumb and properly braced; joints accurately matched and mortar-tight. Maintain suffic: entiy rigid to prevent deformation under load. ' If adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, provide trussed supports. For cleaning and inspection in wall and column forms, provide temporary openings. Clean and oil forms before re-use. Forms to be readily removable without ham- mering or prying against concrete. Contractor is responsible for providing safe form work everywhere throughout the job. t 6-3 d. Form ties: use regular snap ties as approved by Engineer. No metal within one inch of finished surface when forms are removed. Wire ties not permitted. ' e. Oiling of forms: lightly coat with oil forms for exposed surfaces, before placing reinforcing. Remove surplus oil. Forms for unexposed surfaces may be thoroughly wet with water in lieu of oiling immediately before placing concrete. f. Removal of forms: side forms of beams and walls may be removed in 48 hours after concrete placement. Bottom of slabs and soffit forma of beams and ribs may be removed when strength of concrete as shown by standard test cylinder break has reached 2500 psi but in not less than seven days in any case. However, ' forms may not be removed if the slabs, ribs and beams are supporting any loading such as construction materials or shoring for floor or roof above. Column forms may be removed in three days. r g. Chamfer strips: use at all angles of concrete which is exposed to view. e h. Expansion joints: use preformed asphaltic expansion joint material. 11. REINFORCING: a. Excessive scale or rust not permitted. Bars accurately bent and placed in ' position, securely supported to prevent movement during placing of concrete. Spacer bars, supports, etc., are not scheduled but are to be furnished and placed as described under "Metal Accessories" in this section. ' b. Fabrication: according to latest revision of MANUAL OF STANDARD PRAC- TICE FOR DETAILING REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES, ACI 315. Laps and splices 40 bar diameters unless shown otherwise on Plans. It is the Contrac- tor's responsibility to secure properly fabricated reinforcing and to place it pro- perly. Field bends: only with Engineer's approval. C. Shop Drawings: fabricator furnish complete placing drawings and bar bending lists to Contractor. It is the Contractor's responsibility to secure properly fabricated reinforcing and place it properly. d. Cleaning: remove dried concrete or other materials that may reduce bond. 12. MIXING CONCRETE: Mixed and delivered in accordance with "Standard Specifica- tions for Ready-Mixed Concrete, " A. S. T. M. C-94. 13. PLACING CONCRETE: a. Inspection and approval of steel setting by Architect or Engineer prior to ' pouring. 6-4 M *l b. All reinforcing, base plates, dowels, etc., completely in place for the entire section to be concreted before starting pour. C. Remove water and debris from spaces to be occupied by concrete. ' d. Provide runways for wheeled equipment to protect reinforcing. e. Convey from mixer as rapidly as practicable. Prevent separation or loss of ingredients. Convey continuously until the unit of operation is completed. f. Partially hardened or initially set concrete may not be used. ' g. Chuting: use metal or.metal lined chutes. ' h. Compaction by mechanical vibrating equipment required for all concrete ex- cept footing piers. Place in layers not over 12" deep and compact each layer, supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or `amping. ' i. Concrete columns: pour separately from other structure; 24 hour delay. ' j. Bonding new concrete to old: clean, roughen, and wet old surface; then coat with neat cement grout. Place new concrete before grout sets. ' k. Grout for setting column bases and other metal items: equal parts sand and cement. See STRUCTURAL STEEL section for special grouts. 1. Cold weather placing: place only when temperature is 44 degrees Fah. or above, and if less than 45 degrees rah., it shall be rising. Maintain concrete at temperature of 50 degrees Fail. or above 72 hours after placing, except that period 1 maybe reduced to 24 hours where high-early-strength cement is used. Do not mix chemicals with concrete to prevent freezing. ' 14. FINISHES OTHER THAN FLOORS AND SLABS: ' a. Patch honeycomb, tie rod holes, and minor defects with one part cement and two parts sand. Remove fins and rough edges. e b. Concrete exposed to view, both interior and exterior, shall be rubbed with carborundum bricks and water no sooner than 48 hours and not later than one week after pouring. Plastering such surfaces will not be permitted. Remove all form marks, bulges, and irregularities. Finished surfaces: true and uniform in texture. ' 15. SLAB FINISHES: a. Carefully work out finishes to agree with other materials and finishes. Verify all elevations, levels and conditions. Carefully tool all exposed edges. 6-5 1 ' b. Floors: screed to level surface; use jitterbug; wood-float, then steel trowel to hard, even surface; free from any defects. Slope as required to drains or as indicated on Drawings. At ramps and entry porches, steel trowel once, the rubber-float to non-slip finish. Score into squares where indicated. C. Roofs and canopy decks: screed to level surface; wood-float, then trowel to smooth, "n surface. d. Areas to receive topping or other finish: screed to level surface; course texture. ' e. Cure all slabs except those to receive tile finish by applying "Clear Bond" a: the rate of 400 sq. ft. to the gallon just as soon as concrete has taken initial ' set and can receive same without damaging the finish. Areas to receive the finish shall be cured by covering with wetted "Sisalcraft" paper having 41' minimum side laps sealed with non-staining mastic, glue or waterproof pressure-sensitive e tape. The "Sisalcraft"shall be maintained in place for a minimum of seven days. Apply curing material same day as concrete is poured. ' f. Protect all concrete surfaces from premature drying and from washing rains. ' 16. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Locate 1/4 of span beyond support ;n the direction of the pour for slabs, joists, beams and walls. Form horizontal keys and add extra rein- forcing at joints. Secure Engineer's appro. al. 17. EXPANSION JOINTS: Remove top 3/4" of preformed asphalt expansion joint material, sweep clean, and fill with expansion joint sealing compound. ' 18. CEMENT WASH: Where required at locations such as-vents, grilles, ledges: provide neatly finished cement wash of one part cement to 2-1/2 parts clean sand. ' 19. TREADS AND RISERS: Equal for any one flight; lines straight and level, angles ' neatly rounded. ' 20. WALXS AND OTHER CEMENT WORK: See SITE WORK Section. ' b-b e 21. PRECAST CONCRETE "EARTH" RETAINERS: Where retainage exceeds 1611, cast type "B" retainers with 6x6-6ga. mesh in center, 3" thick, in practical lengths, ' depth to give 8" lap at beam and 8" seat in earth. All other, type "A" retainers, 1-5/8" thick, in practical lengths, 16" minimum depth, 4" lap at beam and 4" seat in earth Provide minimum clearance of 8" under all beams and walls. Fill all ' vertical joi-its and laps at beam or wall with cement grout. ' 22. PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS: Neatly finished 18" x 36" by 5" thick installed at base of all downspouts. Three #4 reinforcing bars; channel groove in top having steep pitch outward. 23. FLOOR HATCH: Install as located on Plans. See idISCELLANEOUS METALS Section. 24. CLEANING: Clean all concrete work of mortar, plaster, paint, grease, oil, etc. Defective areas replaced or repaired. I I ' 6-7 1 ' DIVISION 7 - STRUCTURAL STEEL ' 1. GENERAL: The requirements of this Section include the furnishing of all materials, labor, and equipment shown on the Drawings, specified herein or required for comple- tion of the work. 2. MATERIALS-, Comply with A. S. T. M. A36, latest edition and amendmerts. ' 3. SHOP DRAWINGS: ' a. Completely detailed, showing anchor bolt setting, placing and erection plans; all member sizes, location, bridging, anchorage, connections and method of assembly. Contractor shall carefully check these drawings, then submit to ' Architect for their approval, then carefully recheck, all prior to fabrication. b. The Architect's approval of shop drawings is approval of general design t and does not relieve the Contractor or his Subcontractor from correcting, at their own expense, such details on the Drawings and in the completed work ea may thereafter be found faulty. The Architect assumes no responsibility for figured dimensions or quantities. 4. FABRICATION AND ERECTION: a. Comply with the Specifications of the Design Fabrication and Erection of ' Structural Steel for Buildings as amended to date and the Code of Standard Prac- tice, latest edition as adopted by the American Institute of Steel Construction. Welding: comply with Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construc- tion as published by the American Welding Society, EXCEPT that all welding is by electric arc process. b. Provide temporary bracing for accurate plumbing and to resist all wind and construction loads. Contractor assumes all responsibility for proper fabrication and erection. ' c. Exposed steel members: specially selected for uniformity of texture, straightness, and freedom from kinks, twist, warp, pitta and scale. Connections: ' accurately aligned, close tolerance, neat, smooth finish. Looks is filly as impor- tant as strength and will constitute grounds for rejection even after members are in final position. 1 7-1 r; S. .PAWTING: ! Shop prime coat of Sherwin "Kronik, " Pittsburgh "Ironhide, " or Negley' 9 "Zinc Chromate Rust-Inhibitive Paint." Field touch-up, same material. 1 6. NON-SHRINK GROUT: ' The Master Builders Co. 'lEmbeco" br Sonneborn Chemical & Refinin, Corp. "Ferrolith G." Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing. Use where called for on plans. i i i 1 1 1 ! i 7-1 1 DIVISION 8 - OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS ' 1. GENERAL: ' The requirements of this section include the furnishing of all materials, lahor, and equipment shown on the Drawings, specified herein or required for conil:%7- tion of the work. 1 2. MATERIALS: Materials, design, welding, anchorage, bridging, handling, erection, and shop painting shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel joists as adopted by the Steel Joist Institute, latest revision, with exceptions, alterna- tives, and specific applications as noted on the plans and as herein specified. ' 3. FABRICATOR: ' Must be a member company of the Steel Joist Institute or the. American Institute of Steel Construction. i 4. SHOP DRAWINGS: ' a. Completely detailed showing anchor bolt setting, placing and erection plans, all member sizes, location, bridging, anchorage, connections and method of assem- bly. Contractor shall carefully check these Drawings, then submit to Architect ' for his approval, then carefully recheck, all prior to fabrication. b. The Architect's approval of Shop Drawings is approval of general design and t details and does not relieve the Contractor or his Subcontractor from correctii:b at their own expense such details on the Drawings and in the completed work as may thereafter be found faulty. The Architect assumes no Aesponsibility for ' figured dimensions or quantities. ' 5. ERECTION: Weld all joist seats to steel beams or special anchorage. ' 6. PAINTING: Zinc chromate shop coat where joists are exposed to vie%. All other: see MATERIALS this section. ' 7. HANDLING: Kinks or sharp bends in joists will be cause for rejection. Use caution when unloading, storing or handling. No field cutting allowed. 8. BRIDGING: As per Steel Joist Institute Specifications unless otherwise noted. ' 8-1 DIVISION 9 - LIFT SLAB OPERATIONS ' 1. SCOPE: This Article sets forth the operations required in using the Youtz-Slick Lift Slab method of construction, to place, lift, and secure the lifted portions of the structure at their final positions. Lift Slab Contractor employed to lift and secure the lifted poi tions of the structural shall be an approved Licensee of and shall use equipment as supplied by the Uvited States Lift Slab Corporation. ' 2. GENERAL: a. Lift slab method of construction shall conform with the following sequence of operations: t (1) Erecting and 21umbing columns= for the building which are secured at their lower most ands to the foundation. ' (2) Placing a first slab which surrounds these columns. (3) Applying to top of this sab a layer of bond preventing material. (4) Casting a concrete slab directly on top of the first slab which slabs ' are separated only by a layer of bond preventing material. (5) Attaching the lifting equipment to the columns and slab to be lifted. 1 (6) Operating the lifting equipment to lift the V p slab to a predetermined elevation on the columns. (7) Maintaining a sliding and guided relationship between the collars and columns while the slab is being lifted in order to prevent sidesway. (8) Temporarily or permanently securing the lifted slab to the columns. ' (9) Repeating these steps until all of the slabs are brought to their final grades. b. Lift Slab Contractor shall furnish skilled labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the lifting operation. Lift Slab Contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and other trades regarding use of this construction method, and shall supply any required information prior to start of construction for bene- fit of all parties directly involved in the project. ' 9-1 C. General Contractor shall furnish all materials which are to remain a perman- ent part of the building; such as concrete, reinforcing, columns, anchor bolts, ' shop-welded construction, shear plates, etc. In addition, he shall construct, place required forms, apply separating material, place lifting collars, and place, finish, and cure all slabs to be lifted. He shall clean out collar keyholes and strip ' all forms. He shall be in attendance during raising of slabs to verify elevations, other conditions affecting this work and to receive instructions relative to the handling of slabs. General Contractor shall form and pour in place all blockouts, ' pour strips, keyholes and grouted areas aI lifting collars. d. General Contractor shall furnish and connect to the lifting equipment ' electric power as required for the operation of the equipment. e. General Contractor shall rough grade area around building prier to arrival ' of Lifting Contractor's equipment in order to eliminate standing water and to provide access for crane or other equipment required to unload or set the lifting jacks on columns . f. Cast lifting collars shall be made of cast steel meeting A. S.T. M. Speci- fications A-27-55 Grade 60-30, with a maximum carbon content of 0. 25 and with ' a minimum tensile strength of 60, 000 pcunds per square inch. Castings shall be heat treated and shop inspected for flaws or cracks before shipment. Casting may be repaired by welding provided they are stress relieved after welding. ' g. FabricateZ steel collars shall be made of structural steel s'napes rolled from steel meeting A. S. T. M. Specifications of Serial Designation A-7. Collars shall ' be fabricated by welding in accordance with the American Welding Society Code for Arc Welding in Building Construction. ' h. Collars shall be of sizes indicated on Drawings. Contractor shall submit to Architects complete detail drawings for approval. Collars shall be set and held firmly in place during pouring of concrete and placing of reinforcing steel. The ' lifting holes in each collar shall be set in the direction so indicated on Drawings. Clearance between column and collar shall be uniform around the circumference of the column. Paper, rags, blcckouts, or other material shall be placed in the lift- 1 ing holes and in the clearance between column and collar to prevent entry of con- crete into these spaces, and shall be removed by General Contractor prior to be- ginning of lifting operation:. ' i. Whenever lift slabs or other slabs that act as forms for lift slabs are to receive a steel trowel finish or other smooth monolithic finish, these finishes ' shall be applied to each slab prior to application of separating medium, M all cases where one slab is to be poured directly on the other, the top surface of ' lower slab shall be finished with sufficient ca .e to insure that there will be no irregularities in the lower surface of the slab to be poured upon it. ' 9-2 If a slab is used as a casting deck, a separating medium shall be applied to top surface of the lower slab to prevent bonding of one slab to the other. ' The separating medium is applied to troweled surface of a slab according to manufacturer's directions and specifications. k. When temporary bracing is required, it shall be called for in detail by the Designing Engineer. However, bracing details should be coordinated with Lift Slab Contractor in order that maximum utilization of existing guying and bracing materials can be realized. 1. No slab shall be lifted until written permission is secured from Architects to proceed with the work. This permission will not be given until the Laboratory Tests on compression cylinders indicate that concrete in slab to be lifted has reached a strength that will guarantee no damage to slab nor excess deflection caused by incompletely cured concrete. In no case shalla slab be lifted that is less than 14 days old or has not reached a strength of 2, 500 lbs. per square inch in compression. M. Column ends shall be cut square and flat to support the lifting equipment on the upper end, and base plates shall be welded square with the column. Care shall be exercised in welding the base plate to column and various column components ' to avoid warping and twisting. 1 n, Lift Slab Contractor shall be properly licensed by and shall use equipment developed and approved by the United States Lift Slab Corporation. He shall pro- vide experienced operators capa`.+le of competent use of equipment, direction of ' coordination with other Contractors, as necessary. o. General Contractor shall, with a level instrument, place grade mark upon ' each column, furnish Lifting Contractor with story pole to guage distance from pre-determined mark on column to underside of concrete slab when brought into final position, At no time during lifting of any slab shall it be subjected to loads and/or forces which, in opinion ofArchitec to, will produce overstress in any por- tion of the slabs. As each ilab is being lifted, it shall (except for elastic defor- mations) be maintained within 1/211 of fiat throughout all of its lifting points, ' p, Lifting equipment shall be as developed, and approved by United States Lift Slab Corporation, and shall have a continuously engaged follow or tale-up nut constantly engaged at all times to prevent the retrogression of the slab. ' 3. CLEANING: ' Upon completion of work, forms, equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from the premises. Finished concrete sur- faces shall be left in a clean and perfect condition, satisfactory to Architects. 4-3 1 4. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION: ' a. Contractor shall have the option of constructing the slabs so designed by the "LIFT UP" method as specified and shown, or of providing the necessary forms and supports, and placing the concrete d _ ,~ctly in its final position. ' b. Contractor's Proposal shall indicate which method of construction his proposal is based on. 1 1 i 9-4 I, 1 DIVISION 10 - MASONRY SCOPE: ' a. The work described in this Division of the Specifications includes the following: (1) All brick walls. ' (2) Concrete block walls shall be 4" x 8" x 16" or 8" x 8" x 16" to A. S. T. M. Specification C-90-44, Grade A. Units to be processed with "Auto- Clave" procedure. ' (3) Building into masonry all door frames, bolts, anchors, nailing blocks, inserts, flashing, etc, indicated on the drawings or reasonably implied therefrom. ' (4) Furnishing and locating anchors and wall ties. (5) Furnishing and placing wall reinforcement, (6) Cleaning masonry and removal of surplus materials. (7) Common brick floor pavers, b. All tools,. equipment, material, labor and-other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2. WORK NOT INCLUDED: ' a, Metal door frames are specified under METAL DOORS AND FRAMES. b. Bolts are specified under MISCELLANEOUS METALS. C. Flashing material is specified under ROOFING AND SHEET METAL. 3, MATERIAL: e a. Common brick shall be modular and shall conform to the requirements of A.S.T. M. Specification C-216, Graae NW. ' b, Face brick to be 2-1/4" x 3-5/8" x 7-5/8" equal to and similar to E1 Forde brick as manufactured by Acme Brick Company, Color shall be of yellow and gold ' range as selected by Archi':Cct, C. Brick at interior wall of Room Nos, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005 and 1006 1 shall be Acme "Bennett Rio Grande Sand Mold Colonial. 11 Paint as specified under PAINTING AND FINISHING, 10-1 ' a, Wall reinforcement shall be heavy duty Econo-Lok (3/16" wire). Special variable width units shall be furnished to-accommodate the varying wall widths ' on the exterior perimeter of the building. e. Mas,3nry cement shall conform to the requirements of the A. S. T.M. C91-56T, t Type 11. f. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of A.S.T. M. C160-55, ' Type I. g, Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of A. S. T. M. C207-49, ' Type S. h. Quicklime shall conform to the requirements of A. S. T. M. CS-26. ' i, Natural or manufactured sand shall be used and shall conform to the require- ments of the Tentative Specifications for Aggregate fw Masonry Mortar, A. S. T. ' M. C144-52T. j, Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of ails, acids, alkalies, ' organic materials or other deleterious substances. .k, Admixtures: Water-repellents, plasticizing agents or other admixtures ' shall be the products of manufacturers who are able to attest to the satisfactory performance thereof resulting from similar use on other work; shall be used only with Type B mortar to which they shall be added at the time of mixing without en- dangering conformance of the mortar to the requirements of the property speci- fications. Except that ro admixture shall be used with inas-inry cement unless recommended by the manufacturer. ' 1, Mortar Colors: Pigments used to color mortar shall be puxe, cherricslly inert, non-fading, all cdi-fast, mineral oxides; finely ground and specially pre- pared for use in mortar to which they shall be aided it the time of mixing with- out endangering conformance of the mortar to requirements of the property speci- fications. ' m. Anti-freeze Compoi-nds: No anti-& ec -e liquids, salts, or other substances shall be used in the mortar to lower the freezing point. ' n.. Handling and Storage: All masonry units and mortar materials shall be handled in such manner as to prevent breakage, and adulteration by foreign mater - ' ials. Care shall be taken during lozding and unloading operations and piling, to ade- quately protect arrises and exposed surfacces of masonry units from injury. Units shall be stored on platforms or in any other approved manner which will protect these ' materials from contact with the soil and, upon deliv-ry to the job site, units shall be placed under cover or otherwise adequately protected from the weatlser until used. ' Stockpiles shall be located on the job site so as to avoid damage and be protected from heavy or unnecessary traffic and from building operations. 10-2 (1) Cementitious materials shall be delivered to the job site in manu- facturer's original containers, unbroken and with the manufacturer's name ' and brand plainly marked thereon. Delivery of all materials shall be made in such manner as to prevent inclusion of foreign materials and to protect them from damage. ' (2) Materials subject to damage by the elements shall be stored in weathertight enclosures having floors raised at least 12" above the adjacent ' grade and in such manner as to prevent damage to the original containers and to permit easy identification. Aggregates shall be stockpiled in such manner as to prevent the inclusion of any foreign materials. o, Mortar: ' (1) Mortar shall conform to the requirements of A. S. T. M. Specification C270-57T, except that no masonry cement shall be used in reinforced brick masonry, or in any grout. (2) Machine Mixing: All cementitious materials and aggregates shall be mixed in a drum-type batch mixer for a minimum period of three minutes ' after all materials have been deposited in the mixer, and for a maximum of time necessary to produce a homogeneous mass, using the quantity of water required to produce the desired workability. ' (3) Hand Mixing: All cementitious materials and aggregates shall be mixed in a tight mortar mixing box. The mixing time shall be not less than is neces- sary to reproduce results obtained by machine mixing after the required amount of water has been added to obtain desired workability. ' (4) Measurement: The method used for measuring materials for masonry mortars shall be such that the specified proportions of the materials can be controlled and accurately maintained. The weights per cubic foot of the ' materials shall be considered to be the following: MATERIAL WEIGHT (PCF) Masonry cement Printed on bag Portland cement 94 lbs. ' Hydrated lime 40 lbs. Lime Putty 80 lbs. Sand 80 lbs. (dry) (5) Quicklime shall be slaked in accordance with the manufacturer's direc- tions and allowed to stand for at least 24 hours before using and in such manner as to protect the mixture against excessive evaporation. e (6) Use of Hydrated Lime: Hydrated lime shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. ' 10-3 ' (7) Property Specifications: In addition to requirements set forth herein for measurement and mixing, mortar shall conform to certain aggregate ratio, water retention and compressive strength requirements. t (a) Aggregate Ratio: The damp loose volume of aggregate in the mortar shall be not less than two and one quarter nor more than three times the total separate volumes of cementitious materials used. (b) Water Retention: Mortar made of the same materials and in the same proportions to be used on construction, mixed to an initial flow of 100 to IIS% shall have a flow of not less than 706. ' (c) Compressive Strength: The average compressive strength of three 2" cubes of mortar, made of the same materials and in the same ' proportions to be used on construction, shall conform to strength re- quirements as set forth in A. S. T. M. Specification C270-57T. ' (8) Proportion Specifications: (a) In addition to requirements set forth herein for measurement and ' mixing, mortar shall be proportioned by volume, with respect to type, and unless data are presented to show that the mortar meets property specifications requirements, the proportion specifications shall govern. ' (b) Type A (Portlud cement mortar) shall be proportioned one (1) part Portland cement to more than one-half (1/2) part but not more than one and oqe-quarter (1-1/4) parts of hydrated lime or lime putty ' to a minimum of four and one-half (4-1/2) parts and a maximum of six (6) parts of aggregate rr.easured in damp, loose condition. ' (c) Type H (Masonry cement mortar) shall be proportioned one part of masonry cement to not less than 2-1/4 parts nore more than 3 parts ' of aggregate in damp, loose condition. Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added in an amount not to exceed 20% of the volume of masonry cement when required to increase workability except that this provision shall not ' apply where the manufacturer of the masonry cement recommends against the addition of lime to his product. (d) Grout shall be proportioned one (1) part Portland cement to npt more than two (2) parts of aggregate measured in damp, loose co,idition. Hydrated lime may be added in an amourt not toe3teed fifteen per cent ' (15%) when required to secure workability. Grout containing very fine aggregate, or neat cement grout, may be prepared for use where spaces are too narrow to permit the use of regular grout. 10-4 ' 4. WORKMANSHIP: a. Handling: Masonry :!nits shall be handled from storage to scaffold and durirg erection in such manner as to adequately protect arrises and exposed surfaces of units from injury. b. Dampening or Wetting of Clay Masonry Units: Tho method of wetting shall be such as to insure that each unit is nearly saturated, surface dry when laid. ' c. Retempgrirg: Mortar which has stiffened shall be retempered to restore workability and water shall be added for this purpose as frequently as needed during the period of use. Mortar which has stood for more than two hours after the ini- tial mixing or which has been allowed to stiffen beyond the point of retempering shall not be used. ' d. La_i_g_Te_perature: Unless adequate provisions are made for heating and drying materials and for protecting the completed work for at least 48 hours ' after erection, no units shall be laid when the ambient temperature is less than 320 F. and rising, or below 400 F. and falling. Units having a film of water or frost on their surfaces shall not be laid, and no work shall proceed on frozen mater- ials. e. Protection. Units incorporated as a part of incomplete construction not ' beisig worked on shall be adequately protected at all times during construction operations. At such times as inclement weather is imminent and/or work is dis- continued, the tops of all exposed units shall be protected with moisture-resistant ' cover well-secured in place. f, joining of Work: Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially sct or totally set, the exposed surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned and lightly wetted. All loose masonry units and mortar sh Jl be removed. If it becomes necessary to "stop-off" a horizontal run of masonry, t'ais shall be done only by ' raking back 1/2 unit length in each course and, if grout is used, stopping grout 4" back of the rake. Toothing will not be. permitted except upon written approval of the Architect. g, Mortar ioints of all masonry units shall b^_ of such thickness that the cours- ing vertically and the bond horizontally will work modular. ' h. Horizontal and vertical joints in brick masonry shall be filled solid. Mortar shall be spread over tlR full area of the unit in horizontal joints. Vertical sur- faces of the units shall be heavily buttered so that mortar covers the entire end area of the unit before being placed in the wall. There shall be a sufficient quanti- ty of mortar used so that as each unit is shoved into place, plumbed and leveled ' there shall be an excess of mortar squeezed out of the joints on both sides of the unit; there shall be no voids iii the mortar in either the head or the bed joints. THIS REQUIREMENT WILL BE STRICTLY ADHERED TO AND ANY VIOLATION WILL 10-3 .tyr..~',!~::.~ie.:~~Y2Y'r.-,, ~ ~.;f:.• .x.. a..~ :~:lrid~x4a~ttuJ1~ A►~Si1':&.nit~m~3~S.tr:I~sif ' RESULT IN THE REMOVAL AND REBUILDING OF SUCH PORTION OF THE MASONRY AS IS DEEMED NECESSARY BY THE ARCHITECT. i. Tooling: All horizontal and vertical joints shall be thoroughly compacted and pressed tight against the edges of units with a proper tool to provide a weather- tight joint. Tooling shall be done when the mortar has become thumbprint hard. j. All brick shall be laid in a common running bond; wall reinforcement shall be built into each sixth joint of brick masonry, ' k. Walls shall be erected with units of the size and at the locations to produce ' the results as shown on the drawings. All units shall be firmly bedded in mortar; laid plumb, true to line and in level, accurately-spaced courses. All corners and reveals shall be built plumb and true. All corners, including wall breaks in the exterior of tr;e perimeter walls shall be bonded. 1. Where indiciited on the drawings, brick cavity in the wall shall be filled with 3000 psi. concrete and reinforced as shown. in. Anchors, inserts and accessories required to be built-in with the masonry ' shall be placed as called for on the drawings and built-in as erection progresses. n. Structural steel items supported on or in masonry shall be full grcut bedded. o. Cutting of units required to accommodate the work of others shall be per- formed by masonry mechanics and, along with other necessary cutting, shall be ' done in such manner as to insure unbroken edges cut plumb and true. Chases and other cut or raked-out areas shall be kept free from mortar or other debris. Patching shall be kept to a minimum and, wherever necessary on exposed work, e shall be carried out in such manner as to restore the original contour of the patched material in an accurate manner. P. Back-up walls shall be laid at least six courses ahead of exterior brick to allow installation of inner wall dampproofing. See Division WATERPROOFING, DAMPPROOFING. ' q. Upon completi.in of the work, all holes in exposed mortar joints shall be filled with fresh mortar and suitably tooled. After pointing has set and hardened, all ex- posed surfaces of units shall be thoroughly cleaned with stiff brushes, cleaning tools and clear water. Acid shall not be used. All exposed masonry shall be left clean, free from mortar daubs and with tight mortar joints throughout. ' S. SPECIAI. UNITS: ' Brick as shown on Plans for Pavers shall be purchased under an Allowance. See Division ALLOWANCE FOR SPECIAL ITEMS: ' 10-6 ' D1YISION 11 - ROOF DECK, WOOD ' 1. SCOPE: ' a. The work desczlbed in this division of the specifications includes material and installation of all wood roof decks as called for or shown on the Drawings. b. All tools, equipment, material, labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. ' c. A two-piece sample of the wood deck shalt be furnished to the Architect for approval before ordering. Sample shall be of sufficient length to be repre- sentative of the appearance of the material delivered to the job and si.all show the special joint treatment and tongue-and-grooving. ' 2. MATERIAL: a. Nominal size of wood deck shall be 2" x 6" select Western Red Cedar, machined to a tongue-and-groove with lap-and-gap joint (box-type joints.) Moisture content shall be from 12% to IS%. Exposed face shall be smooth- planed. Ends shall be square-trimmed so that clean butt joints are obtained without splintered or frayed ends on exposed faces. ' b. All wood deck shall be treated with "Non-Com" fire protective treatment as produced by the Koppers Company, Inc. ' c. Deck shall be furnished in lengths as required by the conditions of job use. (See Drawings.) d. Deck shall be pre-drilled at factory for special 8" wmularly grooved spikes. 3. INSTALLATION: a. Apply deck with finished face downward and tongues upward on pitched sur- faces. Fasten to every support with one spike of sufficient length to penetrate the deck and its supporting members, face-nailed, and one 40d nail toe-nail;-.d. Runs of deck to be spiked to each other through pre-drilled holes not over 30" apart, with one spike within 10" of each end of each piece. End cuts shall be such ai to allow ends to have full contact. 11-1 1 b. End joints in deck over Room Nos. 1005, and 1006 shall occur only over the supports. 1 c. Lengths are to be so selected in erection that joints in the same general lines shall be separated by at least I intervening courses, and a minimum distance of 4' between joints in adjacent courses. 9. Deck shall be stored on blocks above ground with each layer separated with wood strips. Cover the stack with 6 mil plastic tent so that air may circulate on 4 sides. As deck is installed, it is to be covered immediately with I S# asphalt roofing felt, shower-tacked with joints lapped 211, 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 i 11-2 DIVISION 12 - ROOF INSULATION 1. SCOPE: a. The work described in this division of the Specifications includes rigid roof insulation and installation of same. ' b. All tools, equipment, material, labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portior, of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2. MATERIALS: ' a. Ri¢id Insulation shall be equal to Fesco Board as manufactured by Johns- Manville, thickness as hereinafter specified. ' b. Asphalt for application shall be as specified in ROOFING. 3. APPLICATION: ' a. Decks shall be rigid, tight, dry, smooth, clean, free from defects, damage and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and be prepared to receive insulation as specified by the built-up roofing material manufacturer. ' b. Roof deck over concrete slab areas shall receive 2" board and all other wood deck roof surfaces shall have one layer of 1" board. 12-1 ,yr DIVISION 13 - ROOFING AND SHEET METAL 1. GENERAL: a. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment to erect and complete all roofing and sheet metal work and associated items as required for full comple- tion of the project. All sheet metal shall be made to fit and work in conjunction e with other materials and finishes. Verification of dimensions and adjustments shall be at building as necessary to properly finish work. ' b. Sheet Metal Subcontractor shall cooperate with other Subcontractors to the fullest extent ami shall place flashing, flashing receivers, ctc., at such times and in such manner as required and directed. ' c. Formed sheet metal members used in connection with installation of doors and windows are specified under appropriate sections and are not described in this section. d. Rcv fing shall be supplied only by a reputable aid experienced Contractor. ' Roofer shall examine all roof surfaces, etc., before starting work and report to General Contractor for correction of any surfaces that are unsatisfactory. When roofing is started on any one area, it shall be taken to mean that deck is in satisfactory condition, e. All wood blocking, insulation, nailing strips, and cants at roofs shall be ' installed complete before roofing work is commenced. ' 2. MATERIALS: a. Asphalt shall be equal to Barrett "Anchor Bond." Steep asphalt s':all bt, equal to Barrett "Crystal" steepasphalt. b. Tarred felts shall meet A, S. T. M. Specifications No. D-227 and shall weigh ' not less than 15 lbs. per 100 sq. ft. and shall be equal to Barrett "Vaporbar" coated base sheet. ' c. Built-up roof surface shall be washed pea gravel passing 5/8" screen but retained on 1/4" screen, and shall be absolutely dry when used. Color shall be as selected by the Architect. d. Flashing and roofer's cement shall be a plastic, nonflowing compound made for the purpose by manufacturers of roofing materials, equal to Barrett "Elasti- gum. to t ' 13-1 ' e. Asphalt primer shall be a general purpose, thin, penetrating liquid asphalt in a solvent vehicle. ' f. Nails for built-up roof shall be galvanized self-sealing felt-fast roofing nails, ' g. Cant strip shall be Celotex asphalt-saturated fiber strip of dimensions shown. i h. Galvanized iron shall be Armco's "Zincgrip Paintgrip" of 26 gauge minimum thickness, heavier where noted. ' i. Roofer's cement shall be a fibrated solvent cut-back asphalt mastic of or equal to that produced by Flintkote of non-flowing quality. ' j. Screws, rivers, bolts, acv] other anchoring devices shall be of similar metal to materials they are anchoring. k. Solder shall be best grade 50-50 used only with resin flux. ' 1. Caulking compound shall be gray gun grade compound of or equal to Kuhl's "Elastic." ' M. Drain scuppers and gravel stops hooking over steel charnel fascia and all other gravel stops shall be galvanize3 iron. ' n. Pea gravel shall be well graded approved washed gravel, maximum size 3/411, minimum #8. Gravel shall be free of dust, clay or other deleterious mater- ial. Submit sample to Architect for approval. 3. WORKMANSHIP: ' a. All workmanship shall be strictly first-class in every respect and any de- fective or careless work shall be removed and properly replaced. The various sections shall be uniform, lines shall be plumb or level, joints at corners and angles shall be carefully mitered and different sections accurately fitted and ' rigidly secured. Joints shall be blind-soldered where possible and all excess bolder shall be removed. ' b. All flat loc;, seams shall be made in direction of the flow. Flat lock or double seams ~itall finish not less than 1/2" wide and lapped, soldered, seams shall finish not less than 1" wide and same shall be riveted. ' c, Edges of all sheets to be soldered shall be pre-tinned on both sides for a width not less than 1-i/211. ' 13-2 _ w, ! d. Where sheet metal is installed against a dissimil3r metal, same s1-311 be separated with a heavy brush coat of zinc chromate primer which shall be allowed ' to dry before metal is installed. e. Built-up Roof: All built-up roof areas over non-nailable decks shall have ' pitch envelopes around their perimeters, installed after edge nailing blocks and cant strips are completely in place and before roofing is installed. Envelope shall consist of 2 plies of 15-pound felt fully bedded in a trowel coat of flashing ! cement, completely covering nailing block, lapping onto roof deck at least 6" and with 8" selvage overhang for foldback. Install in as long lengths as possible with 8" sealed laps. After all plies of roofing felt are installed, selvage edge shall be ' folded back over same and mopped in place with roofer's cement; insulation shall be laid over envelopes prior to application of membrane. ' f. Over entire roof area, apply built-up roof membrane equal to Barrett Speci- fication 520-G (20 year Bond) roof. First ply shall be 40#/100 S. F. base sheet. All plies shall be completely bedded, well-broomed and extend up cant strip as ! shown. g. After all plies of roofing are installed, pour over entire surface a uniform ' coating equal to Barrett's Anchor Bond Cement (minimum 60 lbs. /100 S. F. ) into which, while hot, embed no less than 400 lbs. /100 S. F. of clean, dry pea gravel as specified. ! h. When applying roofing material, take care not to stain adjacent surfaces. Any stairing by roofing materials shall be removed to the satisfaction of the ' Architect. ' 4. FLASHING: a. Flashing shall be provided at all intersections between roofing and vertical ' surfaces. Unless indicated otherwise, flashing materials shall be of 22 gauge galvanized iron, b. Base flashing shall extend up the wall 4" and out on roof 411, unless other- wise indicated, with angle formed to 1/2" radius. Bed base leg firmly in roofer's cement. C. Counterflashing shall lap base flashing at least 3-1/211, shall extend into masonry joint at least 1-1/2" with inner edge turned up 1/411. Anchor counter- flashing in joints with lead wedges 12" o. c. and fill joint above flashing with gray caulking compound. d. Counterf lashing shall be fabricated in 10'-0" lengths and shall have lower edge turned back on itself for stiffness and to lay tightly against base flashing. End joints in counterf lashing shall lap 4" and be riveted and soldered. 13-3 ' e. Provide galvanized iron pitch pockets around brackets, nailing posts and other such members projecting through roofing. Pockets shall be at least 1-1/2" high with flashing legs extending out at least 411. ' 5. GRAVEL GUARD AND FACIA: a. Gravel guards shall be formed in one piece to profile shown of 22 gauge ' galvanized iron, b. Roof flange shall extend onto roof at least 4" bedded in roofer's cement ' and anchored with nails at 6" centers. Lower edge shall turn back under blocking to which it shall be screw anchored at 24" centers. C. Gravel guard and facia shall be fabricated with as few end joints as possible. All end joints shall be butted and flush and backed up with 6" wide strip of same material and profile as facia. Facia and back-up strip shall be riveted and soldered and front joint shall be filled full with solder and dressed smooth to provide smooth, non-apparent connection. 6. MISCELLANEOUS: ' Provide miscellaneous sheet metal items as detailed, but not necessarily de- scribed herein, as required for completion of the work. ' 7. GUARANTEE: a. All sheet metal work shall be guaranteed in writing against defective mater- ials and workmanship for a period of TWO YEARS and any leaks or damage due to antural conditions shall be repaired without delay and without additional expense ' to the Owner. This guarantee is not intended to cover damage from tornado or cyclone. ' b. Built-up roofs shall be installed in accordance with a Bonded Roof Specifica- tion, but in lieu of a Bond, a two (2) year guarantee, as specified herein, shall be ' provided. ' 13-4 ' DIVISION 14 - WATERPROOFING, DAMPPROOFING AND CAULKING ' 1. SCOPE: ' a. The work described in this division of the Specifications includes inner wall dampproofing, colorless waterproofing of exterior masonry and caulking. ' b. It is the intention of this Specification that the work described herein shall produce a completely watertight structure in all respects. The Contractor shall so perform his work that these results are obtained. ' c. All tools, equipment, material, labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished ' by the Contractor. 2. INNER WALL DAMPPROOFED: On the exterior surface of the back-up masonry, after cleaning and removing ' rough projections, apply a coat of Flintkote Asphalt Primer to thoroughly cover at the rate of 300 S. F. per gallon. Then apply s ,oat of Flintkote Trowel Mastic at least 1/8" thick (8 gallons per 100 S. F. The mastic shall be pressed into and ' completely fill all voids and crevices. At projecting brick ties and at penetra- tions through the wall, the mastic shall be carefully worked-in to form a com- plete seal. At thru-wall and built-in flashing the mastic shall be worked-in to ' form a seal with the flashing. ' 3. CAULKING: a. Caulk around all openings, at points of contact between trim and masonry ' and at all other points offering a potential entrance to moisture as well as at all points where shown on the Drawings. ' b. The caulking material shall be A. C. Horn Co. "Vulcatex" elastic caulking compound, gun grade or knife grade, as required by condition of use. ' c. Caulking material shall be forced into joints to completely fill and seal. The joint shall be finished neatly with a smooth surface. All extra caulking material shall be cleaned from the adjacent surfaces. d. Surfaces to which caulking is to be applied shall be clean and dry. Porous surfaces shall be treated with "Vulcatex" joint primer. 14-1 1 i 1 i ' 4. WATERPROOFING: After all masonry is in place, cleaned and approved by the Architect, all exterior ' masonry surfaces shall be given a single saturating coat of Sonneborn "Hydrocide 3-X Hycon" colorless silicon waterproofing. 1 I 14-2 ' Dri.S1ON IS - DRY WALL AND CEILING CONSTRUCTION ' 1. SCOPE: a. The work described in this division of the Specifications includes materials ' and erection of all metal-framed, gypsum board faced walls and ceilings as shown on the Drawings. ' b. All tools, equipment, material, labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by ' the Contractor. ' 2. MATERIALS: a. Metal studs shall be a channel rolled from 25-gauge electrogalvanized steel ' in widths as shown on the Drawings and in lengths suitable for various job re- quirements. Each stud shall have holes punched 12" from each end to accommodate electric conduits. Type USG DWS. b. Floor and ceiling runners shall be roll-formed 25-gauge electrogalvanized channels of width to correspond with stud width. Type USG DWR. C. Ceiling channels shall be roll-formed 25-gauge electrogalvanized stet! 1 7/8" deep. Type USG DWC. ' d. Carrying channels shall be 1-1/2" cold rolled channels. e. Hangers shall be 9-gauge galvanized hanger wire. f: Tie wire shall be 16-gauge galvanized annealed wire. g. Gypsum board shall be 3/8" thick tapered edge fully equal to :'SG "Sheet- rockN" mounted on 4/8" gypsum backing board. ' h. Reinforcement for external corners shall be USG "Dur-A-Bead." i. 'brim where gypsum board terminates against other materials USG. No. 200-B. j. Fasteners shall be 1" USG Type "S" screw. k. joint treatment shall be USG "Pert-A-Tape" system. i 15-1 1 or 1 1 3. INSTALLATION: 1 a. Installation of metal wall systems shall be in strict accordance with the printed specifications of the manufacturer. 1 b. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be up to the standards of first-class work in every respect. Joints between sheets shall be carefully and accurately made. ' c. Cutouts for electrical and mechanical outlets shall be located accurately and fitted closely around boxes, ducts and pipes so that a minimum escutcheon ' or flange width is required to cover the joint. d. Partition framing shall be so erected that when gypsum board is applied 1 the sheets will be flat across each support when tested with straightedge. e. Taping and bedding is described in PAINTING AND FINISHING Division. 1 1 ' 1 1 1 i 1 1 . 1 1 15-2 41 i =NOR DIVISION 16 - MISCELLANEOUS METAI S SCOPE: a. The work described in this Division of the Specifications includes the following ' itw ns: (1) Handrail brackets. (2) Handrails. (3) Pipe Rails. (4) Thresholds and joint covers. ' (5) Miscellaneous bolts and anchors. (6) "Tee" and angle frames for windows. (7) Structural steel lintels. ' (8) Channel Fascia. (9) Furnish labor for installation of steel frames and anchors. See Division 28 for jail Equipment. ' b. All tools, equipment, material, labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by ' the Contractor. ' 2. GENERAL: a. Furnish all material and labor for each item as hereinafter specified or shown ' on the Drawings. The general drawings are intended to sh" the character and ex- tent of the work required and do not attempt to show shop methods of fabrication. b. Shop Drawings of all items listed showing the general arrangement, design, kind of metal, sizes and finish shall be submitted to the Architect in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions as modified by paragraph 4 of the Supple- mental General Conditions. C. All dimensions shall be verified in the field by job measurement. No allow- ance for extra payment will be allowed for misfitting due to discrepancy between the dimensions shown on the drawings and the actual dimensions. d. All architectural and miscellaneous steel shall he mild steel. All structural steel shall conform to A.S.T. M. Designation A7, Caet iron shall be soft gray cast iron, straight; c .ie to pattern, sharp and free from imperfections. e. The materials specified are to be tlba best of their respective kinds, of new stock and of standard sizes specifieA for the work intended; all to be fabricated in a shop capable of producing the nighest grade of metal work and whose 16-1 ' r' 1 ' principal business is the manufacture of architectural and miscellaneous metal work. ' f. All- iron work shall be properly cleaned, after fabrication, and painted one coat of zinc-chromate rust-inhibitive primer at the shop, Miscellaneous clips, ' inserts, and bolts which are embedded in masonry or framing shall be furnished without paint. Final finish coats are specified in PAINTING AND PUNISHING Division. ' g. Welding shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the "Standard Code of Arc and Gas Welding." Continuous welds shal 1 be made in such manner ' as to prevent "drawing" of the assembly and after fabrication the assembleAltems shall be checked for warpage and dimension, if necessary they shall be leveled and straightened, using hydraulic jacks or similar method. Use of heat for straighten- ing items will not be allowed. ' 3. WORK NOT INCLUDED: jail Equipment, steel angles, channels, grates, assembling and/or fabrication, ' including installation of all items as shown on Drawings, shall be furnished by an approved jail Contractor. See JAIL EQUIPMENT drawings and Specifications under Division 26. 1 4. DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS: ' a. Handrail brackets shall be stainless steel as detailed or, Drawings. Anchorage shall be of type to fit the condition of use an' shall produce a rigid mounting of ' sufficient strength to carry the loads imposed. b. Handrails and pipe rails shall be fabricated of steel pipe of size and to the ' details shown. All joints shall be flush. Where welding is required, the welds shall be ground smooth. Anchorage of posts shall be as detailed. ' c. Thresholds and joint covers shall be aluminum "tee, " angles, or flat plates as indicated. Aluminum shall be alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-TS. ' d. Miscellaneous bolts and anchors shall be standard products of size and type called for on the Drawings. Provide all other bolts, anchors, screws, expansion ' shields, etc. as required for a complete job whether or not shown on the Drawings or specified herein. ' e. "Tee" and angle frames for windows shall be of structural shapes as detailed on the Drawings. Corners shall be welded and the welds ground smooth. Care shall be used that units are fabricated to be square, true and accurate. 16-2 1 ' f. Brick lintels shall be as detailed on the Drawings and shall be fabricated of structural steel shapes. Angles shall be welded to plate using deep pene- tration welds. ' 9. CHANNEL FASCIA: Channel fascia shall be 6" channel 8.21 anchored as shown on Drawings. Channels ' shall be ground smooth at ends and at butt joints. Miter channels at all corners and attach with continuous field weld on exterior face of channels. Grind all ex- posed welds smooth. 1 1 1 1 1 16-3 1 SIMON ' DIVISION 17 - GLASS AND GLAZING ' 1. SCOPE: ' a. The General Conditions and Supplements and the Specud Conditions shall apply to this Section ' b. All labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide and install all glass throughout the project as shown on Drawings, specified herein or required shall be provided under this section, except as hereinafter described. One hundred per cent (100%) union labor will be used for the installarion of all glass. C. Samples shall be submitted showing all conditions enco4n%gred and showing quality. d. Shop drawings and/or brochures shall be submitted in QUINTUPLICATE (5) as specified under General Conditions and Supplements, for all mirrors, fixed glass, And other installations requiring shop drawings. I' 2. MATERIALS: a. All glass shall be the product of Libby-Owens-Ford, Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co,,, Blue Ridge Glass Corp., Mississippi Class Co., or American-Saint Gobain Corp., of the highest quality and type of material required. ' b. All Blass shall bear manufacturers label and grade mark. Labels shall re- main in place until glass ip inspected in place by Architects. ' c. Plaie'Glass shall be 1/4" clear polished plate glass, glazing quality grade unless shown of a different thickness. d. Mirrors shall be 1/4" mirror glazing quality polished plate glass with a coating of electrolytically deposited copper backing over heavy film of silver, with coat of pure shellac followed by a coat of mirror-backing paint. ' e. Glass at Drive-In Window Room No. 1056 shall be Laminated Safety Glass as manufactured by the Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company of type "Multiplate" of thickness 3/4" and size as shown on Drawings. All setting materials shall be as ' specified and detailed on the Drawings. Safety glass shall bear the identifying PPG label until approved by the Architect. f. Glazin¢ Compounds shall be equal to "Tremglaze" or "Penco" in colors as selected for use with steel and wood. 17-1 ' 3. APPLICATION: ' a. Glass shall be cut accurately to fit openings and set with uniform bearing across entire width of r--.ne after all glass sizes are vt~rified on the job. ' b. Openings which are to be painted skull be primed and openings which are to receive stain finish shall be stained and sealed prior to glass installation. ' c. Thoroughly bed and back-putty all glass. Where glass is to be set with glazing beads, moldings shall be well-filled; in and glass shall be back-puttied. d. Where glazing beads are provided, carefully remove and reset same using every precaution to avoid marking or defacing any portion of the door, bead or setting screws. ' e. Just before final inspection of the building, all glass shall be cleaned and polished. 1 17-2 ' DIVISION 18 - RESILIENT FLOORING ' 1. SCOPE: ' a. The General Conditions and Supplements and the Special Conditions shall apply to this section. ' b. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide and install all resilient floor coverings and associated-items required for the completion of the project, as called for on Room Finish Schedule and/or as shown in the Drawings. ' c. Submit full size samples for Architect's approval. ' 2. MATERIALS: ' a. Resilient tile shall be 9" x 9" x 1/16" (where indicated on the Room Finish Schedule) vinyl asbestos with uniform dispersion of color throughout, as manu- factured by the &ntile Corporation, or approved equal, and shall be of color as selected by the Architects from stock patterns or standard marbleized or non- directional. b. Resilient base shall be 2-1/2" high of standard color selected by the Archi- tects. ' c. Adhesive ant! crack filler shall be as recommended by the floor tile manu- facturer. 3. INSTALLATION: ' a. Examine floor surfaces which receive resilient floor finish and report any unsuitable areas to the Architect. Surfaces shall be clean, perfectly smooth and contain no irregularities that will show on the finished floor. Cracks, pits ' and other drepressions shall be filled and all rough spots and high points shall be groun§ smooth by General Contractor. A very high degree of smoothness will be required on surfaces before tile is laid. b. Resilient flooring shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Floor shall be laid out square to main axis of rooms, starting at centerlines and working toward room edges with no the pieces less than half tiles. Adhesive shall be spread uniformly and each unit shall be bonde3 perfectly. Tile shall be neatly scribed to fit against vertical walls, frames andcother abutting surfaces. Provide reducing strips for all exposed edges of tile at points adjacent to finish concrete floors. • 18-1 1 C. At completion all resilient materials shall be thoroughly cleaned according to manufacturer's instructions and shall be given two (2) coats of wax of grade r in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and then mechanically buffed to a high luster. ' d. All unused tile, both complete and broken cartons, shall be sealed in cartons, labeled and left with owner. r 4. GUARANTEE: Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee that all work required by this Section shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ONE (1) YVAR from date of acceptance of the building, and shall replace, without coot to r Ownex, any material found to be defective within said period. 5. NOTE: See ALTERNATE PROPOSAL. 1 r 1 r i r r r r r r 18-2 1 '!r s 1 DIVISION 19 - CARPET 1 All CARPETING will be furnished and installed by the Owner under a separate ' Contract. 1 1 1 I i i I 1 1 1 1 19_1 4r b 1 DIVISION 20 - CLAY AND CERAMIC TILE - ' 1. SCOPE: ' a. The work described in this division of the Specifications includes clay floor the and ceramic the floors and walls where indicated on the Finish Schedule. ' b. All tools, equipment, material, labor, and other paraphernalis necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. C, Clay Tile: See Alternate Proposal. 2. MATERIALS: ' a. Ceramic tile shall be Standard Grade and meet the requirements of Simpli- fied Practice Recommendation R-61 issued by the V. S. Department of. Commerce ' and/or Federal Specification SS-T-308, latest revisions. All tile shall be delivered to the job in unopened grade-sealed containers. A manufacturer's "Master Grade Certificate" shall be furnished :before installation is started. b. Tile for Toilet and Shower Room Floors shall be unglazed, ceramic mosaic, i" x 1", colors as selected from Group 3 by the Architect. If colors from Groups 1 or 2 are selected, proper credit shall be given to the Contract. C. Tile for Toilet and Shower Room walls shall be satin-glaze wall tile, 4-1/4" ' x 4-1/411, color as selected by the Architect. d. Clay floor tile shall be D'Hanis, 11-1/2" x 11-1/2" x 3/4" units. ' e. Brick pavers shall be as purchased under Division "ALLOWANCE FOR SPECIAL ITEMS" and installed under General Contract. f, Samples of all tile shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to placing order. ' 3. SETTING: a. All workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the current accepted standard installation practice of the Tile Council of America, Inc. Additional ' application or installation specifications, as issued by the manufacturer of the setting materials used, shall be implici"y followed. Work shall be carefully ' laid out from the center of spaces to avoid small cuts at borders. All cuts shall be rubbed smooth and even. 1 20-1 .P 1 ' b, Joints of 1/8" or less, after being saturated with water, shall be grouted with prepared waterproof grout of wateriroofed Portland cement, mined to a ' creamy consistency and thoroughly forced into all joints, so that the joint is filled to its entire depth. The grout shall be raked back to the depth of the cushion on cushion-edge tile, D'Hanis the joints shall be grouted with natural 1 color Portland cement mortar, 1 4. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Tile floors and walls shall be left clean after grouting or pointing and protected 1 with a suitable covering for curing, before other trades have access to the room. Curing covering may be relaid on floors after final cleaning. Acid shall not be used for cleaning any glazed tile. 1 1 1 1 i 1 20-2 1 ' DIVISION 21 - CARPENTRY AND FINISH WOODWORK ' 1. SCOPE: ' a. The work described in this division of the Specifications includes all rough and finish carpentry, wood framing, millwork, rough hardware, installation of finish hardware as required for the completion of the project, unless specified ' to be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these Specifications. b. Form work few concrete is specified under Division "CONCRETE WORK." ' c. All carpentry shall i.;e in harmony with other materials and finishes and adjustments as necessary shall be made so that all parts work out to give desired ' results. All lines, levels, imd dimensions shall be verified and all parts shall be accurately made, placed and finished. ' d. All carpentry work shall be strictly first-class as regards both appearance and strength. Both framing and trim shall be erected either plumb or level and to straight lines. ' e. All miMwork, cabinet work and trim shall be constructed from shop draw- ings submitted in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions as modified ' by paragraph 4 of the Supplemental General Conditions. Millwork and cabinet work shall be constructed from job measurements. t All tools, equipment, material, labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. i 2. MATERIALS: as Frgblin¢ Lumber: ' (1) All framing lumber shall be #1 southern pine S. P. I. B. or western fir grade-marked dimension lumber. ' (2) Lumber shall be dressed and shall conform to American Lumber Stan- dards Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16 and to Grading Rules of Manufacturers' Association under whose rules it is produced, and shall bear grade and trade mark of manufacturers' association. (3) Lumber shall have maximum moisture content of not more than 15% ' and shall be kilns or air-dried and well sgasoned. ' 21-1 Alwfidwkm i ' (4) All framing lumber in contact with concrete, masonry, or light- weight insulating concrete and roof battens and batten milers, shall be ' toxic ("Wolmanized" or equal) pressure treated. The amount of chemi- cal to be injected shall be 0.35 lb. per cubic foot of wood and lumber shall bear seal of approval of preservative manufacturer. b. The following items shall be select white oak; (1) Wood handrails. (1) Door Nos. 13/1 Oru 26/1, 27/1, 29/1, 30/1, 31/1, 32/19 36111 37/10 1 38/1, 39/1, 40/1, 46/10 48/1, 49/1, 51/19 52/1, 54/1, 55/1, 56/1, 66/1, 71/19 and 72/1 shall be wood flush panel doors built-up of solid strip cores, carefully glued and doweled. Doors shall be dgRssed-banded with veneer and edged with clear hardwood stock matchiiq face veneer. Doors shall be R(Adis "Golden Dowel, " Curtis "American, " Menger "Permador, " or an approved equal, of interior grade and of size and thickness shown on the Door Schedule. Face veneer shall be select white oak. C. All other finish wood shall'ie "C" select Douglas Fir. ' d. Door Nos. 1/1, 2/1, 3/1, 4/i, and 5/.1 shall be purchased under "ALLOWANCE FOR SPECIAL ITEMS" and installed by General Contractor. ' e. Other doors scheduled wood solid core shall be thickness as shown on schedule with face veneers of paint grade gum equal to Roddis Red, White, and ' Blue dowel. Doors shall be painted as specified. f. Plywood shall be Douglas fir, interior type, "edge grain" faces exposed to ' view as on the exterior of cabinet work shall be "N" grade (intended for natural finish). Faces not normally exposed to view, as on the interior of cabinet work, shall be "B" grade. Faces on the backside of panels where covered permanently by other materials shall be "C" or "D" grade. g. Wood Base and Trim shall be clear fir or white pine where painted, and of the same specie as wall paneling for natural finish. h. Wood Framing at Clerestory above Door No. 1/1 shall be No. 1 clear ' Southern Pine or Douglas Fir B and better. i. Wood framing members and trim at Room Nos. 1081 and 1059 shall be select white oak. ' j, Wood framing members, trim and sticks at Room No. 1092 shall be clear Southern Pine or Douglas Fir, B and better. 21-2 a k. Plastic laminace counter surfaces shall be 1/16" thick, and fully equal to "Formica," "Conscwveld," "Textolite" or "Wilson Art" of colors and patter ' as selected by the fschitect. It Wood Sticks: Wood stick9 and board screen shall be rip-sawn from nominal dimension stock with hollow ground cores-cut saw. All exposed edges to be dressed with 2/0 sandpaper lightly to remove any splinters. (See Alternates.) tn. Acoustic insulation behind wood sticks shall be Owens-C_-.ning Texture Face "Fiberglas" panels, 24" x 4811 x 111. (See Alternates.) ' n. Burlap, where shown behind sticks, shall be as selected by the krchitect. Allow in the price bid $0.60 per~yard of 47" width for the purchase of 0113 item. (See Alternates.) ' 3. WORKMANSHIP: 1 a. General: ' (1) Carpentry work shall be done carefully so as to result in neat cuts and close joints; members shall be fitted so as to give firm seating where concealed and so that joining in finish work will be neat in appearance. ' (2) joints in trim at angles and-corners shall be mitered and all exposed nails shall be set and puttied. ' (3) All work manufactured at the mill shall be jointed precisely and shall be of highest quality in every particular. Mill work shall be neatly and ' carefully set and firmly anchored in position at the job. (4) Size and spacing of rough hardware, nails, screws, anchors, nailing ' clips, etc., for various purposes-shall be according to best practices and/or as detailed. Finish hardware shall be fitted and applied in a neat, thorough- ly workmanlike manner. Mortising far locks shall be cut accurately and of proper size for lock to be installed. All door butts shall be mortised, true and straight so that butts will close tightly without tension. Finish hard- ware trim shall be fitted and then removed prior to finishing surface, being t replaced after all chance of staining or damage is over. (S) Trim at all openings- shall be continuous for the full height of the ' opening. Horizontal trim shall be full width with joints at intersection with vertical members only. All corners shall be mitered and all joints flush and closely fitted, with all pieces securely attached to each other and to the wall, plumb or level and in alignment. 1 21-3 do ' b. Finishing and Protecting: (1) X! finishing shall be best grade of joiner work. In addition to proper mill surfacing and sanding-, this Contractor shall sand by hand all finishes which show hammer and tool marks, raised grain, or are otherwise not smooth. Scrape all hammer and tool marks, set all nails, and sand nail ' holes smooth. ' (2) Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all doors, paneling, fixtures, door and window openings, exposed corners, etc., during con- struction and shall furnish all necessary wood boxing, paper, cloth, vinyl ' sheeting, shavings, etc., necessary for this purpose. (3) Damaged materialf and fixtures will not be accepted and Contractor ' shall replace material damaged due to lack of protection during constructi'>n. (4) Contractor shall replace protection temporarily removed during con- e struction. Any protection removed before need for same has expired, shall be promptly replaced. The Architect reserves the right to withhold certi- fication for partial payment on materials in place which are inadequately ' protected. C. Wood Handrails: ' (1) Wood handrails shall be of white oak as detailed, and shall be attached to metal rails with cadmium-plated flathead wood screws 24" o. c., counter- sunk flush to metal. (2) All rails shall run full length, d. Plastic Laminate: ' (1) Ali counters and splashes shall be covered with plastic laminate as called fcr in this Specification, and shall be pressure-glued to plywood top ' at the mill, where indicated. (2) All corners shall be butt-jointed and sanded slightly to remove sharp ' edge. Pieces shall run continuous between partitions where possible and where run is longer than available-material, laminate shall be neatly butted at center or third points to give continuous appearance. ' (3) Application and adhesives shall be in strict accordance with manu- facturer's instructions and highest standards of workmanship. e. Wood Stick Walls and Ceili ng Panels: Panels are made of the following: ' (1) V x 4" Frame around 3/4" acoustic insulation board. 21-4 1 1 (2) Burlap wall covering over one side of 1" x 4" frame and acoustic insula- tion board, stapled on the back side of frame. (3) Wood sticks attached as shown on Drawings. 1 (4) Panels are installed as shown on Drawings. 1 (5) See Alternates. 1 4. CLEANING- The Contractor shall be responsible for the thorough cleaning of all work upon completion, including the interiors of all cabinets, drawers, etc. that occur under this Contract. i. 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 >1 'tl-5 ' DIVISION 22 - METAL TOILET PARTIONS & TOILET ACCESSORIES 1. SCOPE: The work described in this division of the Specifications irsludes the follow- ing: ' (1) Floor mounted toilet partitions. (2) Wall-hung flush urinal screens (3) Paper holders ' (4) Combination towel dispenser, soap dispenser and mirror (5) Waste receptacles ' b. All tools, equipment, materials, labor and ether paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished under this Contract. 1 2. TOILET PARTITIONS: a. Type: All metal compartments for toilets shall be Academy, baked enamel finish as manufactured by the Sanymetal Products Co., Inc. ' b. Doors and partitions panel units shall be 1" thick, insulated with sound- deadening Bridgecore. Panel plates will consist of Galvanized-Bonderized steel, ' not less than 22 gauge thickness fox doors, or 20 gauge thickness for partitions, and shall have formed edges sealed with a continuous oval crown locking strip. Door edges shall be electrically welded with welds spaced not over 16" apart ' around the entire perimeter. Locking strips on doors and partitions shall be mitered, welded and finished at the corners. Partitions shall be cut out to re- ceive sanitary napkin disposals as described elsewhere in this Division. ' c. Pilasters, Material and Construction - Academy pilasters shall be 1-1/4" thick, made of 2 sheets of 20 gauge Galvanized -Bonderized steel, welded and ' finished as specified for partitions and doors. Bottom of pilastera shall have a jack-leveling screw to carry the weight of compartment and provide a secure mechanical anchorage to floor with adjustable floor fittings. Pilasters, when ' set in place, shall be securely braced with continuous 1" x 1-1/2" lock seam tubular steel overhead bracing attached through the top of the pilasters. Head- rail shall be held in place inside the top of the pilaster with #14 x 1/2" metal ' screws applied through the pilaster into the headrail on the inside of the stall. Headrail shall extend full length of installation and over end compartments and ' be fastened into wall brackets. Exposed ends of headrail shall be capped. d. Hardware and Fittings - Attachment, Partitions and Pilasters - Dividing partitions and pilasters shall be attached to one another and to the walls with 22-1 stirrup brackets of heat treated, polished and anodized extruded aluminum alloy. Pilaster connections to floor or ceiling shall be concealed with a one ' piece 3" polished Type 302 stainless steel shoe. Trim (shoe) shall be theft proof and held in place with concealed anchor clips without the use of exposed screws. e. Finish and Color - All units shall be mechanically cleaned by means of automatic vapor degrea9ing. Finish shall consist of prime coat and a finish ' color coat of thermo-setting acrylic enamel (Duracon) applied electrostatically in pressurized, dust-free atmosphere, baked on to produce a uniform, smooth lustrous protective finish. 3. _URINAL SCREENS: a. Urinal screens shall be fully equal to wall-hung flush Type "A" as manu- factured by the Sanymetal Products Co., Inc. b. Screen partitions shall be I" thick made of two sheets of #18 gauge vitreous porcelain sheet steel with edges formed, assembled over and cemented ' under pressure to a dense, sound-deadening honeycomb insulation. The two face plates shall have formed edges and shall be electrically welded together and sealed with a continuous oval crown locking strip of polished stainless steel. Partitions to be vitreous porcelain enameled on all interior and exterior sur- faces with colo3- and finish coats of porcelain on the exterior (exposed) surfaces only. Panels to have integral formed reinforced mounting flanges. ' c. Finish - all units shall be mechanically cleaned by means of an automatic ' vapor degreae ing. Finish shall consist of prime coat and a finish color coat of thermo-setting acrylic enamel (Duracon) applied electrostatically and baked on to produce a uniform, smooth, lustrous protective finish. ' d. Shop drawings and brochure shall be submitted in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions as modified by paragraph 4 of the Supplemental Gen- i' eral Conditions. ' 4. PAPER HOLDERS: a. Paper holders shall be fully equal to Model 8272, surface-mounted toilet ' tissue cabinets as manufactured by Bobrick Dispensers, Inc. b. Cabinets shall be made of 22 gauge stainless steel, equipped with a double- pronged key lock, c. Cabinets shall dispense either single-fold or double-fold toilet tissue and, ' shall have a capacity of 1500 single-fold tissues. 22-2 1 ' d. A Cabinet shall be located in each toilet stall, positioned as directed, with chrome-plated through bolts and hex nuts. ' 5. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSALS: ' a. Sanitary napkin disposals shall be fully equal to Model B353 recessed unit and B354 double unit as manufactured by Bobrick Dispensers, Inc. ' b. Units shall have flanges, door and receptacle of 22-gauge Type 302 stain- less steel, satin finish. Cabinet shall be Type 302 stainless steel, all welded ' construction. Receptacle shall be completely enclosed and removable by recessed finger grip. Door shall be self-closing and equipped with full length piano hinge and spring, and shall be lettered "Napkin Disposal" and "Push" with engraved lettering. C. Double units shall be mounted between pairs of stalls and the single re- cessed unit shall be placed in the end stalls. ' 6. COMBINATION RECESSED TOWEL DISPENSER, SOAP DISPENSER AND MIRROR: a. Unit shall be fully equal to Model 330 combination unit as manufactured by ' Bobrick Dispensers, Inc, and shall incorporate the following features: (1) Flange of 22-gauge, Type 302 stainless steel, drawn, one-piece seamless construction with satin finish, without mitered corners. (2) Door of heavy gauge, Type 302 stainless steel, including full length ' stainless steel piano hinge. (3) Cabinet of heavy gauge, Type 302, stainless steel, with satin finish. All welded construction. (4) Paper towel dispenser of 22-gauge, Type 302 stainless steel, welded in place, with stainless steel adaptor to allow use of either multi-fold or "C" fold towels. (5) Shelf of 22-gauge, Type 302 stainless steel, with retaining edge. (6) Soap vessel of heavy gauge, Type 302 stainless steel; 101 fluid ounce capacity; unbreakable refill indicator; locked filler top recessed in shelf; provide special key for opening. ' (7) Soap valve to be Bobrick stainless steel mechanism with "O" ring packings. (8) Tumbler lock concealed behind door. 22-3 (9) Mirror of #1 quality 1/4" polished plate glass, electrolytically copper-plated with five-year guarantee. Mount on padded backing. 7. RECESSED WASTE RECEPTACLE: t Waste receptacle shall be fully equal to Model B367 as manufactured by Bobrick Dispensers, Inc., constructed of heavy gauge Type 30i stainless steel with all ' exposed surfaces satin finished. Welded cabinet; drawn one-piece flange with- out mitered corners; tumbler lock to secure removable waste cantainer into cabinet. Furnish vinyl-plastic Diners mounted on hooks so arranged to prevent ' removal unless cabinet is unlocktd. ' 8. GENER;L: a. All lockable items described hereinbefore shall be keyed alike throughout ' the bui [ding. b. Brochure describing toilet accessories and showing rough-in dimensions ' for recessed items and bolt spacing for surface-mounted items shall be sub- mitted in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions as modified by paragraph 4 of the Supplemental General Conditions. t 1 ' 22-4 ' DIVISION 23 - METAL DOORS, FRAMES, AND METAL WINDOW FRAMES ' 1. SCOPE: ' a. The work described in this division of the Specifications includes all metal doors, door frarres, and window frames. b. Window frames constructed of structural steel shapes (clerestory windows) are described in Division 16 - "MISCELLANEOUS METALS. " C. Stock metal window frames are described in Division 24 - "STEEL WINDOWS." d. All tools, equipment, material, labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. e. Submit shop drawings in QUINTUPLICATE (5) for approval of Architect be- fore hollow metal frames are fabricated. Drawings shall show all dimensions and conditions of erection and anchorage wtdch shall be verified at the job. 2. WORK NOT INCLUDED: t a. Hardware for metal doors is specified in Division 25 - "FINISH HARDWARE." ' b. Finish painting is specified in Division 26 - "PAINTING AND FINISHING." ' 3. DOORS: a. Flush metal doors shall be a completely flush design and shall be constructed ' of two outer sheets of 46-gauge stretcher-leveled steel formed and rigidly con- nected and reinforced inside with continuous interlocking 20-gauge stiffeners. (1) The doors shall be continuously src welded vertically where the two outer sheets are joined and dressed smooth. All doors shall be sound- designed with mineral wool ' (2) The doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for hinges, locks, and flush bolts, and reinforcedt for closers and other surface-mounted ' hardware. Any drilling and tapping required for surface hardware shall be done in the field. All hardware shall be applied in the field. b. Tubular metal doors sb` be constructed to the details shown on the Draw- ings of 16-gauge stretcher-. 3 steel. joints shall be continuously arc welded I 23-1 4 ' and welds ground smooth. Intersections between stiles and rails shall be rein- forced to provide a rigs & unit. ' c. Hollow Metal Dorn and Window Frames shall be constructed to the details (note special sections) shown on the Drawings. Interior frames shall be of 16- gauge steel, exterior frames of 14 gauge steel. Frames shall be mortised, re- inforced, drilled and tapped for hinges and lock strikes and reinforced for closers and other surface hardware. Joint between head and jamb shall be ' mitered and arc welded and backed by reinforcement to provide a rigid and square unit. Furnish rubber door silencers for the strike jamb. Loose "T" masonry anchors or others rs required shall be furnished with the frames. ' Frarres shall be designed to finish flush with the floor with adjustable floor anchors provided. Window frames shall be essentially of the same construction as the door frames, except that sill member shall be included as an integral ' part of the frame unit and channel stops as detailed, furnished. d. All doors e.nd frames shall be Bonderized and given one shop coat of baked- on rust-inhibitive primer. ' 4. INSTALLATION: Door and window frames *all be built into the masonry, using anchorage as de- tailed. They shall be set up exactly in place, plumb and square and shall be held firmly in place until masonry has been built around them. 1 1 1 23-2 ' DIVISION 24 - STEEL WINDOWS ' 1. fCOPE: a. Furnish all labor, =materials and equipment necessary to properly erect all ' metal windows, including glazing of same, as shown and required for the full completion of the job. ' b. All materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability and appearance and any damaged material shall be removed from job and re- Paced with new material in proper condition. ' c. Submit shop drawings in QUINTUPLICtTE (5) for approval of Architect be- fore windows are fabricated. Drawings shall show all dimensions and conditions ' of erection and anchorage whiph shall be verified at the job. ' 2. MATERIALS: a. Glass and Glazing: (1) All materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, dura- bility and appearance. Damaged material shall be removed from job and replaced with new material in proper condition. ' (2) All glass shall be equal to'LLibbey-Owens Ford," "Pittsburgh," "Mississippi," or "Blue Ridge." ' (3) Polish Plate glass shall be 1/4" thick. (4) Windows ta%all be designed for glazing from outside, window continuous ' glazing beads. Attaching screw must be concealed. (5) Putty shall be special glazing compound of special manufacture for t use in metal sash equal to "Tremglaze" or "Penco." (6) Caulking Compound shall be as specified under "CAULIONG" Section. ' b. Steel Sub-Frames: ' Steel sub-frames shall be Series.3000 as manufactured by the Ceco Corpora- tionp Sub-frames shall be fabricated from hot-rolled sections with a mim"mum depth of 2-1/811. Glazing rebates shall be a minimum of 3/4" in height. Corners of steel sub-frames shall be mitered and securely arc welded. All muntin and/or impost intersections with frames shall be securely interlocked, with double mor- tise and tenon construction and full face welded. After welding, all exposed sur- faces shall be dressed smooth. Glazing bead will be furnished as indicated in Architectural Drawings, ' 24-1 1 ~I DIVISION 25 - F.'N.. SH HARDWARE 1. SCOPE: a. Furnish a complete line of hardware of every description to equip adequately all doors and other movable parts throughout the building, un- less otherwise specified, for proper operation as indicated or reasonably ' implied by the Drawings. b. The Hardware List, included hereinafter, is given to illustrate type, weight, operation, quality and finish of hardware required. c. Hardware shall be limited to the products of P & F Corbin, Russell & Erwin, Lockwood, and Sargent, except for certain specialties which may be of other high grade stindard makes as specified in the following schedule. Butts shall be limited to the products of Stanley Hardware, McKinney Mfg. Company, Lawrence Bros. Mfg. Company, or Hager. Surface closers, push- plates, pulls, stops, bumpers, ana holders shall be as scheduled - no substi- tutions. d. All locks and cylirders shall be grandmaster-keyed, with existing Muni- cipal Building System, mister keyed ir. new set, and keyed alike. as directed. Furnish four (4) master keys and four (4) keys for each lock, e. The hardware supplier shall Aubmit, in sepii copies, for approval of the Architect, a complete schedule of hardware, indicating manufacturer, type, number, location and finish of items to be supplied. Approval shall be, for type and quality only. f. Supplier shall furnish, IN DUPLICATE (2), templates for all template hardware. g. Where requirement of the Local Building Code or Regulations, Laws, or Rules promulgated by departments having jurisdiction, conflict with these Specifications, and are mandatory, they shall be followed the same as if specifically noted in this Specification. This shall not be construed to ' mean that any requirements herein set forth may be modified because not specifically noted it the Building Code. h. Finish for Hardware shall be U. S. -3. i ' 25-1 2. SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE: a. Pairs of Doors 1-1, 2-1, and 3-1, Exterior from Corridor. Each pair to have: 2 Rixson SA Floor Hinges 27105S 4 Rixson Side Jamb Pivots M19 1 Deadlock 4825 2 Flush Bolts 3450 - 24" ' 2 Pulls Baldwin 972 Modified Straight Brackets 2 Push Plates Baldwin 10OY (I Cut for Cylinder) 3-1/2 x 16 t b. Pairs of Doors 6-1, Exterior from Lobby 1093; ' Pairs of Doors 7-1, Exterior from Corridor; Pairs of Doors 11-1, Corridor from Corridor. Each Pair to have: t 2 Rixson SA Floor Hinges 2790S 1 Deadlock AR1850 ' 2 Flush Bolts Henne 308F - 12" (Use 24" for top bolt of doors 6 and 7) 2 Door Pulls Baldwin 972 2 Push Bars Baldwin 894 ' c. Single Doors 8-1, Exterior from Passage. Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 ' l Door Pull Baldwin 972 Modified 1 Push Plate Baldwin IOOY 3-1/2 x 16 Cut for Cylinder I Deadlock 4825 1 Door Closer 554-P9 1 Kick Plate 10 x 34 1 Door Stop and Holder GJF20X d. Single Door 9-1, Exterior from Car Entrance. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179P 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 1 Set Locks 8GO5 DC ' 1 Door Closer 554-P9 25-2 ' e. Single Door 10-1, Car Entrance from jail. Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179P 4-1/2 x 4 ' 1 Set Locks 8G05 DC I Door Closer 554-P9 1 Kick Plate 8 x 34 16 Ga. f. Pairs of Doors 4-1, 36-1, Corridor from Lobby. Each Pair to have: ' 3 Pair Butts BB179 5 x 5 2 Door Pulls Baldwin 972 Modified x Straight Bracket t 2 Push Plates 100Y (1 cut for Cylinder) 3-1/2 x 16 1 Deadlock 4825 2 Flush Bolts 3450 24 ' 2 Door Closers EN64 g. Pairs of Doors 5-1, Lobby from Council Clamber. Each Paic to have: t Track and Guides by Others 4 Flush Pulls Baldwin 939 ' 2 Edge Pulls Ives 230B 1 Sliding Door Lock Henne 781 Lock and Keeper and Thumb Turn required (No cylinder) h. Single Doors A-1-1, Roof from Passage (Alternate #1). Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179P 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 1 Set Locks 8G04 DC 1 Door Closer 554-P9 i. Single Doors 13-1 and 14rl,- Passage to Offices 1001 &.1004; Single Doors 18-1 and 19-1 - Passage to Offices 1008 & 1012; ' Single Doors 21-1 and 22-1 - Passage to Offices 1014 & 1012; Single Doors 20-1, 27-1, 29-1, 30-1, 31-1, 32-1,:33-1, 34-1, 35-1, 37-19 38-11 39-1, 40-11 43-1, 44-10 46-10 48-1, 51-1, ' 52-11 54-11 55-1, 56-1, 58-19 59-19 60-19 62-1, 63-1, 65-1, 66-1, 67-1, 93-1 - Corridors, Passages, and Secretaries to Offices; Single Doors 74-1, 75-1, 77-1, 80-1, 82-1, 83-1 - Secretaries and Halls to and from Offices. Each Door to lave: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G25DS ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield 1 25-3 y. ' j. Single Door 76-1, Hall to Secretary. Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G25 DS 1 Door Closer 553-H 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Sheild k. Single Doora 12-1, Lobby to Corridor. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Door Pull Baldwin 972 ' 1 Push Plate 100Y 3-1/2 x 16 I Deadlock 4825 1 Door Closer 553-0 1 Kick Plate 8 x 34 16 Ca. 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield ' 1. Single Doors 71-1 and 72-1, Corridor to Men & Women; Single Doors 95-1 and 96-1, Lobby 1093 to Men & Women, Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Door Pull Baldwin 932 1 Push Plate Baldwin 100Y 3-1/2 x 16 1 Kick Plate 811 x 2" less than width of door 16 Ga. 1 Door Closer 550-0 Series Size as required ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield M. Single Doors 25-1, 85-1 and 86-1, Passages to Toilets; Single Doors 15-1 and 16-1, Offices to Toilets; Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6U65 DS 1 Door Closer 552-0 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield ' n. Single Doors 22A-1, 24-I, 26-19 37A-1, 41-1, 45-1, 50-1, 53-19 68-11 70-I, 78-1, 79-1, and 94-1 - Secretaries, Offices and Passages to and from Storage. Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G05 DS 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield 25-4 9 d ' o. Single Doors 23-1, Office to Office. Each Door to hava: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6U64 DS 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield ' p. Single Door 49-1, Secretary to Room 1046; Single Door 64-1, Room 1061 from 1063. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Latches 6U15 DS t 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield q. Single Doors 57-1 and 61-1, Rooms 1055 and 1063 from Room 1057. Each ' Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 ' 1 Set Locks 6G30 DS 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield ' r. Single Doors 73-1 and 87-1, Corridor from Janitor. Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 ' 1 Set Locks 6G05 DS 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield Single Doors 88-1 and 89-1, Corridor to and from Locker Room. Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Door Pull Baldwin 932 1 Push Plate 100Y 3-1/2 x 16 1 Door Closer 553-0 (Use P9 Arm on Outswinging) 1 Kick Plate 8 x 34 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield 1 25-5 1 Single Door 81-1, Secretary 1081 to Hall; Single Door 92-I, Corridor from Room 1096-1097. Fach Door to have: ' i-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Latches 6U15 DS ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield U. Single Doors 84-1 and 90-1 to Room 1090. Each Door to have: ' 1-112 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G25 DS ' I Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield V. Single Doors 91-1, Lobby to Hall. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G25DS 1 Door closers EN53-0 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS & Expansion Shield W. Single Door 97-1, Room 1098 to jail Entry. Each Door to have: 1 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 I Set Locks 6G30 DS 1 Door Closer 553-0 1 Kick Plate 8 x 34 ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield X. Single Door 98-1, Hall from Interview 1104, Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Mutts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G30 DS 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield y. Single Doors 99-1, Hall to Room 1101. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G25 DS ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield ' Z. Single Door 100-1, Room 1101 to Passage. Each Door to have: Track, Hanger and Guides by Others t 2 Flush Pulls Ba:dwin 939 1 Edge Pull Ives 230 B 25-6 tid ' aa. Single Doors 101-1 and 102-1, Passage to Dark Rooms. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6U65 DS 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield ' 1 Automatic Door Bottom Pemku 410 1 Set Weatherstripping Pemko 312 AR ' bb. Single Doors 1-B, 24-B, 27-B, to Lounge and Toilet Rooms (Alternate 111). Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Door Pull Baldwin 932 1 Push Plate 100Y 3-1/2 x 15 ' 1 Door Closer 552-0 (Use 553-0 on 3-0 Door) 1 Kick Plate 8" x 2" less than width of door 16 Ga. 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield ' cc. Single Doors 26-B and 29-B, Toilet Room from Pistol Range. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Door Pull Baldwin 932 ' 1 Push Plate 100Y 3-112 x 15 Cut for Cylinder 1 Door-Closer 551.-0 1 Kick Plate 8 x 28 16 Ga. ' i Deadlock 4821 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield dd. Single Door 25-B, Hall from Pistol Range, Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 ' 1 Set Locks 6G04 DS 1 Door Closer 553-0 1 Kick Plate 8 x 30 16 Ga. ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield ee. Single Doors 28-B, and 31-B, Toilet Rooms to and From Showers. Each ' Door to have: ' All hardware by Dour Manufacturer 1 25-7 1 1 ' ff, Single Door 2-b, Room 01 to Snack Bar; Single Doors 17-B, Room 13 to Room 14. Each Door to have: ' 2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 I Set Locks 6G05 DS ' 1 Dutch Door Bolt 54B 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield 1 Door Stop 3404 Upper Leaf gg, Single Doors 3-B, 4-B, 7-B, 8-B, 30-B, 9-B, 10-B, 11-B, 13-B, 14-B, l2-B, and 23-B - to Offices and Rooms, Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G25 DS ' I Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield hh. Single Doors 5-B and. &B, Office to Office. Each Door to have: 1-111 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 I Set Latches 6U15 DS ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS nd Expansion Shield ii. Single Doors 19-B, 20-B, and 21-B - Hall 12 to Rooms 09, 10, and 11. ' Each Door to have: 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179., 4-1/2 x 4 ' 1 Set LoAs 6U65 DS 1 Door Stop 3380 x ,,MS and Expansion Shield ' jj, Paid of Doors 32-B, Room 01 to Room 13. Each Pair to have: Track, Hangers and Guides by Others ' 2 Flush Pulls Baldwin 939 2 Edge Pulls Ives 230 B 1 Sliding Door Locks Henne 781 x Thumb turn inside (no outside trim) kk. Single Door 15-B, Entry from Room 14, Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts 179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G37 DS ' 1 Door Stop 3380 x MS and Expansion Shield 11. Single Doors 16=B, Exterior from Entry. Each Door to have: ' 1-1/2 Pair Butts BB179 4-1/2 x 4 1 Set Locks 6G39 DS ' 1 Door Closer S52-0 ti ' 25-8 1 ' DIVISION 26 - PAINTING AND FINISHING SCOPE: ' a. The work described in this division of the Specifications includes the preparation, painting or finishing of the following items: (1) Interior and exterior ferrous metal - painted. (2) Gypsum board surfaces - painted. ' (3) Brick walls as shown on schedule - painted. ' (4) jail Equipment - painted. (5) Plywood Paneling, Doors, Wood Trim, Bases -finishes. b. Finished wood sticks, laminated beams, wood deck, are to receive no applied finish. 1 c. Finishing for wood floors is described in that division of the Specifications. d, All tools, equipment, material, Labor and other paraphernalia necessary for the successful accomplishment of this portion of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2, PAINT MATERIALS GENERALLY: ' a. Paint, varnish, epoxy paint and stains shall be of type and brands specified under "Schedule of Painting," Basic painting materials such as linseed oil, shellac, ' turpentine, thinners, driers, et.;., shall be of highest quality and have identifying labels on the containers. ' b. All materials shall be delivered on the site in manufacturer's sealed contain- ers. Each container shall be labeled by the manufacturer. Labels shall give the manufacturer's name, brand, type of paint, color of paint and instructions for reducing. Thinning of paint shall be done only in accordance with directions of the manufacturer, job mixing or job tinting may be done when approved by the Archi- tect and for sample colors, C. Bids shall be based on the use of specific brands and quality as specified. ' No substitution shall be made without the written approval of the Architect. ' 26-1 ' 3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. ' a. Access panels and registers, generally, shall be painted the same color as adjacent walls and ceilings. Where adjacent surfaces do not require painting, use color as directed. b. Prime coated butts and overhead door closers shall be painted the same color as door trim to which they are attached. ' c. Exposed piping, conduit, ductwork and hangers generally shall be painted color and texture to match walls or ceilings adjacent to them, Where adjacent surfaces are unpainted, use color as directed. d. Each coat of paint shall be slightly different shade than preceding coat. 1 The final undercoat shall be tinted to color of the finish coat. e. Tile top and bottom edges of all metal doors shall be finished with two ' coats of paint as specified for faces. Apply after fitting and before faces are painted. ' f. Where open cabinets or shelves occur, room finish on walls shall not be omitted. However, painting on walls will not be required back of permanently built-in cabinets with closed backs. 4. PREPARATION OF SURFACES: a. Inspection of Surfaces: Do not begin painting on any surface until it has been inspected and is in proper condition to receive the paint as specified. Should ' any surface be found unsuitable to produce a proper paint finish, the Architect shall be notified in writing and no material shall be applied until the unsuitable surfaces have been made satisfactory. b. Finished wood surfaces which are to receive no applied finish shall be care- fully sanded to smooth and even surfaces, and until all imperfections have been removed. Nails shall be set and the hole filled with putty colored to match the wood. Other holes and cracks shall be similarly filled. ' c. Steel and Iron: Remove grease, dirt, mud, rust and scale as necessary to receive paint. Touch-up any chipped or abraded places on items that have been ' shop-coated. Where steel and iron have a heavy coating of scale, it shall be re- moved by descaling or wire-brushing as necessary to produce a satisfactory surface for painting. ' d. General: Before painting, remove hardware, accessories, plates, lighting I fixtures and similar items or provide ample protection of such items. On com- pletion of each space replace above items, To paint bottom edge remove doors, if 26-2 hung. Use only skilled mechanics for removing and connecting above items. When spray painting is used, protect adjacent surfaces as required or directed. ' 5. APPLICATION: a. Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather or until the surface has dried thoroughly from the effects of such weather. Do not apply varnish or paint when the temperature is below 560 F. b. Surfaces to be stained or painted shall be clean, dry, smooth, and adequately ' protected from dampness. Each coat of paint shall be applied smoothly, worked out evenly and allowed to dry at least 48 hours before subsequent coat is applied. ' c. Finished work shall be uniform and of the approved color. It shall completely cover, be smooth and free from rurLs, sags, clogging or excessive flooding, Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean without over- lapping. d. At completion, touch-up and restore finish where damaged and leave in good condition. ' 6. STORAGE AND WORKING SPACE: All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place designated by the ' Architect. Such storage place shall be kept clean and all damage to it or to its surroundings shall be made good. Any oily rags, waste, etc. must be removed from the building every night and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of ' fire. 7. SCHEDULE OF PAINTING: a. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be as follows: (1) Gypsum Board: 1 1st Coat - Tape, bed and re-bed, sand smooth, 2nd Coat - Texture paint with fine grain stipple. 3rd Coat - Sherwin Williams Fast-Dri Wall Primer. 4th Coat - Sherwin Williams Quali-Kote. t (2) Galvanized Metal: ' 1st Coat - Rust-Oleum Galvinoleum #1225 Red, 2nd Coat - Rust-Oleum Galvinoleum #1386 Gray 3rd Coat - Sherwin Williams Oil-Base Exterior Gloss. ' 26-3 ' (3) Ferrous Metals: ' 1st Coat - Sherwin Williams Zinc Chromate Primer B50-Y-1 (if item is furnished with shop coat. omit this item, except to touch-up scratched and abraded areas.) ' 2nd and 3rd Coats - Sherwin Williams Oil-Base Exterior Gloss, (4) Wood Cabinets, Doors and Plywood Paneling, Wood Trim: ' 1st Coat - Pratt & Lambert Tonetic Wood Stain. 2nd Coat - Weldwood Paste Wax, buffed to luster finish. ' (5) Plywood Door Panels, Cabinets in E.O.C. Area: ' 1st Coat - Sherwin Williams Varnish Primer. 2nd Coat - Sherwin Williams Fast-Dri Varnish, ' (6) Brick Walls in Room Nos. 1001, 1004, 1005 and 1006: 1st Coat - Sherwin Williams Quali-Kote. e 2nd Coat - Same as 1st Coat. Brick Walls where scheduled Epoxy Paint: lst Coat - Sherwin.-Williams "Tile Clad Catalyzed Epoxy Enamel" 2nd Coat - Same as first coat. (8) Gypsum Board Walls where: scheduled Epoxy Paint: ' 1st Coat -Tape,bed and re-bed, sand smooth. 2nd Coat - Texture paint with fine grain stipple. 3rd Coat - Sherwin-Williams "Tile Clad Catalyzed Epoxy Enamel," ' 4th Coat - Same as above. (9) Concrete Blocks in Jail Area - Room Nos. 1104 thru 1118. 1st Coat - Sherwin -Williams "Bloc-Tex" filler to fill holes and voids and to present a smooth, solid base for final coats. ' 2nd Coat - Sherwin-Williams "Tile Clad Catalyzed Epoxy Enamel" 3rd Coat - Same as second, coat. 1 1 1 ' 26-4 1 / ' DIVISION 27 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES ' 1, GENERAL: The requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDI- TIONS, and SPECIAL CONDITIONS of the Specifications apply to this Section, ' 2. SCOPE: ' Furnish and install all miscellaneous specialty items and complete all work of this section as described herein and shown on Drawings, including: ' a. Metal Overhead Doors. b. Skylights C. Drive-in Window Units. d. Aluminum and Glass Entry Door. ' e. Night Depository Equipment. f. Vault Door. ' g, Chalkboards. h. Taakboards. t 3. SHOP DRAWINGS: ' Shop Drawings and descriptive literature for approval in accordance with require- ments of SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS. 4, COORDINATION: ' a. Provide and set all rods, plates, hangers, bars, bolts, nuts, screws, anchors, brackets, rivets, welds, lugs and like accessories and fastenings of every kind or nature as may be required to complete work of this section in each and every detail ' and to join work of others. Proposed parts shall be of same metal and finish bracing, blocking, cutting, fitting, drilling, tapping, etc. to complete work of this section and to join work of others. ' b. Provide templates and patterns with necessary accessories for work of this Section and duplicates to other trades when necessary for proper coordination of ' fabrication and installation. i I ' S. METAL OVERHEAD DOORS: j i a. Flush steel sectional upward-acting doors shall be equal to OVERHEAD DOOR ' CORP. doors of size of 81-011 (wide) x 91-0" (high) as sho-,vn on plans. Doors shall 27-1 ' have 16 gauge formed panel sections of 2" nominal thickness with a flush outside face. The steel shall be galvanized with not less than 1, 75 oz, of zinc per sq. ' ft. and chemically treated for painting as specified under PAINTING AND FINISH- ING, Meeting rails shall have rabbeted type weather joints and act as two inter- locking struts full length of all sections, Bottom section of all doors shall have ' neoprene weatherstrip. Top section of all doors shall have an adjustable seal strip, ' b. Doors shall be equipped with automatic door operator Model No, EL, 1/3 h, p., motor - split phase - 110 volts, outside weatherproof heavy-duty key switch. ' c. Furnish and install two (2) doors at Room No. 1119, as shown on plans, according to Manufacturer's printed instructions, ' 6. SKYLIGHTS: ' a. Skylight unit shall be factory -assembled consisting of a clear acrylic plastic dome cover with a curb fabricated from . 125" thick aluminum and shall be a mini- mum of 9" high, t b. Units shall be American Cyanamid Corp. Building Products Division, Natura- lite, Inc., or equal, and shall be installed according to manufacturer's written ' instructions, including flashing. t 7. DRIVE-IN WINDOW UNIT fin Room No. 10561: a. Drive-in Window Unit shall be factory-assembled consisting of Electric ' Deposit Drawer, Speaker System and Heater, Microphone, stainless steel exterior, smooth gray interior, black acrylic coating over stainless steel trim. b. Unit shall be Mosler Tellerette Drive-in Window Unit as manufactured by the Mosler Safe Co. or equal, and shall be installed to manufacturer's written instructions, including flashing. C. Bullet-resistive plate glass shall be as specified under GLASS AND GLA7:NG. ' d, Metal window frame as specified under Hollow Metal Frames. ' 8. ALUMINUM AND GLASS ENTRY DOORS: a. Aluminum entrance doors shall be Alpana Aluminum Products Co. Aluminum Entrance Doors of size indicated on Drawings. i ,I 1 ~ 27-2 ' b. Aluminum members for doors mall be extruded of Alcoa Anoclad 13 Alloy and Anodized to a Black Alcoa I,uronodic 335Efir.ish. ' c. Glass shall be as specified under the GLASS AND GLAZING division of these Specifications, r d. Glazing stops shall be snap-in type with neoprene bulb-type glazing with, no expose] screws. ' e. Metal-backed pile cloth shall be provided at three edges of each door. ' f. Hardware for the door is specified under the FINISH HARDWARE division of these Specifications. 9. NIGHT DEPOSITORY EQUIPMENT: 1 a. Night Depository equipment shall be Depository Model No. 85-456 and Reposi- tory Model No. Bs-2412, as manufactured by the Mosier "DROPOSITORY" Corp. , Grandview, Mo., and shall be on hand before construction begins at the point of ' installation. Install in counter-unit adjacent to Drive-in window unit in Room No. 1.056, as shown on Drawings. To be installed by the General Contractor, ' b. Housing (Depository and Repository), and Chute Extensions shall be Heavy gauge Paint Grip Steel (Mosler "DROPOSiTORY" Standard); electric arc welded at the seams and ground smooth; thoroughly cleaned and painted a base coat of zinc chromate primer. C. Front facing frames and doors (exterior), and all exposed component parts thereof shall be Satin Finished, Alumilited Aluminum, with Standard Face Word- ing engraved in Front Frame and black filled. d. Access doors (interior) on Repository (receiving container) units only shall be No. 89 door. t 10. VAULT DOOR: a. The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) Mosier Insulated Flat Sill Fire-resistive Non-grout Vault Door. ' b. The hinges shall be on right side, when facing front of door from outside of vault. Door shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. two hour fire-resistive label, Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. relocking device label, and Safe Manufac- turers National Association label for two hour door. Relocking device shall be de- signed to function automatically under mechanical, explosive or torch attack. 27-3 ~ II ' C. Clear door opening shall be 78" high x 32" wide, and shall be equipped with five bolts, 3/4" in diameter, operating four to the front and one to the top, ' with interlocking renon and groove at top and front, and interlocking jamb at rear. ' d. Door equipped with three-tumbler, Underwriters' Approved Group 1R Manip- ulation Resistant hand change combination lock and automatic bolt lock. Door shall be insulat id with Monolithic fire-resistive material. ' e. The door shall be equipped with Emergency Escape Device, having auxiliary inside handle. Finish shall be Mosler Flecktone Gray with chrome trim. The door ' and frame shall be installed after the masonry opening and plastering have been completed. ' 11. CHALKBOARDS: a, 1/4" "Claridge" No. 17 dark Myrtle Green. Clear birch trim and chalk trough. Claridge No. 800 chalk tray full length of chalkboards. ' b. Furnish two (2) chalkboards (36" high by 60" long). Install in Room No. 1089 and Room No, 13 in E. O. C. area. ' 12. TACKBOARDS: ' a. 1/4" washable cork with color thzoughout entire thickness and burlap back equal to "Claridge" No. 1105. b. Furnish and install where shown on Plans in Room No. 13 in E. 0. C. Tack- board shall be laminated to backing board as shown on Plans. C. Furnish and install two (2) tackboards 36" high x 60" long in Room Nos. 1046 and 1089. 1 1 27-4 ' DIVISION 28 - JAIL EQUIPMENT ' 1. SPECIAL CONDITIONS: a. General Contractor shall receive bids from art established reputable jail ' Equipment Contractor who can furnish proof of successful and satisfactory jail Equipment installations. ' b. The jail Equipment shall be a Subcontract under the General Contract. ' c. General Contractor shall furnish name and amount of jail Equipment Sub- contractor as requested on Bid Form. d. jail Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for the execution of his work t in strict accordance with approved contract drawings and specifications and shall be responsible for his errors in shop and field work. Other Contractors shall like- wise be responsible for their work being in strict accordance with dimensions and construction shown on approved drawings and shall be responsible for and correct errors therein. ' e. jail Equipment Contractor shall furnish General Contractor with nec ,~ssary approved Shop Drawings and setting diagram of all jail Equipment to be bzt in place ' by General Contractor. jail Equipment Contractor shall deliver this material to the building site in time so as not to unnecessarily delay General Contractor in the progress of the work, and General Contractor shall unload this material so as not ' to unnecessarily delay the truck's departure from the job. f. Under normal conditions, the jail Equipment Contractor shall not ti~ti n his ' erection work of the steel jail Equipment until the rough slab of jail area is broom clean, exterior enclosing walls are in place, exterior windows glazed, and roof in- stalled to prevent weather damage to the cell door locking and operating mechanism ' and other parts of the jail Equipment. g. jail Equipment Contractor will cut at his expense all necessary holes in steel ' plate work required for proper installation of plumbing, heating, wiring and ventila- tion. Boles to be cut in strict accordance with templates or drawings-to be furnished jail Equipment Contractor by Architects or Contractors requiring such holes prior ' to fabrication of steel plate work in jail Equipment Contractor's plant. h, jail Equipment Contractor shall furnish and install all jail type steel showers ' and shall furnish the shower drains for these showers, but Plumbing Contractor shall install the shower drains and he shall also furnish and install all other plumb- ing material such as shower heads, valves, pipe, etc., required for the jail type ' steel showers. i. All steel jail Equipment herein specified, except parts of the work to be ' enameled or plated and aluminum, bronze, or stainless steel finish hardware, shall ' 28-1 1 ' ' be painted one shop coat of good red oxide metallic primer, before shipment from factory. ' j. The General Contractor shall provide necessary opening through the outside wall of building not less than 61=0" x 8'-0" for ingress of jail Equipment herein specified. 1 k. The General Contractor will do all plumbing, heating, electrical, ventilating, L' and general construction work, including all cement, concrete, waterproofing, field painting, tile, plastering, and masonry work in connection with Jail Equipment. 1. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring and lamps and ' shall make all necessary connections for the jail type electric light fixtures speci- fied to be furnished by the jail Equipment Contractor. All other electric light ' fixtures are to be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. ' 2. SCOPE: a. The requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL ' CONDITIONS and SPECIAL CONDITIONS of the Specifications apply to this Section. b. The work described in this Division shall consist of all the labor and materials necessary to complete the jail Equipment work shown on the accompanying Drawings and specified herein. Any necessary part, not specifically shown or definitely speci- fied, must nevertheless be furnished if the omission is regularly and clearly a part ' cf the jail Equipment and the work -,wnpieted in accordance with standard practice in jail construction and in a manner acceptable to the Architect. ' c. All plumbing, heating, electrical, ventilating and general construction work, including all cement, concrete, waterproofing, field cleaning, painting and touch- up, wood, tile and masonry work, will be a•; specified under appropriate divisions, ' except as hereinafter specified. d. The jail Equipment furnished under this Contract shall be installed whero ' shown and indicated on the Architect's Drawings and specified herein. ' 3. SAMPLES TO BE SUBMITTED: a. The General Contractor shall secure from proposed jail Equipment Contractor ' and submit for the consideration of the Owner and the Architect in the City of Denton, Texas, the sample specified below before his propo6al will be considered. Contractor shall notify the Architect in writLig, not less than 12 hours before ' time of opening bids, that samples are in Denton, Texas. 28-2 ' (1) A full size corner section of the type of tool-resisting steel grating herein specified. Section to be about 14" x 2411, showing end and side framing members, one horizontal and three vertical members, framed to a section ' of open hearth steel plate +n one side. 3/1611 thick, 6" wide and 24" long. The bars and plate in such, ner section shall be true samples of the quality ' and kind of steel the bidder proposes to furnish in the actual work and shall also show method of interlocking vertical and horizontal bars, angle connec- tion to plate, framing and riveting or welding. ' b. The sample of tool-resisting steel grating and plate showing full size con- struction, submitted by Bidder to whom this Contract is awarded, shall remain in custody of Owner for comparison with the actual work furnished and will be released to Bidder on completion and acceptance of the work; it being understood that all samples regn;red to be submitted shall remain the property of Bidder submitting 1 same. 4. TOOL-RESISTING STEEI, GRATING: i a. Tool-resisting steel grating shall be constructed of bars produced especially ' for jail use and of the sizes, shapes and quality herein specified, vertical and hori- zontal bars substantially and positively interlocked at each intersection, without reducing the round circumference of the bars at such intersections. Pipe sleeves, ' swedging, caulking or any interlock that is not positive or that depends upon fric- tion for security will not be acceptable. I ' b. Vertical bars shall be secured to top and bottom frame bars with counter- locking bars, or electric welded where welding will not affect the tool-resisting quality of the work. Counterlocking bars, where used, ehail be the same size as ' the frame bars. C. All tool-resisting bars shall be scientifically heat-treated in furnaces especi- 1 ally designed for the purpose, equipped with accurate automatic temperature con- trols, making possible uniform heat treatment and hardening to effect high resist- ance to cutting tools. Temperatures of the quenching mediums shall be controlled ' by thermoutats or otherwise carefully maintained within a range that will insure uniform hardness. All tool-resisting steel specified herein shall be heat-treated in the plant of the jail Equipment Contractor, who shall be prepared to furnish 1 satisfactory evidence that he has, in his plan`,, heat-treating facilities as herein- above specified. ' d. Tool-resitting Steel Grating shall be of the following construction: (1) Type 1113" Grating: (a) Type "B" grating shall be constructed of 1" diameter vertical round double ribbed bars, spaced nc;t over 4" on centers, passing ' 28-3 1 ' through and interlocking with 3/8" x 2-1/4" flat horizontal bars, spaced as detailed. (b) The 1" diameter vertical round bars shall be tool-resisting steel of the same analysis throughout. The 3/8" x 2-1/4" horizontal flat bars shall be open-hearth steel. (c) The cell fronts, walls, or partitions, to be constructed of Type "B" steel grating shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Other portions of the work to be constructed of Type "B" grating will be specified herein or noted on the Drawings. ' 5. LABORATORY SHOP TESTS: ' Laboratory shop tests to insure a uniform minimum performance standard in all double ribbed tool-resisting rounds, regardless of diameter or cross sectional ' area, shall be conducted on each mill heat of double ribbed tool-resisting steel ro+.nd bars, any portion of which is allocated to and hardened for this project. A nationally recognized testing laboratory, approved by the Architect, shall select at random from bar stock allocated by the Contractor for the work herein speci- fied, four pieces of each size of round, double ribbed bars after heat treating. Both the bending and cutting tests shall be performed on the same bar sample and ' the impact test shall be performed on one additional bar sample. a. Bending Test: Testing laboratory will arrange suitable supports spaced 12" apart to support the test bar about 4" above the bed plate of a suitable testing machine. Bar to be tested will be placed horizontally on said supports. A measured load, using a blunted end tool, rounded to about. 1/411 radius on the end in contact ' with the bar, shall then be applied perpendicular to the bar and midway between supports. The load to be applied to a round, double ribbed bar shall be not less than 9, 000 pounds. If bar breaks or takes a permanent set of more than 1116" as a result of being subjected to this above prescribed load, it will not be acceptable hereunder regardless of bar diameter size or cross sectional area. b. Cutting Test: After a successful test as above prescribed, a power hacksaw cutting test shall rhan be made on the same bar successfully meeting the above test requirements. It shall not be permissible to change by heat treating or any other method the characteristics of the bar as pressure tested under the require- ments of Paragraph A prior to its being subjected to the hacksaw cutting test re- quired in Paragraph B. A power hacksaw will be used in these tests so as to insure, as nearly as possible, uniform testing conditions. The power saw, in operation, shall exert a pressure of not less than 15 nor more than 17 pounds at midstroke and at point of contact between the hacksaw blade and the bar under test. The power hacksaw shall make 80 to 95 strokes per minute and the length of stroke shall be not less than 4" nor more than 511. The hacksaw test shall be as follows: it shall 28-4 ' continue for 17, 100 cutting cycles of the hacksaw, using one new hacksaw blade for every 285 cutting cycles, one cutting cycle of the power hacksaw shall be a complete forward motion and return motion of the saw, to the position from ' which the cycle began. Cutting shall occur on the forward stroke only. The re- sults from the cutting shall be such as will enable the testing laboratory to corn- ' pute a reasonably accurate estimate of the rumber of hacksaw blades that would be required to cut through or sever the bar. The actual cutting shall be conducted in an endeavor to cut straight through the tool-resisting bar at one point. The ' testing laboratory will provide all necessary testing facilities including a suffi- cient quantity of Simonds Red End hacksaw blades, or equal, 10" or 12" long, 18 teeth per inch. The same make, size and specification of hacksaw blades shall t be used on all tests which shall be made on the same power hacksaw under the same operating conditions. To be acceptable hereunder, the laboratory's test report shall show that the bar will not be cut through or severed with less than 3, 000 ' hacksaw blades regardless of bar diameter or cross sectional area. C. Impact Test. Testing laboratory shall make the following impact test on ' one round double ribbed tool-resirting steel test bar, taken from the group selected for conducting the laboratory shot- tests as described in the first paragraph of this division cf the specifications entitled "Laboratory Shop Tests." ' Bar shall be placed horizontally on two fixed supports, 12" apart, in the testing machine so that a weighted and guided tup weighing no less than ' 40 pounds falls freely by gravity no less than 5 feet to produce an impact of no less than 200 ft. lbs, on the test bar, midway between the supports and midway between the double ribs of the bar. The nost of the tub which contacts the test bar shall be rounded to approximately 1/4" radius. d. To be acceptable, the bar tested shall successfully withstand 50 consecutive ' blows without breaking or cracking and without sustaining a permanent set or bend in excess of 1/4" regardless of bar diameter, or cross sectional area. Test on bar shall stop after 50 of said impact blows, or before if the bar breaks on less ' than this number of blows. e. Test Report: The laboratory's test reports shall include the following ' data: (1) General Information: t (a) Name and address of jail Equipment Contractor. ' (b) Date laboratory completed tests. (c) Name and addresf, of persons witnessing tests. ' (d) Owner a,id location of heat-treating facilities where the steel for these tests wa•, heat-treated. 28-5 1 1 t (e) Diameter and length of round double ribbed bars. ' (f) Type of round double ribbed bars tested (Homogeneous or com- posite, water quenched or air hardened). (2) Bending and Cutting: (a) Did bar break in bending tee: and, if so, at what load. ' (b) Measure of permanent set in bar as result of load imposed. ' (c) Per cent of total cross sectional area of bars cut in 17, 100 cutting cycles. ' (d) The area cut in 17,100 cutting cycles indicates; according to our calculations, that (more) (less) than the specified minimum of hacksaw blades will be required to cut through this specimen of jail bar, which ' minimum, specified above, is 3, 000 blades. (3) Im2actc Results on bar tested are as follows: ' Broke Cracked Permanent No. Blows Yes/No Yes/No Set Withstood (4) Laboratory's Remarks. ' f. In the event of a failure in one or more of the bending, cutting, or impact tests to successfully meet the requirements hereinabove prescribed, the labora- tory shall use the two additional bars of the same diameter selected at random from the same mill heat for each such failure, the bars shall be subjected to the same tests; all of which shall test satisfactorily or the entire mill heat from t which said bars were selected shall be declared unacceptable for the work herein specified, unless it can be proven, to the satisfaction of the laboratory, that the failure was not due to the analysis of the steel but to an error in the process ' of heat treating which shall be fully corrected before assembly of the tool-resist- ing steel grating specified herein shall proceed. ' g. The expense of making all laboratory shop tests shall be paid by the General Contractor who shall arrange to have such tests made, as far as practical, in the Contractor's plant by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory ' approved by the Architect and located nearest to the Contractor's plant. Said laboratory shall be instructed by the Contractor to report test results direct to Architect and Contractor. 28-6 t ' 6. FIELD TESTS: ' In addition to laboratory shop tests specified herein to be made on tool-resisting steel round ribbed bars, the Owner and Architect reserve the right to make, or have made, prior to award of Contract, the same tests upon the tool-resisting steel grating samples submitted hereunder; such tests to be made in the presence of the bidder or his representative who submitted the tool-resisting steel samples. The cost of such field tests shall be borne by the bidder whose samples ar,_ to be tested. ' 7. OPEN-HEARTH STEEL GRATING: a. Open-hearth steel grating shall be constructed of bars of the sizes, shapes and quality he!:ei n specified, vertical and horizontal bars substantially and posi- tively interlozked at each intersection, without reducing the diameter of the round bars at such intersections. Pipe sleeves, swedging, caulYing or any interlock that ' is not positive or that depends upon friction for security will not be acceptable. b. Grating shall be framed at top and bottom with bars of same quality and ' size, or of equal cross sectional area, as horizontal bars. The vertical bars shall be secured to top and bottom frame bars with counterlocking bars, or elec- tric welded. ' c. Grating connecting with plate work shall be framed at connections with bars of the same quality and size, or of equal cross sectional area, as the horizontal ' bars of grating. Horizontal bars shall be welded to side frame bars. d. Bars in open-hearth steel grating shall be produced especially for jail use by ' the open-hearth or electric furnace processes and of a chemical composition within the limits adopted in the Specification of the A. S. T. M. A-7-49 for open-hearth bars and shapes. ' e. All open-hearth steel grating herein specified shall be of the following con- struction: ' (1) Type "C" Grating: ' (a) 7/8" diameter vertical ri bed round open-hearth steel bars, spaced not over 4" on centers, passing through and interlocking with 3/8" x 2-1/4" flat horizontal open-hearty steel bars, spaced not over 12" apart. (b) The steel wall portions of the work `o be constructed of Type "C" steel grating shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings or as elsewhere specified herein or noted on the Drawings. 28-7 ' 8. OPEN-HEARTH STEEL PLATE: ' a. All open-hearth steel plate work shall bp 3116" thick, unless otherwise speci- fied or noted on the Drawings, and shall be of a chemical composition within the limits adopted in Specification A-7-49 of the A. S. T. M. Steel produced by the Bessemer process will not be acceptable unless the phosphorus and sulphur con- tents are certified to be within the allowable maximurra prescribed in the A. S. T. M. Specification abova mentioned. ' b. Steel plates butting together in a straight line, forming walls may be con- nected and stiffened, where practical, with special jail type reinforced battens not lighter than 1/4" x 3-1/2" x 1" on both sides, or double 2" x 2" x 3116" angles on one side and 3/16" x 4" battens on opposite side. Omit battens on side where space is insufficient for field riveting. Bottom edges may be framed and stiffened ' with 2" x 2" x 3116" angle on one side and 3/16" x 2" trim bar on opposite side, ex- cept where platewalls setagainst masonry or concrete walls or where space is in- sufficient for field riveting, bar shall be ornitted; vertical corners may be con- nected with 2" x 2" x 3/16" angle on inside and 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 3/16" angle on out- side; plate work connecting with grating work may be connected with 2" x 2-1/2" x 3116" angles; any other recognized jail Equipment manufacturer's standard shapes, connections, and method of construction may be used subject to the Architect's ' approval. Additional stiffening and supporting members necessary shall be provided and when erected in building, all plate work shall !+e free from twists or bends. C. The steel plate wall portions of the work to be constructed of 3/16" thick open-hearth steel plate shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Other por- tions of the work to be constructed of open-hearth steel plate will be specified herein or noted on the Drawings. ' 9. RIVETING AND BOLTING: ' a. Rivets not otherwise specified shall be 3/8" diameter, accurately spaced from 4" to 6" on centers, as the nature of the work requires, and well driven down to completely fill holes. Holes to be punched not to exceed 1/16" larger in ' diameter than rivet used and holes not matching properly shall be reamed. Countersunk flat heat rivets or chipped heads maybe used where necessary for mechanical or other reasons. Hinges for heavy doors to be rivete3 with 1/2" ' diameter rivets. b. Where legs of stiffening angles, or other shapes, are not exposed to ' prisoners or to public view, they may be bolted together withe practical with 3/8" diameter bolts spaced from 811 to 12" on centers, opposite alternate rivet holes. Nuts of all bolted work to be drawn tight and threads battered. Where bolted work does not reduce security, special 3/8" diameter oval head bolts may be used where heads are exposed to prisoners and where nuts are not arcesuible to prisoners or exposed to view. 28-8 ' 10. WELDING: Electric arc and resistance welding may be used in the fabrication and erection ' of this work where practical and where the security is equal to or stronger than riveting and where reasonably neat workmanship is possible. ' 11. CUTTING HOLES IN STEEL PLATE WORK FOR OTHER CONTRACTORS: a jail Equipment Contractor will cut at his expense all necessary holes in steel plate work for proper installation of plumbing, heating, wiring, and ventilation. Holes to be cut in strict accordance with templates or Drawings to be furnished jail Equipment Contractor by Architects or Contractors requiring such holes prior to fabrication of steel plate work in jail Equipment Contractor's plant. Such cut- ting of holes in the field shall be in a manner approved by jail Equipment Contractor. b. Mechanical Contractors shall install heating and ventilating ducts in the jail ' areas after the jail Equipment is erected in place. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to obtain the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings and setting diagrams, showing the construction, sizes, free area and location of all ' security type heating and ventilating grilles that are specified to be furnished and installed by the jail Equipment Contractor, prior to fabricating the jail Equipment. The jail Equipment Contractor shall furnish the General Contractor with not less than three sets of these approved shop drawings and setting diagrams. Relocation or changes in the size or construction of the security grilles, if required by the Mechanical Contractor after the jail Equipment is fabricated, shall be at the ex- pense of the Mechanical Contractor requiring such changes. The jail Equipment Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Mechanical Contractor requiring any changes in the construction or location of security grilles furnished by the jail Equipment ' Contractor if the security grilles are furnished in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings. ' 12. ANCHORING GRATING AND PLATE WORK TO CONCRETE & MASONRY WORK: ' a. All plate walls shall be set not more than 3" above finished floor level on supporting anchors, spaced not less than 21-0" nor more than 31-0" apart, as the nature of the work requires. Plate walls shall be set on cement curbs completely ' filling space between finished floor level and bottom of curb angles. Anchorage to be in accordance with construction details as indicated on the Drawingb. ' b. Grating walls shall set approximately 3" above finished floor level and shall be supported by extending each fifth (5th) vertical 1" diameter round of the grating wall to the rough slab. The exposed area of this extended bar between the finished ' floor and bottom frame bar shall be enclosed by a galvanized steel sleeve in accor- dance with the details shown on the Dr.-wings. 1 28-9 1 C. Where grating or plate walls are shown on Drawings to connect with concrete or masonry walls, connection shall be made in accordance with details shown on the ' Drawings. ' 13. SWINGING DOORS: a. All plate and grating doors of the swinging type, herein specified or shown ' on Drawings, shall be of size and kind of material specified in Door Schedule. b. Plate doors installed in plate walls shall be constructed of the same quality ' of steel and not less in thickness than specified for the walls in which said doors are installed. Doors and openings shall be framed and stiffened with angles, bars, or other shapes, in accordance with construction details shown on Drawings. i c. Plate doors installed in masonry or concrete walls shall be constructed of not lighter than 3/16" thick open-hearth steel plate, framed and stiffened with ' angles, bars, or other shapes, securely hung to channel frames. Depth of frames to conform to thickness of wall for each door. All to be in accordance with con- striction shown on Drawings. ' d. All swinging doors, smaller in size than 21-4" x 71-0" shall be hung on two heavy ball-bearing hinges, designed especially for jail use. Doors of this size and ' larger in area shall be hung on three such hinges. DJDrs to pipe spaces and small plate shutters shall be hung on two hinges. Hinges to be of ample size for weight carried and in every instance of a type designed especially for jail use. ' e. All swinging doors and shutters, except where otherwise specified, shall be locked by means of heavy, multiple tumbler, flat, bit or corrugated key deadlocks, ' designed and manufactured especially for jail use. Tumblers to be of hard brass. Cases to be of steel, malleable iron or cast bronze, substantially framed and pro-- tected as the nature of the work requires. f. All swinging steel plate doors equipped with special speaking devices and observation panels shall be provided with special door sills designed to prevent the passage of any tools or contraband underneath doors. Sills to offer minimum obstruction across threshold and to be such as will not invite accumulation of dirt and filth. The construction of such swinging steel plate doors and the frames in which they are installed shall be designed to prevent the passage of any tools or contraband around or through the door when it is locked closed. All swinging steel plate doors to be provided with heavy, polished aluminum alloy or bronze hand pulls ' on one or both sides; as the location of doors requires. g. Door Schedule on accompanying Drawings will indicate which doors are to be ' provided with one or two way jail deadlocks, glass observation panels and shutters, speaking devices, food passes, and all door sizes. 1 28-I0 11 14. ACCESS DOORS: 1 Access doors to pipe spaces shall be not less than 11-611 wide and 41-0" high, made of not less than 3116" open-hearth steel plate, stiffened around the edges with ' suitable angles, bars, or other shapes, securely locked by means of heavy multiple tumbler, flat, bit or corrugated key jail deadlock not less than 4-1/2" x 3-3/4" x t 1-3/8", and hung on two heavy jail type hinges. Openings shall be substantially framed with angles; bars or other shapes; all in accordance with construction ' shown on Drawings. ' 15. JAIL DEADLOCKS FOR SWINGING DOORS: All swinging doors, except where otherwise specified, shall be locked by means of ' heavy deadlock designed and manufactured especially for jail use. The lock case shall be steel, malleable iron or bard bronze, not less than 5-1/2" x 3-3/4" x 1-3/811. Bolt shall be 3/4" x 211, of steel, malleable iron or bronze, with not less than two ' hard steel inserts 1/4" in diameter. Throw of bolt shall be not less than 3/4 of an inch. Deadlocks shall have a minimum of five hard brass lever tumblers with hitched ends, actuated by flat phosphor bronze springs. Key plugs shall extend a minimum ' of 3/8" beyond lock case unless otherwise specified. Keys shall be corrugated, flat or bit type. All keys to be heat treated polished alloy bronze or hard nickel silver. Steel plate lock casing and locks shall be welded or riveted to the doors. Exposed ' rivets shall have oval, or countersunk heads finished flush with the adjoining sur- faces. ' 16. JAIL LOCKS FOR FOOD PASS SHUTTERS: All food pass shutters in plate walls and/or plate doors shall be locked by means of heavy snap jail type lock. Lock case shall be steel, malleable iron or hard bronze, not less than 4" x 2-3/4" x 1-1/411. The case of the lock shall form a pro- tective housing for the latch bolt. The latch bolt and cylinder shall be hard bronze and shall be inaccessible when locked. Lock shall have not less than five tumblers of hard brass, hitched endss actuated by phosphor bronze springs. Key shall be cor- rugated, flat or bit type, of heat treated polished alloy bronze or hard nickel silver. ' 17. KEYS FOR ALL TAIL TYPE LOCKS: Locks to be keyed as directed, each key to be not less than 3-1/2" in length, blade ' to be 3/4" wide by 7/64" thick. Keys shall be corrugated, flat or bit type, styled to allow a comfortable firm hold and to provide effective hand leverage. Entire key to be made of heat treated polished alloy bronze or hard nickel silver. Stamp ' each key with number or letter as directed and furnish threw keys for each combina- tion. 1 28-11 ' 18. KEY SCHEDULE FOR ALL KEY OPERATED TAIL LOCKS: ' jail Equipment Contractor will, without extra cost to Owner, provide three keys for each key change required. A key schedule shall be furnished, specifying all key changes and designating which locks are .me hay and two-way and, in the case of ' one way locks, the schedule shall indicate on which side of door the key operation is desired. jail Equipment Contractor shall work out with the Architect, or Owner's designated representative, the desired key schedule and obtain approval ' therefor. ' 19. HINGES FOR JAIL DOORS: a. All swinging doors, except where otherwise specified, shall be hung on two ' heavy ball-bearing hinges, designed especially for jail use. The hinges shall be con- structed of wrought or malleable iron or steel. Each leaf of hinge shall be not less than 3/8" thick, and hinge shall be not less than S" long. Each bearing shall ' have hardened steel races containing hardened and ground steel balls. Pins shall be of hardened steel not less than 1/2" in diameter and made fast. Hinges shall be welded or riveted to doors and frames. ' b. :'cod passes, small shutters, doors to pipe spaces, etc., shall be hung on two plain bearing hinges of ample size for weight carried and of a type designed ' especially for jail use. ' 20. HAND PULLS: Hand pulls, where specified, shall be of heavy polished aluminum alloy or bronze, ' jail type; over-all length to be not less than 7-1/411. Hand pulls shall be attached with stainless steel or brass cap screws and hexagon nuts. ' 21. DOOR STOPS: ' Provide 3/8" thick steel bar door ste one near top and one near bottom of door, for doors listed in jail Door Schedule to be provided with stops. Con- struction shall be in accordance with details shown on Drawings. 1 22. GLASS OBSERVATION PANELS: ' Observation panels, glazed with not less than 7/8" thick bullet-resisting glass, shall be furnished where indicated on Drawings. Observation panels shall be in- stalled with their lower edge about 41-6" above the floor. Details of construction shall be in accordance with construction shown on Drawings. 28-12 1 ' ' 23. BULLET-RESISTING GLASS: ' The bullet-resisting glass herein specified shall be 7/8" thick, clear view, polished plate composed of a minimum of 4 layers of glass and a minimum of 3 layers of high test plastic, the composite glass weighing approximately 11 pounds per square foot, ' equal to that produced by Protecto Glass Co., Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., or Libbey- Owens-Ford Glass Co. ' 24. SPEAKING DEVICES: ' Speaking devices, through which visitors may communicate audibly with prisoners, so designed as to prevent the passage of tools and contraband between visitors and prisoners, shall be furnished and installed where indicated on Drawings. Construc- tion shall be such as will not reduce the security of the wails or doors in which they are installed. Except where otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all such devices shall be installed with their top edges about 41-5" above flcor and in connection with observation panels. Details of construction shall be as shown on Drawings. ' 25. VISITING PANELS: Prisoner-visitor panels co training observation panels and speaking devices, to be ' provided for visiting, sh be partitioned on the visitor's side of the panel. Divi- ders shall be spaced at ou 2'-0" apart and constructed of 10 gauge steel plate which ' shall extend out from a wall approximately 10" beginning at a height of about 41- 0" above the finish fl and extending to a height of about 6'-0" above the finish floor. Said plates sh 1 substantially secured to wall and have their outer edges trimmed with 1/2" diamet r steel rod bent to conform to the plate edge and securely welded thereto. Below the peaking device and between such dividing plates there shall i,t a cl?elf ccnistructed df 10 gauge steel plate secured to the wall and dividing plates and neatl/ flanged at front edge. Shelf shall be about 10" deep, full width between dividing pi,ates and about 41-0" above the finish floor. 26. SHUTTER FOR OBSERVATION PANEL AND SPEAKING DEVICE: ' Hinged, 10 gauge open-hearth sheet steel shutters shall be mounted over observa- tion panels and speaking devices on steel plate walls and/or doors where indicated on the Drawings. Shutters shall be hung on two hinges of suitable size and strength ' and shall be equipped with a hand pull and latch, Glynn-Johnson No. GJ-21-A, 4-way catch, or equal. Construction shall be in accordance with that shown on che Draw- ings. 1 28-13 1 t ' 2~. FOOD PASSES: a. Food passes, about 12" wide and 4-1/2" high, shall be framed in steel plate ' walls and/or doors where indicated on Drawings, Food passes shall be provided with hinged plate shutters of same thickness of plate wall or door in which installed, and so constructed that they will form a shelf when in open position. Shutters to be locked with substantial key operated snap locks, and so framed a£ to prevent the passage of contraband when locked closed. The framing shall be such as will not re- duce the security of the construction by reason of such passes. Food passes in plate walls and doors shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. ' b. Food passes in steel grating shall have opening 4-1/2" x 15" constructed in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. 2$. TAIL TYPE ELECTRIC LIGHT FIXTURES: a. In pipe space walls in prisoners' area, where indicated on Drawings, there shall be provided means for holding and protecting electric lights and reflectors therein. Openings in the plate work to be approximately 6" square and fitted with 3/8" tempered lenses to be furnished and installed by jail Equipment manufacturer, for diffusing the light reflected through paid openings. Framing of openings to be ' such as will not reduce the security of plate work by reason of such openings and so constructed that lenses and light bulbs may be readily removed and replaced. The means provided for holding lights shall provide a place forimounting a receptar ' cle with base for open or concealed wiring and for mounting reflector to direct the light through lene and so arranged as to provide necessary ventilation. Details of construction of these fixtures-shall be as shown on Drawings. Electrical Contractor ' shall furnish and install the wiring, conduits and 150 watt lamps and make all necessary connections to these light fixtures: jail Equipment Contractor shall furnish and in- stall receptacle with base, reflectors and lens. These jail type electric light fix- tures shall be installed at locations shown on Drawings and constructed in accordance with details shown an the Drawings. ' b. In masonry walls between pipe space and cells, where indicated on Drawings, there shall be provided means for holding and protecting electric lights therein. This fixture shall be the carne type construction specified for the jail type elec- tric fixture for steel plate walls, bvt this fixture shall be mounted on 3116" open- hearth steel plate riveted to channel frame by the jail Equipment Contractor and set in the masonry wall by the General Contractor as the building work progresses. Construction shall be in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. 2#. ELECTRIC LIGHT AND VENT ASSEMBLY: a. In pipe space walls in prisoners' area, where indicated on the Drawings, there shall be provided means for holding and protecting electric lights ap4 (reflectors 28-14 , ' therein. This fixture shall be mounted on 3/16" thick open-hearth steel plate. Openings in the plate work to be about 6" square and fitted with 3/8" tempered lenses, to be fUtnished and installed by fail Equipment manufacturer, for dif- fusing the light reflected though said openings. Framing of openings to be such as will not reduce the security of plate work by reason of such openings and so constructed that lenses and light bulbs may be readily removed and replaced. The ' means provided for holding-lights shall provide a place for maunting a receptacle with base for open or concealed wiring and for z. unting reflector to direct the light through lens and so arranged as to provide necessary ventilation. Details ' of construction of these fixtures shall be as shown on the Drawings. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the wiring, conduits, and lamps and make all necessary connections ro th,~se light fixtures. t b. Vents shall be constructed ofpe "8" grating. These grating vents shall be covered on prisoners' side with No. 10 guage steel woven wire, 3/8" mesh. C. The electric light fixture and vent shall be mounted on 3/161' thick open- hearth steel plate securely attached to 3/16" flanged plate channel fraine. Con- struction shall be in accordance with details shown on Drawings. The General Contractor shall set tlkse combination units in the concrete walls as the building work progresses. i 30. SKYLIGHT GUARDS: Skylight guards shall be constructed of Type "B" grating as hereinbefore specified. ' Construction shall be in accordance with details 4;hown on the Drawings. All sky- light guards shall be installed in accordance with notes and details shown on the Drawings. 31. PERFORATED PLATE VENTS! a. In steel plate walls of pipe spaces, where indicated on Drawings, there shall be a group of perforations in the plate walls not larger than 1-1/2" square, with a total of not less than 45 square inches of free area unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. All such groups of perforations shall be reinforced on the pipe space side with 1/4" thick tool-resisting steel plate, having like perforations and whirl, ' shall be securely riveted to the steel plate wall. Between the two plates there shall be secured a woven wire guard of No. 10 steel woven wire, 3/8" mesh; all in accordance with details of construction shown on the Drawings. ' b. Where ventilation is required in masonry walls of cells, as indicate,, on Drawings, there shall be a group of perforations in walls not larger than 1-1/2" square, with a total free area as shown on Drawings. All such groups of perfora- tions shall be made in 1/4" thick tool-resisting steel plate. There shall be secured a woven wire guard of No. 10 steel woven wire, 3/8" mesh, on the back side of tool- resisting steel plate. Plate and wire welded to 3116" bent plate channel frame. 28-15 1 ' 32. JAIL BUNKS Jail bunks, 21-3" wide by 61-3" long, shall be installed where indicated on Drawings. ' Frames to be not lighter than 2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" angles. Bottoms No. 16 gauge steel sheets, securely riveted or welded to frame and provided with six holes 1" in diameter. Bunks shall be of the stationary type, supported by 3/16" thick plate Brackets, riveted or welded to steel walls, and to 2-1/2" x 2" x 1/4" angle supports attached to 1/4" x 4" bar anchors cast in concrete walls. Where bunks are super- imposed one above the other, the lower one to be about 16" and the upper one about Si" above floor; all in accordance with details of canstruction shown on Drawings. ' 33. WOOD BENCHES: ' Wood benches shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the Draw- ings. The benches shall be constructed of two pieces of oak of the size indicated on the Drawings and spaced 1/2" apart. The steel supports shall be spaced not ' over 31-0" on centers and constructed of 3/8" x 2-1/4" steel bars cross braced and securely anchored to the concrete slab with 3/8" anchor bolts. The oak seht shall be bolted to the steel supports with 3/8" carriage bolts. Ends of bolts to ' be battered down to prevent removal by prisoners. ' 34. STEEL SEATS: Top of stools to be constructed of 3/16" thick open-hearth flanged steel plate, 11-2" in diameter, neatly flanged, and welded to 2-1/2" pipe support securely ' anchored to floor with 3/161' x 8" x 8" base plate. ' 36. CELL MIRRORS: i ' Jail Equipment Contractor shall furnish in prisoners' area, wherever a lavatory fixture is shown or indicated on Drawings, a special mirror of No. 20 gauge sheet steel, chromium plated (bright), with 10-1/16" x 11-9/16" steel framing, satin chrome, having a clear opening of 7-15/16" x 9-7116" for mirror. Attach frame with 1/4" flat head spanner screws, satin chrome. All to be in accordancR with detail shown on the Drawings. 36. GUN AND KEY CABINET: t Provide gun and key cabinet where shown on Drawings. This Cabinet shall be sub- stantially constructed of 3/16" thick open-hearth steel plate, in size as shown on ' the Drawings. Door shall be constructed of 3/16" thicl. open-hearth steel, neatly paneled, securely hung on two steel pin hinges and locked with a heavy multiple 28-16 1 ' tumbler, flat, bit or corrugated key jail deadlock. Cabinet shall be provided with shelves, gun racks and key hooks. All hooks shall be neatly finished and ' plated with nickel, chromium or polished brass, as shown on the Drawings. Construction shall be in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. ' 37. PADDED CELL: ' a. Plate door to padded cell shall be constructed of 3116" thick open-hearth steel plate and stiffened with 2" x 3-1/21, x 1/4" angles on inside, hung on two heavy 6" jail type ball-bearing hinge* and locked with one heavy multiple tumbler ' jail deadlock. b. Standard observation panel and speaking device shall be installed in the ' door to padded cell. Standard food pass about 12" wide and 4-1/2" high shall also be installed in door. ' c. Hand pull shall be attached to outside of door with stainless steel cap screws and hex nuts. ' d. The wall covering of the cell shall be constructed of 1" thick, 02115, medium density, U. S. Kem-Blo sponge rubber, as manufactured by U. S. Rubber Company, or equal, completely cemented to a 3/4" solid plywood back. The plywood to be ' finished on one side. The sponge rubber shall have a compressibility of 5 - 9 pounds per square inch, when compressed to 75% of its original thickness; elongation of 250%; an average density of 30 pounds per cubic foot; and an approximate weight per square yard of 22.9 to 25.1 pounds. e. The bonding agent between rubber and plywood shall be No. 933, as manufactured ' by the Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, or approved equal. f. The sponge rubber shall be covered with a nylon base fabric, Neoprene coated, ' to weigh not less than 10 ounces per square yard after coating. The physical proper- ties shall be not less than the following: Tensile strength, 1000 pounds (Warp) or 800 pounds (Filler); adhesion of 40 pounds per square inch; tear strength, 90 pounds ' (Warp) and 75 pounds (Filler); hydrostatic PSI of 1000; and bust strength (Mullen) of 1000. ' g. The fabric shall be pulled tightly over the sponge rubber pads ar:d its edges lapped over on the back side of: the plywood not less than 2-1/2" c.nd &:-curely lap- nailed to the plywoow back with No. 14 tacks. Corners of the fabric shall be machine stitched, lapped seam, with laps of sufficient length to be neatly folded and tacked to plywood back as specified for edges. The plywood will be framed with No. 1 grade 2" x hill yellow pine, securely fastened to backside of the plywood at outer edges 1 with No. 10, 211 flat hev.1 c.:tmtersunk wood screws spaced 8" on centers. The screws are to pass through tN 1" x 411 and on through the 2-1/2" fabric lap above mentioned 1 28-17 ' and into the plywood back. All corners of the 2" x 4" frame are to be neatly fitted. The?" x 4" frame is to be so crostructed as to set back from edge 1 of plywood 1/8" from vertical tides. h. The padding shall extend completely around inside of the cell to a height of ' 60-001, and framing shall be provided with substantial fasteners at top and con- structed so the pads can be removed for cleaning purposes, but the fasteners must be made fo that a special wrench is required which will prevent unauthorized ' removal of the pads. The pad for the door entering thf cell shall be made in one place. ' i. The floor shall be covered entirely with 1/2" thick gum rubber. This rubber must be made in one piece when the dimensions of the cell do not exceed the maxi- mum standard available width; dense, corrugated on top side, solid, black in color ' and to weigh not less than 3-1/2 pounds per square foot. This rubber mat will be furnished and delivered to the job site by jail Equipment Contractor and there taken and set in place by the General Contractor after finish floor is in place. 38. SHOWER STALLS: The backs and sides of all metal slower str:ls shown on the Drawings shall be con- structed •~f not less than 11 gauge open-hearth steel sheets. Walls of shower stalls ' shall be formed of one sheet, or of two or more pieces welded together and ground smooth, so there will be no vertical or horizontal open joints in the completed shower unit. Bottom of shower stall shall be constructed of 1/81, diamond checkered ' steel plate welded to side walls or otherwise attached, so that all joints will be waterproof. Drain shall be furnished by this C=tractor ar,d installed by the Plumb- ing Contractor at no cost to jail Equipment Contractor. The drain shall be attached ' to bottom checkered plate floor with security type screws to prevent unauthorized removal by prisoners. Shower drain for jail Cells No. W-1840-PD or equal. Check- ered plate forming bottom of shower stall shall set approximately nine inches above ' finished floor line and a steel curb shall be provided across front of shower stall extending approximately six inches above checkered plate floor. Shower stalls shall be fabricated and assembled complete, with the exception of shower head, drain and ' mixing valves, in the factory of the jail Equipment Contractor and delivered to the building site as a cranplete unit ready for installation. Shower stalls shall be separ- ate and distinct units approximately 71-0" high and where shown adjacent to pipe 1 spaces or other walls, shower stall walls shall be attached to such adjacent walls as indicated on the Drawings, or as may be approved by the Architect. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install shower heads, mixing valves and all other mater- ials necessary for the connection of shower heads and drains to plumbing roughing- in and shower stalls at no cost to jail Equipment Contractor. Shower stalls shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication is completed and shall be erected in place t by jail Equipment Contractor; all as indicated and shown on the Drawings, ' 7.8-18 ' 39. ERECTION WORK AND ACCESS TO BUILDING: a. With the exception of the equipment to be built into masonry or concrete by the General Contractor, such as steel door frames and such items as anchor bars, angles and '.iannels to be set in concrete or masonry work, all jail Equip- ment herein specified shall be installed in place by jail Equipment Contractor with wor'w*nen of his own training and selection, under the supervision of a super- intendent especially trained and experienced in this particular line of wrack. ' b. The steel jail Equipment work specified to be set in place or erected by the General Contractor shall be furnished and delivered by jail Equipment Con- tractor F. O. B. his truck or common carrier truck to the building site in lots not to exceed 36, 000 pounds and there unloaded by the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall include in his proposal unloading Jail Equipment and set- ting at job Site.in place all jail door frames, anchor angles, anchor bars and/or channels, rubber floor mat for padded cell, and similar items which are to be set in concrete or masonry work, and any other parts which are to be built into con- crete cn- masonry as the building progresses. C. General Contractor shall pr.ovide,necessary openings approximately 61-0" x 81-0" M.1 jail floor through the outside wall of the building for ingress of all jail Equi),:rnent. d. All cement floor firdsh, cement curbs, waterproofing, and other cement work, where shown or specified in connection with the jail Equipment and all paint- ing and plastering on or near jail Equipment shall be done as specified under appro- priate sections after jail Equipment is completely erected in building. e. Under normal conditions the jail Equipment erection shall not be started ' until 6e jail area rough slab is broom clean, exterior enclosing walls are in place, exterior windows glazed, and roof installed to prevent weather damage to the lock- ing and operating mechanism and other mechanical parts of the jail Equipment. 40. PAINTING: a. All steel jail Equipment herein specified, except parts of the work to be enameled or plated and aluminum, bronze or stailness steel finish hardware, shall ' be painted one shop coat of good red oxide metallic primer, before shipment fr en factory. b. All burns, weld spatter, exposed field rivets, bolts, nuts, welds, plaster, cement, waterproofing and any marring of the shop coat of paint on jail Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and retouched as specified under PAINTING AND ' FINISHING. ' C. Painting of all jail Equipment after erection shall be done as specified under ' PAINTING.AND FINISHING. 28-19 41. SUBSTITUTIONS: Each Jail Equipment Bidder is permitted to bid his own equipment by making sub- stitutions in the Drawings and Specifications, indicating the specification para- graph and/or drawing detail number affected by the variations in the space pro- vided in the bid form and submitting the substitute drawings and specifications ' with his bid as hereinbefore described, 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' 28-20 1 e ' 1 1 1 2 2 ij CGL.L ca" CELL 510. .p am i I ^~,i gat OKYLig- 1 MEN mctl 1 -P s. Af. ` 4TSY. 1 ©PmO - -V I r ~ ~ ~ z ate. i A1osnCN' tliomaa am. o 1 C f i C L + o+n of I 4'-0 90 ~m FSN. r4. i F- I L Cob. 1.•Q ~L Q[2- AN-l ib. . 1 , ~.IL. Ravi• 1 1 N--- TO 2B :21. 1 ~ dog • • rxx~a a•tiow ~Kt • tS'~l,ltiRS C~~sl mamma" mooloss"m ~ d 1 a 1 womma Paa . 'o o 'o a ~o o " 'o 0, 4 i 00 0 1 LT I i x , ul .1 lip ` 1 .~"q ~f lip Z p. I'- 00 a [v 11 IE r•° f ''1 cl -l, I w}, 4 d I'n's 3 1 cG ~i►~=~ "l, f,v 1 1 28-23 o I ~.ll 1 F I, I I E ~ I „ f a; 1 co ~ u r~ v ~1ji `1!I Q t) s. to C • - ~ 17 17. c u 0;1 G f I y` ~/•4 / }.,I1:\.f 1-6 10 ~l J ; r b 4 0 ' l I i ~~lJJ II r ' 2A-14 , t _ ~f I ~ ~ }j lIt i ll~ ^~y r n I • 1. H 11~~48-15 mod r~ . t y . I 1 1 f a l'~ ► _ i~ cy I1J ~.'E O , \1 1iJ no z i T ~ ~ t u rr~j,` u U I~~ t % l . ~ ~ f~l ,i „i Y 4 18-16 i! 1 70 ',4 %Via I aj t 4011t:~ F- r%S 1110 I 1 i 1 ~ ='r RtG11T rDC5C-,>r: 28-27 VAf?!65 i 1 1 ~ 1 ~ -7 1 1 L_._.. J u'- I 1 1 ! 1 I 1 1 18-x8 . l.~„1~~I ITT 1• ~{-~M I ~ i I f 1 HAND 111'1 ` }{Q1Jr3INQ 1 ` 1. i t9 ~ -r.C~r~ 1 1 1 ' ZA=Z9 i 1 , I 1 4 1 j 1 I ~ ~~ir.►,3c co• L~4.rt.. t~~f7fNC3 f~UI..L i 1 E 1 ' i 1 i L\7 r= PO 00 ' ( I 1 1 T8-30 L~NCNOrZ .bOt-TS a _ - . •I~I,.~ .I•'01l •..•.S•I\. , I. F=C>r2 aE) I ~ ~LLf.TQ cxdlJTJaL ' 1 ~ . ,I f~ f I,I ~ w ' d Q ' Iplll ~ 'a 1 o NOMIMAL 4 x0 n _ WAIL saTDW4.. UJA&.I- 5p. ~ - LOCATION bY. J. G. : buT1f i87AL:L:CD by TomW Q%IznY__ ST x. vttri7rCes L _ C20111J D {NTO dI.C~Y1i - s"It-um L bT7[dC EMT..-. .b _ lit '28_31 ROUND V INTO GL1L..Y. ~ I O IE , Try. 71 r it 14 i~ I1 Ttj . I SLAB C&mmlurn r A 1 I' 14h p4p GECT1oN I 0177N71 W3 1 I 1 ~ ~ r f 1 ~ a Sot* ov. tr~u~Tt a ha • . LEI ._...1 U L\i5U LP~ L. ~V . 1 Z8-31 f Lu ITN 4 %'3y p 'H t Ar? e~uc Or7c3 H. Lov.%n Foor.2 ems ;544 ~ r / 141,c41oH,15&n • ~i;;, J~ THIG.I[. GF'CsNC = ROB6G2 f-'ADi~1No - Q.rA C; 1 ,c 024' Esbn 1 /J r T1uP~1~ srz MAT i Lo. I j =-U M- U. r rursraeer~~r~r '28-33 V-- C 1 dl ~ ! r Xjiw 0 in so ~ 41 10.1 poi .t , ,Z w IB LLO ' - - 1 F j L4 f; p 1 ~ ' '28-34 MAT 1 __h/I~QNI~Y Nr~ X O.N air? f I Nl!MTA"t-VD C" *10',e 1112" ru%l:v I 00000 rr- + - - - t ---4 5UN4 - 1 ` I j ~ I L*tsti+G .~ur~r--'cars . 1- auNv. mnocj,:c--r r5u .i ~Ldd r1 ' ~utuk~ C.7f~s N1L~rCJN~'~~1151~1_,:. . ' A1,/'~fa'ii21i7IIiY IQ17 C 1 ' 18-35 F f I T,.j Al'lbu~ 7 I w~ I i , L I fri x ~ `4 I 1 r~ +-x ~ tUy~ w i N ty ill 4 OOF 1 '18-36 i sb' x 4' o A. bZZd o H room CD /jic $i~o' x 2' x 2' 'C 2• L4►1rs +k• ADa1 GHOJJN$L. 4R~+T1Nd L• GLiP LET L'OT-fOM UJ&L" FL t*-r AND E'V6-r*V ' OTHUR M.A•T. ' c3r?~1T1_NG _.:Iu L. l TO ~g? -r jNG wAL• L. TO ;=&.C&. 7l^ MINg0N1' / _ G111%jr.3 Qp= rn4.;zgNr-2Y' - 'I - it ^ , C) $4 C~b~Ta j ' -ANGNORS QP 24' OG, ' +4' A 4" o. u aan euu~ 0 14 5= ' dim x 2' x 2' L Artcno23 a+ -of o.c ' f W/ td• 4' x 4' Is aucft ' ' , T 1 • fir::.-r ;~E•_ _ " ~ PPLA f'/ . V / -54 WA<+L O m~:~NnY m~;-~~~ = oNr-i N4?tom: Dan buc s &NGLG DUC. LAND CR&NNr-t- ~LATW ~ FLinNLSH6D sBY JAIL r-0WPM5N•r COWrnbC-1C 2 At.L- _ bUT iftT&LL6G E5Y C5QWrr2,NL CO M24%C"TOn , - ~►G~ p.t-i: ir'~tv~~.r~ - ~ ~rv~xlh.'xi~,'L ' : _ C S3 nY - - 28-37 1 I I f ~ r I, F_L ~.VzN IM N . E { I ! i {i 1 1 I 1 f 1 i Z8-38 ! rLnrr:. C'.NP f;zcT : Nvk: E j ' ~I:Il~r~l It'll, -'~Lt_OY ! iiI j=1 iL)//~$ - ,-1.3 CIA 0 L1 ~ •jiit l ` { ~ !'S&FFLG,.s 4 ~11G1. H~~LFr. IN -sH I x i Z8-39 (-'uATr; v,4~._~._. I I li I t I !9 it ' 4UT Trmt7 I I i ' I ~ . H1NCiFa - 1 I I ~ 1 ' 18-40 i ~ .1 I j ~ I1 ~a I j I I i yy h~ .4 W~~Y CAT~t-~1 ~ I ' I --t0 GA X111.!'nlrzz, _ c;;34LJTTC--T7 A.li-L f I I I I i F=r-X-)NT t ~ r- r : s" 1~. Cdr I i i I i ; { I I 28-41 1 V I Pt- A-rrs V 1 0- • ~r O b i r cVHU"TTGn ' STOP _ •L_. 1 L RTF'a ~e'TOi~-r L. r=V47N i ON CDF) rel.....IN7Q 000 r E ' 18-43 i to ~4 C I ~ ~ r I i a - Z.1 3 7p Qri t ~17 1 o fU i 1 I ~I } 1 I tJ _1~ r all Lull 1 .f : I ;II fill I' ' .2843 t NC~. !O C3A,. X ekv ' t'!tc~u t'•t'o~srl wln~ r-~.~.-c~ w~..L y I i a~ ' utt~~: ~ j IJ t; ' ' . ~E6 ~,FTuGt~ICL1'('tON t=OR' I ` 'L~f~L1 OF PC~T11~f?ATIGN~ "f OOl- ?~,~ISTS+.iGj ~IL_1NG ~;UPPL..N/-OQ r=XHL\UGT~ ENZ M C?F - \?E_NY TO =a f~6TE1'?M I N E~ 0 _MGCK&N K'.&cc>%- Ti?. t ' 28x44 f,W } v. 1 't . a f r t r• r I f y l 1 t 1.• 11 YY all . Z1 , ! !1 1 i 1~ r j .(4~ 1~ ' i jo, J i j . J~~ I I Aj~ Il h - i !!1ab 1 ! t ~gl°~ rt 00 J ' it f IM f ~t' r r+c. = rs.-:s•-...: rs~ tz•~II' 1 i y 28-45 t4' x 11 c► x I'r' ~NIUwt'itJ 70 Cam HaT tJfi-'f'i:~, G.- %./W-41zpsta ~1r-'Tat? t-,~~-ICSYMDNJ I C"b p't G111:t~i~.HEL7 ny .36JL- P..-.,V:llf?.t'twT 1 aO 4Tro.:Tm- i c:c~r.rmecTC~^~ c-.:l at.l.. ' THr_ Fi-U%Al-4+s3 f1L~c~ f=u•1*1L-3H LWO t1-1`` rL%LL- AL-L- o'fLiT.;. r'L-UNAMNt,13 M4\-rErIAL FrOn Tl►6 vef~ve~, Q1F'E, t-TC. rL'CAL1111MO Pcx7 THE J.-WL._ TYF•U £-,TLTG-L- 1 ~ ~ X ffV?IL7r , H c=tiEE3L_ i CC3tfT11~lU":11~'. ' y.fEtrt'3 14~`s Chm.ET 1 O aces. M _ ,fir t TQP cnf; CN- -7r- f ' 28-46 1 ~ ' I f~ I 1 1 oll :~T'TL7-"IK3G 'TO i 1 • --1 _1.10. 1m c+TEc i , , ~ ! '1~~ F•-4C~~~ ~ LtllAftL L'YJTTON!-. f I i SUN" r WADI . HUW-- ON P1.LL\'T'F~ UJj~L.1 i e i 1 ~ 1 ~ 1 28-47 f 1 { 1 "3~ i d~ X5' x 15' c-7.M, F~L~L~TE3 ~'~FL-R 1 i i i r 1 ~L.G.- VLXTIC71l%.J SeCTi ~N f`~?L~"°1'`! N (~!1\t..._.L.... gQ Cam?-. i I 4 1 ' 28-48 1 I ' •r~aN ►Cy H 1 • ST C '1_ CCN n-4UCLP3 1 4ZMNG 155-XD-'N 1 - i I ' , 28-49 1 Nt7Y A44 41411 /Y RxI x ~l1,4 d ✓ r' 4 I •'\,>e, iL7" .4 Cf 4 n' / Of' I ' k V 011 y i GX7lJN1G 4 ~ 1 I 28-50 M r • 1 1 DIVISION 29 - ALLOWANCE FOR SPECIAL ITEMS ' 1. SCOPE: ' The Contractor will include in his bid the cost of installing all items hereinafter specified and the purchase of these items as set forth in the Allowance, unless otherwise specified. 1 2. ALLOWANCES: ' a. For Ceramic Fixtures by Beau Mood, San Antonio, delivered at job Site. Assembling and wiring shall be by Electrical Contractor as shown on Drawings. ' Allow TWO THOUSAND DOLLARS ($2, 000.00) for purchase. b. For Chairs or Seats for Council Chamber, Room No. 1005. Installation ' shall be by General Contractor. Allow NINE THOUSAND DOLLARS ($9,000.00) for purchase. C. For Carved Wood Doors by Lynn Ford, San Antonio, Texas, delivered at Job Site. Hardware as specified under FINISH HARDWARE Division. Doors shall be installed by General Contractor. Allow TWO THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED ' DOLLARS ($2, 500.00) for purchase. d. For purchase of Brick as specified under MASONRY Division. Allow a 1 unit price of SEVENTY DOLLARS ($70.00) per each ONE THOUSAND BRICK (19000). 1 i 1 1 1 29-1 I y ~p allr K c > , '03ES SV OIOHS3UHl • • • • 73 W - AnKinma ~ Q. 1al3w Mori W H 010e ie aooM os 000m,aaoo aiios de V 1 aVMKOW ~a1X% j ' N N N IQ 4~ I N i I' / i y ~ ~ _ rEr orl~ 0 4 ~ Q~o_ g ~ O 7 A 1) f~ O •P• 4 .1 I L • c n, sY r c e O 0 I a r D t'~ O p 9 ~ 9 Z 1■ not t4 tj V ON r. w IP *alp to ;0 go x' x x r x x 0 x V x x. x ~c x s~ x= x x x x xl K x x x x K x x x X „,m44~~''~,b~„off o=~ ~ •blb~ ~ooo Rb ~ ~ ' .n t()1~'+in~mnfiEai~►d+i~Ni~ t >n 1+ i41 K+ )n ~ 111 IQ M i+ It a ~1 ' M M Ql V3aaqt~la gfe o n'7q o. o e a 2 i i T r • W 03dS SV 010HS3VH1 i 03AWVO W wnMtNniv - - - y I } 1V13MI_ MO"110H ' W 0104 10 OOOM '0-S DOOM `3800-011OS Xx XJX X, X\ A - „ OV 3H83A0 IV1311 t t 1 L - L at d s r I t _ as f 4 1 g u s e ~C. si 2 lot IS it 3► R O. itV a O, 0 9 Q n ` Q z r~ Q - L 8 S f- - • ► s x t3 C s i t p1p. s t v m a i s _ IX O , Q I N Y Q s 2 " s Ia - a a a `s s O Q r. St ~G Qq, as x x a a ma. ' z " a JJ Y = tea} ~J f a _ . _ Q I I o . , s , _ ~sy _ s {Y _ s Y i C s+ € N its i ai ! f tR_ dF j ; in j Mme` etr o M r n~+ ec. tI. .ice LEO 1 'Alp ;a ;p ;p ip N f x x ,c >t x x x .x x x x x x x, x K t x x X K W N x roc x x x x X x x x 11 - f in ih d~ iiT il+ iA ip ibn i.~n 4i• i,~0 ~`t0t` ~i► '"n(cr _A ~t-0t:~ d-1--4pbYt+ abih ~c _241 -to ta 14 to W% in iM t~ d` e+ t1' in fi lC` d` till i1 t+ Ef ~h o+ 2 S%T tV ~t l'f l7 +1 4 V QT Q 'l'3 rT Q ~+T 0 ~f 0 d d 0 i V? r? 'Q l7 I t7 q 0 Y Q r1 'a tv : I ty.v i V Y' ' Yr t Y/ _ 1 _ p r 7 2' ~ a UL s r ~ I ~ I O3dS 6y O'IOHS3NHL I 03ANYO ~ ~W ~ WnKlnnw ! _ I ~ 1ML~N JN011 H I W 0.10,411 OOOM '0'S r i Z OOOAM113N00 or10s 1 16 y. QVJW3AO 'f U13„ ! M t , _ I ^ } I mo 4 i ~ to t o' ~ ~ 1 o j ~ I i W I II F I I I I ~hl x W •40;~'~~ ~Q4. 4 4 00 q i I i w 3~~r~ xx ~c Xx Xx Xy xxx 4~ I N I~ x K y~ Kx ~ r~ k I I ~ I r1. a , y a 2 a t.~ r ,t~ i a 1► ` %w all% Y~ ~1 ~`T~ 1V1 N N '10 t7 N N V4 -#i+ t4 y ' ~ ~ N ~ ~ 1~ 1~ Q M 1[+ 4+ N N tl ~ ~ 4 N k ~ ~ al ` bQ s . _ ~ a f t'eF _ ~ :.fin--?s~... tll f Y I 'O3dS Sa OloHS3HH1 ~ I i W nnNlnmr } 1W.Lam Moil W w olo31e aooM 'o*s r 3 OooM'3YOO OIlos I V Otl3FW3AO II13n • t .n H Q Q 'e s m a s,;- s- 4 Q e. s 1;f ~a C 9 4 : o s s n, ly s ♦ Q 7. o s a 0 s ,QQ O t 4 a I` It 4 r d a5~41 D a s r ~ m s z 1111 r ti s 4.X~ • 1. M '16 7 7 0 q ` 71 M*~,.~ ' I ~ I Z M V Y M I 1 .M I I A ~i ~ •I 9 I I ' N N +~d4 4d 'Pi ;s 0+dNd dkxxxx'xlxl° , Y 3( )11 k x x x x x x x x x ,e x I ' ~~d~` ~IS'AQ ,nl~N~+ialltia'W Nib~N ~N N cs I' RVI rt i -1 AL Jiz %WAN ILK Y .V, o I ~y. h 00 I i ! j vlY Y F NN { s W W is d E • q { t_~ X 1• 2111 o b o Q b b b b ; b i f o ~i b o b i o 'h o 4! o zl Q I i 0 4 I d a0 fy1 +A .p ca c+ ;4 i+ 1+ ' a F cy 1 a c+ t N N a0 i, { r f i, iq . Fj cp 1V 4 'O8 'dA8 Qf ~ ~ V' CS - Qj I l'{ ' ~ ~ 0 d c z SX011s 0001A (1_ , W IONOO,•03s0ex3 '1_ 7. Z 7" 2 Z 12 Z Z Z 7. 1-2 17 7. Z 2 7 7-12 ? Z I Z 7 Z 3'1!1 0INV4130 _ t $*N00 03SOdX7 _.1 QAlJ O b I 1l Y Y aC s/ I - - _ I a o N J 'Smoijul •000 - i ; oarOa 'd A0 VA 14 _ K 1,4 H N u r+ tia 11 44 E1 N M Z 5101419 G3SOdX3 :t :XI x x x son LL, - - - - ' lam ,.0/t x , Zii z ~fi SET ~7 d ~q b Q 11 ~7 ~7 a %i ft v m .1 OlNVtd30 ~1 U- U IZ f ' . r- 3111 OIN VW30 w to .N w _ 3 H' ONIa0013 1N311IS3a p IN D d D 4 D D n O 14SINIA 12AAON 'ONO? V ~1 { V2NIM0 AO 13dsv0 c4 ti> to dl _ M ~Q Ms cp eD t0~ - ' da _ ~O e0 ~~~.p a►i c0 d~ .y m .a .o to a~ ,Q 3111 Av 10 lit V s A~ r S ~1 ~Q 3 A 4 ~l` _ S t, i~ r a L x ~S~ V .t .i • M1 j , L. 114 Orj n< 3 yob id a o'y f! 3` Ati p< Q t r~ I ~f I' I~ Q} 3 a- t d 2 1 W W ,~H p 0 0 0 0 5 b o' '~11 'b O 0 % b o 0~ 3i 31 J ~9~ v ; :Zf :9I' v 4 = i, z, N c~ ip o+ c• i, N N c+' - cQ c+ c c! 0 IT OI O O 0 O ( d 4 Q o O O O 6~ ~4 V - 'ae •dAO 1~ ~ _ ~ tY ~S I n a cf cY SHOl1S a00M a i + } ' W 'ONOO 03SOdx3 •7. 7 Z 2 :2 Z Z Z Z 7 Z 7- 7 Z 7 7 7 7 7 7.E 1 x '7. 7. 7. 7_ 7 Z 7 ' 3111 OINIVtl3O ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 F E ~ '*NOO 03SOdx3 _l I ! ! i0 ! { - -r- - 1 N J S)42111 oooM -7 ONVOS WO Z HO1tlS a3SOdx3 .4: i t t 1 :t 1 :1' .t .ti x* t i % ~I I-ts•I a -i Y t l 4 d ~3 t~ 1 s * - ► N •aM as/i x ,'/)a \7 o v q q a; \7 ~ ' 3111 0114tH 3 O W _ ►u W' I til _ it W N ONltl0old 1N3111S3tl Q, R D, Q D D I1' D' n t1 4 n n I 00 HSINI4, 13MONI NOD ! V tl 3 N M 0 AS 13 d tl V O cQ l0 e - to E s0 ~ ° N A; +Q cn r1 cQ .o 0 3111 ~lV1O ,f 1 C 0, - - I p t IA t ,C 7 pe' O .f D! y i 7 a O - o + I • , ~ • 1 { I 40 Z~ $ ~ ~b O O~ 9 0 O g 0 g~~ ~ o g 10 f I 1 1 43 E ~ 9, o UJ- _ _ .ia ap cp _ ap g~+ a0' g !I' O O b n o g o o! o o E f -oil 'd AO C'r ~A Z s )(0 11 s 000m p. ' V !0N00 03SOdX3 - x . _Z :Z 2 1 7 Z 7 Z 7 2-2 2 2:2-2 2 - 3111 0111YU30 i 60N00 03SOdX3 _3 N 1 t- y J 1 i 100 r l i J sxOUS DOOM Q oav09 'dAO moo 3 Z x01a9 o3soex3 'OM Nbl~ X ~Z11 x Q ~J \7 V %3 co O1"VU33 l1. %,L + ! _ i 3111 0111111x30 U) 111 j N oNlaoffle 1N3011s3a p p r, C% !1 n a HSINId 13fAOx1 -ONOO v V V V v u V V u U U u u v v j 83NAMO A9 13dxV0 [O .o r f + 0 3111 AV l0 i - - - + W < r ~f f ' a V g 2 _r ~s 31 r 10, ' WisT r • ~ ~,1 Itfti .i 4•.~ i r~'ti",. 7 ~ .t u r Ls, r• 4.,. _ ..i .i 's t t N " 3 i ` 1 1 ~ ~ f I I ' t i 1 f N S ti N c~ c~ N ~N. c! q'S _C► N W +A a0 i0 d0 ip 80 ;4 a0 I 'O~ 'd 110 ~ ' c1iO.liS 000# a, J •ONOO .0380dX7 2 7 y n7 7 7. 7.1 -l_ :1 7 7 Z 2 Z 3 Z 7_ Z Z 7 1 I t ^ 311 OIIrVli3O ~ ~ ~ `*WOO'.'OB$QdX3 J ] 3 J J t J MOM) I Lld 41- Z N Y N J sxoits QooM _i . r SPOONS O3cOdx3 x ~f •oM n~/ x „z/~ z ~ V ~7 ~T ~T 'tS ~f' ~ CS Q ~S 1? ~T ~ 'J ~7 ~ ~ ~"s d ~f ~7 l'f~ ~ f fqp OIMIdl13~ IL 11 11 ~ f • 3'1!1 Olwvd3~ l11 a1 ti 4NIi1001{ 1N311i$31! p A A n ` 0 HSINid 13MON1 'ONOO V U V V V l~ V V V U' J ~3 %I V 11 V V V 13 V Jt ' VANIAO Ag 13dVVO sfl - - I - - - O V- 3111 Avio Q r 1 0 W x ~ ~ ~ x + ' ~ 1 • fV a f ~ ~ ~ ~ r r n 3:V8e.~o~+t t3 3w . O ~ Lt # ~ t fit` III a" a 7 3 r s.; r. 'r M•I HEATDMO VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Lt em 1. SCOPE M-3 2. SPECIAL CONDITIONS M-3 3. FEES# PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS M-4 49 INSPECTION OF BUILDING SITE M-5 5. PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS !I-5 60 CHBCKU M AND TESTING EQUIPMENT BY CONTRACTORS AND NAMWACTLUMI REPRESENTATIVES N-5 w LA I- ` 7. SPECIFICATIONS M-5 80 CUTTnct Nam AND EXCAVATION M•6 9• CtTrM AND PATCHING M-6 100 BQUIPMBNT PROTECTION M-6 f, N•6 11. WAGE TO MU ' 1.2. CLMANIMs TESTING Alb ADJl1S"M M.06 u 13. WOU BY OTH MS M4 14. SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT M-8 25. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT M-8 16. MTALLATION AND OONN =ION OF MUM= M-9 FURNISHED BY OTTERS 176 M£ASURMEM M•10 18. PIPING M•10 yy 19o nps SUPPORTS m mu ~k a 206 PINE SLEEVES M-11 214 YwHnm No11 M-11 22. VALVES ry OIL: Ir f 1 n. a bA4 '4. a ae•3 o. a 1 J4 DATING, VENTIL TING AND AIR CoND2?1'ONrNa M-2 Item 23, VENTS p- 24. STRAINS M-1: 25. GAUGES Aim GAUGE CONNECTIONS M-12 269 TWa4oMETER AND THERMaMTM WELLS M-12 27. DRAINS M-13 280 OPERATING .-4STRUCTIONS AND FINAL DRAWINGS M-13 290 CUTTING AND PATCHING M-13 300 EQUIPMNT FOUNDATIONS M-14 31. PAINTING M-14 32. STARTERS M-14 33. MOTOR S M-15 34. INSULATIGH PIPING M-15 350 INSTALLATION Lip UNDERGMW PIP;NQ M-16 36- EXHAUST FANS M-18 37. I'101SE LEVEL M-19 38. BALANCING DAM MM M-19 _ 39 AIR OLn%Z" M-19 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFPt1SED M-20 wt_ 40« ACCESS DOORS 41. FLEXUU CONDCTIOM M- 2O wy 42„ MAKIN(; M-20 434 INSULATION - DOUG M1021 ; 44. DUCT,M M-22 4S. AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT M-22 45. GUARANTEE M-24 479 MANUFACTURERS, QUALIFICATIONS M-24 48. DUCT HEATERS M-24 49- BASEBOW HEATERS M-26 f3" 50• ROOF FRESH AIR INTAXEg M-26 51. AMODAI TIC TUUUAME BLS M-26 52. ALTERNATE NO. al - 6.0-C- AREA M-27 M-31 f a+v H-3 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1. SCOPE: A, The work covered under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and material and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of a complete system of HEATING, VENTILATING ' and AIR CONDITIONING, (as shown on the drawings, (2) as dis- cussed in these Specifications and (3) as necessary to provide a complete integrated and satisfactorily operating installation. The work is subject to the terms and conditions of the contract and includes, but is not limited to the following: (1) Air handling equipment with coils, filters, etc. Ducting. (3 Chilled water piping, (4) Dampers and controls, (5) Grilles, registers and diffusers. (6) Duct insulation. (7 Pipe insulation. (A Exhaust fans, ducting & registers. 9 Painting, (10) Electric strip heaters, B, This Contractor shall include in his bid all of the gei:eral con- struction required for the installation of the air conditioning , system such as concrete supports below equipment, pipe anchors, etc.,'anless otherwise noted, z. SPECIAL CONDITIONS: A. These Special Conditions shall supplement the General Conditions and the Supplementary Genera; Conditions _^•f the contract which are hereby included in this section of the Specifications. B. Contractor shall examine such documents together with addenda issued and bid his work in accordance with same. C. Certain paragraphs included in this section are supplement+±l to similar paragraphs in above named documents. They are not intended to supersede those paragraphs. Should •ny conflict exist, the matter shall be referred to the Architect for clari- fication. D. Codes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations: Comply fully with requirements of all codes, ordinances, rules and r lation in effect at the site, Report any conflicts with these requirements 'r found in the Specifications and accompanying drawings to the Architect who will issue the necessary instructions or addenda to the contract documents, a r> J '.4 { 1 Y... 4 f a e A~ 9. t, .c M-4 E. All electrical devices and equipment shall be labeled by National Board of Fire Underwriters' Laboratories. k F. In no case shall a bidder base his bid on a class of material or workmanship less than that required by the Contract Documents nor the above codes or ordinances. All modifications Nhich may be required by local authority having legal jurisdiction over all or any pert of the work shall be made by this Contractor without additional charge. In all eases where such authority requires deviations from the requirements of these Specifications or the accompanying Drawings, Vila Contractor shall report same to the Architect and shall secure his approval before the work is started. G. Completeness: It Is the responsibitlty solely of the Contractor for the completeness of Me work and for giving timely and adequate information to other Contractors where required for proper rout- ing and support there if. H. Workmanship and Installation: All work shall be perforated in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their respective tvaCes and properly licensed. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufactur- er and the best standard practice to bring results of first class only. I. Contractor shall schedule his work to permit inerections by the Architect aryl/or authorities having jurisdiction, before the work is concealed, J. If the Contractor performs any work contrary to the applicable Codes, Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations or Contract Documents without written notice to and approval from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom to correct such work. K, Contractor shall lay out his work carefully at the site to con- form to the building and site conditions and to avoid all obstritc- tions. He shall coord.'.nate his work with that of the other trades to avoid delays and exr~ense to others. L. Except where specifically noted, the Plans do not give exact elevations or locations. This Contractor shall acquaint himself thoroughly with the details of the proposed construction, in- eluding exact elevations, locations of necessary points of connections and obstructions to be considered, usfi g visit to the site prior to bidding where necessary. 3. FEES, PERMITS AND IN§MCTJONS : Contracte 'ehall arcure and pay for all permits and licenses required Oor work. He sha]i give all notices and comply with all Laws, ardin- t V U iY. , ' 1 lilt ~ y..~9 ^IMJ/' 1 $jq J~ y i Y M-5 ances, Rules, Regulatlons and contract requirements bearing on the work. 49 INSPECTION OF BUILDING SITE: Before handing in his bid, it is necessary that the Contractor visit the building site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met there in installing the new cork and make due provisions for same in his bid. It will be assumed that the Contractor, in handing in his bid, has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install qll the work required or shown. Failure to visit the site shall not furnish excuse for faulty workman- ship or omission of equipment or work under this Contract. 5. ~RJDUCTS AND MATERIALS A. The equipment to be furnished under this Contract shall be the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same equipment are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. 74 B. All materials shad be new and of the best quality. All equipment requiring electrical connections shall be provided for use with current ava;Uable. b. CHEC TESTING EQUI PMENT CORMAGM AND tZ&L6MM ' A. In order to place responsibility for the furnishing of the proper mechanical equipment and to see that it is installed as intend- ed by the manufacturer, the Contractor, during construction, shall request supervisory assistance from the equipment manu- facturers' representatives so that the equipment will be properly installed. After installation, the Contractor shall again request the representative to inspect and see that the equipment is in proper working order. B. Check inspections shall include air conditioning, heating and ventilating equipment, control equipment and such other items as are specifically designated by the Architect and/or the Engineer. C. Before final payment is issued, the representatives shall submit to the Architect, through the Subcontractor, a signed statement certifying to their inspection and that the equipment is pro- perly installed and ready for operation. ro~ 7. §MIFI~CAT., IBS In the matter of Specifications, there are inLTIcacies of construe- tion which a.re Impra2tical to apeeify in detail, but in such matters the current rules of goad practice shall govern. Ans, point which R may seem to need clarification will be fully explained if applies- d `r J'! lit . i r. Vie.. M-b tion is made to the Architect. The Plans and Specifications are intended to by cooperative and of equal binding force. Anything 1 called for in the Specifications and not shown on the Plana or vice versa, shall be furnished by this Contractor. r8. CUTTING. BORING AND EXCAVATION: A. No cutting, boring or excavating, which may be necessary for this work in or about the building, which may in any way interfere with the work of another Contractor, or weaken the structure in any way, shall be undertaken without receiving the approval of the Architect before starting same. Be All excavations made by this Contractor shall be properly filled, flooded and tamped to the original grade. This shall be done under the Architect's supervision and to their entire approval. 9. CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Each Contractor shall coordinate his work to avoid cutting of construction. Where it becon'Qs necessary to cut through watts, floors or ceilings to permit the installation of work under this contract, or to repair defects which may appear up to the expira- tion of guarantees, such cutting shall be done under the super- vision of the Architect by the trade or Contractor whose work is to be disturbed. The damages shall be repaired, after the work has been completed, by the same Contractor or trade. Be The cost of al: such cutting and patching shall be paid by the Contractor requiring such cutting and patching. 10. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall at all times take precautions as necessary to properly protect his work and equipment from damage. Be Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installa- tion. Equipment shall be covered tightly and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. 11. DAMAGE ,12 WORK: This Contractor shall pay for any injury or damage to the work of another Contractor, which may be done by him or his workmen. The Architect shall be the arbiter in such matters as may arise. 12, gWANINC•,TE_4TING AIQD _ ?ING: A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that scale, metal shavings, oil, pipe dope and every other iapurity will tend to acc.mulate at restricted points and is+pede the circulation. r r y sr+;-"drr t A:1 IN w M-7 Every precaution shall therefore be observed in the assembly of t the water circulating systems to remove and exclude foreign matter and upon completion of erection a thorough cleaning program shall be observed, 9. The cleaning operation shall be followed after ;'1 parts of the systems are in pt;ce but before any are insulated or furred in. 'F C. This Contractor shill take precaution during the cleaning opera- tion to protect his work and the work of other trades and should any damage be done, he shall remedy or repair it to the complete satisfaction of all concerned. The Owner's representative is to be present during the cleaning operation. D. Fill and flush system at least twice usis~d a suitable cleaner in solution. In filling the system, be sure to vent in such a manner that the control valves, cannot baekfill, thus causing foreign natter to be introduced into the valve body. x. E. 6;*ring the progress of the work or upon its completion, Contractor . shall, at his own expense, make such tests of his work as herein specified or as required by the Architect or by authorities $ having jurisdIction, He shall provide all apparatus, teapo?sry ` pipio,Z connection rr other requirements neceescry for such tests and shall take all due precautions to prevent damage to the building or its contents incurred by such tests. Contractor shall furnish a certified report of compliance or non-compliance or, each test to Architect. F. All water piping systems shall be properly tested to assure their being absolutely tight. In the case of pi^es which are to be insulated, these tests shall be completed and the piping system proved to be absolutely tight before any insulation is applied, G. The procedure of these tests shall consist of subjecting a piping system to a hydrostatic pressure ur 150 lbs, per square inch gauge for a period of no less than eight hours. During this test' period, all pipe, fittings and accessories in the particular piping system which is being tested, shall be carefully inspected. If leaks are detected, such leaks shall be stopped by meaus designated by the Architects and the hydrostatic test shall again be applied, This procedure shall be repeated until, for an entire eight hour period, no leaks can be frwW wh-*le the system being tested is subjected to the pressure mention(d abrve. H. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of not less than five days. During this ;period, it shall r..y tr;~'., F , '~r.+ Any M a+J'" M~~* ~ ~ f ~r ~~fi~ 111110 I M-S be kept under the careful observation of the Contractor. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installa- tion by remaining absolutely tight during this period. The satisfactory completion of any test or series of tests shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility with regard to the ultimate, proper and satisfactory operation of such piping sys- tems and their accessories. I. The Owner's representative is to be present during the testing of the piping. J. The Contractor shall include in his bid th,2 coat of adjusting all the sy&tems covered u;Wer the Contract for proper ,operation. A, Defective Work: If inspection or test shows defects, such de- fective work or materials shall be replaced and inspection and tests repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new material. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable. 13, t BY O'i'N!~tt8 : A. The General Contractor shall imilude in his work the leaving of openings in tits building floors and wells for piping unless otherwise no`ed or specified herein. It is the Mechanical Contractor's responsibility to see that all openings are left in floors and walls for the proper operation of the system and that all openings are in the correct location, 8. The electric conduit and wiring for the motors, controllers, interlocks and controls shall be accomplished by the electric wiring subcontractor unless otherwise specified. 14, SUBSTITUTI9M OF MATERIALS AND EQU' BWX: A. Plans and Specifications are drawn on certain brand names and model numbers of equipment to set a standard and to provide equipment to meet the space requirements, where applicable, B. Where alternate brand names are given, it is on the basis that such equipment will be acceptable provided it meets the require- ments not forth as to.capacity or otherwise, Where such alternate equipment is used as a basic of bidding, it shall be the respothi- bility of this bidding Contractor to check the proposed substi- tuticns not only as to meeting capacity and other requirements but also that it witl n.e-t the space requirements. C. All raids must be based on furnishing the named equipment or alternate, 15. LOCATIQJ.01 EQUIPI NT: A, The Plans indicate approximate locations of items which the CC ("'gyp 4.r..' : -al Y, ' y X< y s. # x Z •'d n. ,}'F * q S.M .IY~" yt ` f r hk l 'Lr L e! 't h t M-9 'a Mechanical Contractor is to install. B. Final locations shall be confirmed by the Contractor with the r. Architect. C. Confirmed locations shall include but not be confined to the following: Fd (1) Registers, grilles bnd diffusers, ' (2) Operating switches and starters. D. Where equipment is being furnished by another Contractor and connected by this Contractor, this Contractor shall request of 3 the Architect an approved drawing showing exact dimensions of required locations of service and shall install required facili- ties to the exact requirements of the approved drawing furnished. B. Contractor shall notify the Architect of his regairaaents for confirmed locations a reasonable time in advance of construe-' tion to permit obtaining such data, P, Failure of the Contractor to so perform as described shall make him responsible for costs or changes required to conform to the requirements, lb. IiSTALi.A?ION AND CO~C~. L EOPMBNT }^UitNISF£D BY QTf S1t A. Where Indicated by the Plana and Specifications, this Contractor shall install and/or connect equipment furnished by other r Contractors or the Owners. B. In such cases, the equipment shall be furnishes on the Job ready or for work by this Contractor. Items of size or weight, which re- quire trucking or heavy handling, shall be furnished In place at the point of usage by those supplying the same. co Such items shall be supplied to this Contractor during the progress of the construction and at such times as will not reason- ably interfere with the progress of this Contractor's work, The Contractor shall notify the Architect of his schedule for scch work s►_ffieiently in advance to permit supply of the items to schedule requirements. D. The Architect's decision shall be binding as to whether or not the k; Contractor is entitled to extra compensation due to delrys caused by failure of delivery of items to meet the schedule the Contractor has furnished the Architect for his work, rx Bo At the time for final acceptance of this Contractor's work, should 2 r A 1.. 1. . Y k x. r .e p q M-la any items concerned remain incomplete$ due to the failure of others to supply same, this Contractor shall issue a credit for the work not performed inntswith t°a;,nersoforecample- tect or else enter into an agr tion of the work at a future date. the Contractor shall provide F, Where installation is incomplete, cap-off, valve-off, Qlate covers or other items as directed by the Architect to leave the services ready for future and to place the system in acceptable condition for usage. 17,,g(Uhd;N'i'S: All Contractors shall verify measurements and shall be heel responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charges or comps s ions will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensbe and those indicated by the Plans. Any differences found ill with submitted to the Architect for consideration before p " the work. 1s. A. Supply and install all chilled water, vent. relief of and drain indicated piping eopiplate with moire ltosformtaicomplete integrated systems, on Drawings and as required B. Chilled water piping: (1) Sched%Lki 40 black steel pipe, (2) 2" and woller screwed construction, (3) 2-k" and larger all welded construction. (4) Where all weldnd construction use black butt welding ,y fittings, (5) Flanges or, welded construction shall be slip on type, (b) Fittings shall be by Tube Turn, Ladish or approved equal, (7) All 900 ells shall be lrtng radius. C, Install unions at all cc:nnef:tions to equipment and where neces- sary to allow for easy dirmmntling and service of equipment on screwed piping, - D. All piping shall be installed in order to provide proper alalel wow ance for expansion and contraction and to be thoroughly ; before erection, Dirt pockets snall be installed at bottom of all risers and to be full sizepof pipe. A 3/4" hose gate valve shall be installed each iy ~~•f t 'Grt~ ~ , rf~ I.+ ~i~,, ~ i Y ~I..,~SC .T 7rK tin `j d ,j Cy3 y y 1,y~., r ~LL*!4 . 6f '~fi~ 1 .~v °1 a~Y M-11 E. Drain Piping: Install drain piping from drain outlet of A.H. units to nearest floor drain. Piping to be schedule 40 screwed and of same size as drain outlet from equipment complete with fittings and with tee and clean out plugs at each turn in lines. Install drain piping at .'her equipment as indicated on Plans or as required for proper draining of equipment. 19. P SUPPORTS : A. All piping throughout shall be properly supported in an approved manner. 8. Hangers for pipe 2" diameter and smaller shall be of the split cast malleable iron ring type with fastening device. C. Hangers far pipe larger than 2" diameter shall be of the adjustable clevis type. D. No strap hangers will be permitted. E. Hangers shall be of a size to permit installing insulation full size through same and sW 1 be provided with protection saddles, 18 gauge sheet metal protector sleeves on chilled water piping. F. All piping shall be properly anchored to control expansion and contraction. 20. :LPE $ , £V s A. Install sleeves of Schedule 40 pipe in walls and floors where required. Sleeves shall be properly set in walls and shall be 4" larger in diameter than piping to pass through. Length of sleeves to match wall thickness. B. Where pipe sleeves pass through floors on fill, sleeves and piping shall be properly flashed and waterproofed to prevent moisture leakage into building. 1 21. F_ LASHINGS : A. Supply and install flashing where pipes pass through outside walls. B. Flashing shall be of 18 gauge copper properly formed to fit around pipe or insulation and shell be caulked as to make a water bight seal between pipes and building. 22. V LV£S: A. Supply and install all valves where indicated on the Plans and where rtNpAred to properly control water flag. Valves shall Lis as manufactured by Crane, Fairbanks, Jenkins, Lukenheimer, W61worth, Dezurik or approved equal. All valves shall be full lire size.-- .dill( ry Y .5 y; M-12 e H. All ate valves 2" and larger shall be equal to Crane No. 4654 O.S. & Y. iron body 125 lb, steam - 200 lb. W.O.G. for chilled water. C. All gate valves smaller than 2" shall be equal to Crane No. 428, 125 lb. steam, 200 lb. W.O.G. D. Check valves shall be equal to Crane No. 373, 125 lb, steam 200 lb. W.O.G. E. All Globe valves 2" and larger shall be equal to Crane No. 351 Iron body, brass trbimed,,flanged, 125 lb. steam. 1 F. All Globe valves smaller than 2" shall be equal to Crane No. 7, 150 lb, steam, 300 lb. W.O.G. G. Drain valves shall be equal to Crane No. S6, 3/4" diameter. N. Dezurik valves 4" dia. and smaller shall be Fig. No. 499. Dezurik valves 5" dia. and larger shall be Fig. No. 118F/604 w.g. 23. PrPS. Air Vents - Chilled Water Piping Systems: (1) The top of each water supply riser and other points indicated on Plans and as required for removal of air from system, shall be automatically vented in an approved manner by means of a vent valve, with the drain from these vents connected to the nearest drain line with Type L copper tubing and fittings. ' (2) Vent shall be equal to Crane No. 977. 24. STRAINERS: A. Supply and install ahead of each control valvesetrainers as manu- factured by Crane, Walworth, Leslie or approved equal. r B. Strainer shall be equal to Crane No. 989-~ for 2-#" diameter and larger and No. 988-t" diameter and smaller Iron Body Y- pattern. Strainers .;hall be full line size and shall be selected for law pressure drop at 100% flow, C, Install Globe stop valve on strainer blow off for cleaning screen. Sera?n shall be 20 r.+esh, stainless steel, 25. GAUGES AND GAUGE CONNECTIOt4S : A. Install where indicated on plans and at all of the following` .tu :lr':.y,:'e'-.ii3Ab_.91[d°3.i'.+r,• MEN ilk 17 fit fit` ` M-13 r. locations: Y: (1) Inlet and outlet of all coils. B. Gauges shall be installed complete with cocks equal to Crane No. 712. C. Gauges shall be equal to Weksler No. 900 and shall have suitable scale. r: ,f D. Gauges shall be as manufactured by Wekslers, Ashcroft, U. S. Gauge or approved equal. 26. TF RMTER AND TITER gMTER WSLIS: A. Install where indicated on Plans and at all of the following locations: (1) Inlet and outlet of all coils. ; B. Thermoneter shall be installed complete with separable socket equal to Weksler No. B-32. C. Thermameter shall be equal to Weksler Type 103 or 113. 4 D. Thermometers shall be as manufactured by Weksler, Trerice, U. S. Gauge or approved equal, 27. DF : A. Supply and install drain valves where shown on Plans a:..1 at all low points in piping systems to facilitate easy and complete draining of oystems. 8. Valves shall be 3/4" hose type ecpxal to Crane No. 56. ` 28. OPERATING INSTEXT'IONS AND FINAL DRAWINGS; A. The air conditioning Contractor shall ibirn over to the Owner, with his request for final payment, a brochure containing the follow- ing information and drawings: (1) Warranties and guarantees and manufacturers' directions shipped with the equipment on equipment and/or materials covered by the Contract, ~.W 1 r, a;3C e , tf °t'a'.(y'q. e y •:~.A' 4,e `j F r,.. w,', M .y ~~,Yr a yqF." i r y` ,iL ,~F { `•''f /a i'~(. r 1~ Y H.. r M-14 (2) Approved Drawings including wiring diagrams, control diagrams, etc. on all equipment. (3) Approved SJ,op Drawings of all systems, including field prepared Drawings for piping layout and installation. (4) Framed operating instructions (basic steps). + (5) Any and all other data and/or drawings required during construction. (6) As-built plans, complete. One set of reproducible drawings on cloth and one set of blueprints. (7) Repair parts listed on all major items of equipment. B. All the above data and information shall be accumulated during progress of ,fob, retained by the Sub-contractor in neat form and turned over to the Owner in a suitable package folder. E 29. CMTM AND PA?+~}IING: The cost of any cutting and patching required by this Contractor during construction or within the guarantee period shall be borne by this Contractor. 30. FEQU1ftK T FOJMA_, TIM : A. Supply and install concrete foundations below equipment as shown on Plans or as required to properly support all equipment. B. Concrete foundations under all equipment shall be a mini.-.Mm 4" high, 611 wider than equipment base and 6" longer than eqipment base. 31,. PAINTING: A. Painting work included under this Contract includes the painting of the following: (1) All equipment, piping, pipe insulation, etc. located in the mechanical equipment rooms. (2) Pipe insulation located in chases. (3) Under floor and underground piping before insulation is installed. r B. The canvas jacketed pipe covering shall be given one chat of blue sizing and two coats of lend and oil paint before the bands are installed. ^~fi• t'~. ~T l i~",vk fl a's`( i M 1.~ A ~ ✓ Y y a~ T ~`k ~ k T y ,,77 q. •v 1. a y. a.~ y ^c i F 3 .V, Mi~lb C. All pipe, pipe hangers and other work not specifically otherwise called for herein, shall be painted one prime coat, two coats of lead and oil paint. Paint and used D. Paint Prattsa~alLambertsoraequaltand shall be mixed Pittsburg Company, , as directed by the manufacturer. ` E. All concealed pipe within the buildings shall be identifiel by Minnesota Mining and Mfg. Co., Scotch tape colored and lettered name strips and arrows indicating flow direction. Identification of piping in the Equipment Room shall, be done by color coding as obtained from Architect. F. Obtain approved color schedule from Architect. by use surfaces andascalemetal rusthave G. thor~hldcleanedchilled ofagreasei,idirt,shall thoroughly metal brush and scrapers. 32. S Z h__.t A. Supply starters for the following equipment and hand over to Electrical Contractor for Installation: (1) Air handling units. (2) Exhaust fans. B: Starters for motors 1 H.P. and above shall be combination line x starters suitable for 440 volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle operation in NEMA type 1 enclosure. Starters Shall be complete with red running light, start.•stop push buttons, 2 spare interlocks and 440 V to 120V contrcl transformer and 01L protection on all 3 phases. Size shall be as required for motor H.P. C. Starters shall be General Electric, Westinghouse, Allis Chalmers or approved equal.. D. Starters for fractional H. P. motors shall be single pole, single throw switch with thermal overloads to suit moaoorr H.P. A'120 volt, - single phase, 60 cycle, ivory toggle hanille light. R. Starters shall be Arrow Hart, Allen Bradley or approved equal. 33. MMV)RS : A. Supply all motors required to drive equipment specified. 04 B. Install motors as required for proper slig.•ment and operation. ni R >j M-16 C. Motors shall be suitable for across the line starting and shall be as manufactured by General Electric. Reliance, Westinghouse, Allis Chalmers or approved equa3. Motors shall be manufactured in accordance with A.I.E.E. and N.E.M.A. standards. 3 D. Motors shall be open drip proof general purpose for indoor use and superseal for outdoor use. E. Motors for I HP and above shall be for operation with 440 volt 3 phase, 60 cycle. F. Motors for less than 1 HP shall be for operation with 120 volt, single phase, 60 cycle unless otherwise noted. i G. Maximum R.P.M. 1800. 34. , [,UTIO PIPING: A. Supply and install all insulation and material required to completely insulate chided water piping insulated on Mans and as required to form a complete system. B. Insulation shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville, Pitts- burgh Plate Glass Co., Philip Carey Manufacturing Co., Owens Corning or approved equal. C. General: (1) Insulation shall be applied with all joints carefully fitted to eliminate voidn, Where voids tend to occur, insulati,in shall be refitted or replaced. (2) The application of insulation in the field shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Vigineer. No section of insulated pipe in trenches shall be backfillea Dior to the Engineer's approval. (3) Tho utmost care is to be taken to ensure that the installed insulated pipe system is of the best possible workmanship. Any section of insulation which becomes damaged whatever the cause, is to be cut out and replaced. D. Chilled Water Piping (Inside Building): (1) To be covered equal to 1-°g" thick Fiberglas pipe covering with white flame retardant: vapor barrier jacket. Longitudinal joints to have jacket overlap coated witij vapor ~.arrier a adhesive. End joints to to coated with adheeive, firmly 1 butted and covered with a 4" wide strip of jacket material haavily coated with vapor barrier cement of the same color.', as the jacket. Adhesive shall be equal to Bondmaster 1218, 4 ~jO ~ --ir*~ ; .ya 1. t sl+ •..k L• M • 4 M-17 (2) Fittings and valvols to be covered with mitred pipe insula- tion or molded fittings to the same thickness as adjacent piping. (3) Smooth out irregularities with asbestos finishing cement. (4) Pipe, fitting3 and valves to be finished with 8 ounce can- vas, adhered with "Arabol" Lagging Adhesive, applied by dipping canvas and completely impregnating with adhesive. (5) At all pipe supports, a block of Wolmanized Yellow Pine of height and width equal to the thickness of the pipe insulation and at least 641 long shall be inserted into the 'nsulation. E. Chilled Water Piping (Underground): (1) All underground chilled water piping indicated shall be insulated as follows: (a) Insulate piping with Foamglas cellular glass insu- lation as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning. Insu- late 2" thick for piping 6" dia. and larger, 1k" thick for piping 511 dia. and smaller. Foamglas in two foot lengths to be factory wrapped in half sections with asphalt impregnated glasscloth, with three inch end and side la;e. (b) Insulation to be applied with joints staggered and tightly butted. Joints to be sealed with a 1/411 caulking gun bead applied 1/2" from the outside edge of the joint. Joint sealer to be Pittsburgh Corning Pittcote 300. (c) Insulation to be tightly secured in place with bands of 1/2" wide by 0.02011 thick galvanized steel. Bands to be applied 1211 on centers, 611 from each joint. (d) The fl;ctory-wrap laps are to be sealed down with Pittcote 300. (e) To the surface of the factory applied wrap, brush or glove a coat of weatharnrcnfing to a minimum thickness of 1/16". t (f) While tacky, apply a layer of 1211 wide reinforcing membrane (impregnated 10 x 10 Glasfab). Membrane to be spirally wrapped, wrinkle free with a continu- our 3" lap. (g) Finally brush or glove a uniform coat of Pittcote M-18 300-1/8" thick with a smooth unbroken surface and allow to dry , minimum of five days prior to back- filling. No reinforcing membrane shall be visible on the finished surface. 35. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PIPING: A. Install underground chilled water piping as follows; I~ (1) Excavate trench to width, depth and grade as shown on clans. (2) Lay clean sand in the trench and compact to a depth of four inches. (3) Install piping on blocks to allow insulators' clearance below for proper installation of insulation. (4) On completion of pipe welding pressure test to 1~..n p.s.i.g. for 8 hours with no pressure loss. (5) After insulation is complete remove blocks lowering piping onto sand bed. (6) Where blocks are removed, provide bell holes to allow for proper completion of insulation of piping. (7) After completion of insulation backfill trench with sand to four inches above Insulated pipes, tamping being done with care to avoid damage to insulation. (8) backfill with rock free soil for next 12". (9) Complete backfill with available fill to finish grade. 8. Supply and Instal, anchors as indicated on drFwings. ' C. Where high points occuz- in lines supply and install vent lines with valves inside 36" VIA concrete pipe section. D. During installation pipe Pnds shall be temporarily plugged or capped to prevent ingy,ess of dirt. E. Where piping passes at shallow depth under roadways subjected to heavy traffic, it may be decided to encase the pipes in concrete instead of backfilling With sand as described above. W sere such situations appear likely to arise and are not shown on Plans, the Architect is to be notified. F. Where concrete encasing is to be used, the mix is to be 1:3:5 with pea gavel. N M-19 r Concrete to be poured In three stages: (1) Up to brttm of pipes. (2) Up to center line of pipes. (3) Over pipes. louring of successive stages to be timed so than a bond is obtained between each layer. .J 36. EXHAUST FANS : A. Supply and install where shown on the dr,iwings. B. Fan to be of size and type indicated on the drawing schedule. C. Fan to be complete with screen and backdraft damper. D. Motor to be suitable for 1OV/single phase. 37. NOISE IE, ILL: All items of equipment shown on flans and in Specifications have been selected so that the anticipated noise level in the buildings from the air conditioning system will not be above 40 DBA. If the Mechwilcal Contractor wishes to make substitutions of equip- ment from that sel:.ted, he must satisfy himself and the Engineer that the noise level in the buildings will not exceed 40 DBA. a 38. BALANCING DAMPERS, A. Install butterfly type balancing dampers in each duct connection from main ducts as indicated on Drawings. Dampers shall. be 12 gauge galvanized plate with 3/8" square rods. B. Where ducts split, install 12 gauge galvanized splitter plate type damper with 3/8" square rods. Size shall be not less than 1-h times duct size. C. Where butterfly type dampers are indicated in rectangular ducts, Install 12 gauge galvanized plate with 3/8" square rod. Sized not less than 1-k times duet size, D. Where sweeping elbow take off are indicated, install 12 gauge splitter type damper with 3/8" square rods. Sized not less than 1-k times tike off duet size, E. Where balancing damper.3 are located above plaster ceiling, install Young regulator adjusting devices fastened to the ceiling furring. F. Where balancing dampers are located above a suapended acoustical n dry'. f - [iF^ -'.'h M~ " rA' _ ~',Y •y. N-20 the (removable panel) ceiling or are exposed such as in Equipment Room, install a Parker Kalon indicating Quadrant type adjusting device. 35. AIR gIM T3. GRILLES. REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS: A. Supply and Install all grilles, registers and diffusers as indi- cated on Drawings, referring to architectural reflected ceil- ing plans for exact locations. B, Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as manufactured by Tuttle and Bailey, Anemostat, Titus or approved equal, and shall be size and type as indicated on the Drawings and as specified hereafter. C. Supply air registers shall be equal to Tuttle " Bailey Type T657 N 7 D. Exhaust registers shall be equal to Tuttle and Bailey Type T117D. Finish prime coat. E. Diffusers shall be equal to Tuttle and Bailey Type DE for acoustic tile ceilings and Type DF for plaster type ceili.Ws complete with TF grid and No. 4 damper. Finish prim coat. F. Return air registers shall be equal to Tuttle and Bailey type TLVD. Finish prime coat. G. Where registers are installed in take off boots, install air flow regulators equal to Tuttle and Bailey Vectrols. 40. ACCESS DWRSI: A. Where access doors are shown on Drawings or where required to properly service equipment, install double thickness of panel construction (galvanized) with thick rigid insulation between panels, completely equipped with rugged mounting frame and all necessary hardware including felt gasket, hinges and double acting handles. 8. Doors on suction aide of fan to open out and on discharge side of fan to open in. 41. FLUIBIE CONNECTIONS : A. Ducting: (1) Install where shown on Drawings at suction and discharge ducts of air handling units and fens. (2) Connections to be canvas reinforced Neoprene 6" long, n *1• t ~ rl.. a ~.1 • ~ , 4 i i M-21 installed in 1-V x 1-~" x 3/16" angle iron companion flanges at unit suction and 11' x 1" x 1/8" companion flanges at unit discharges. 8. Piping: ' (1) Install flexible pipe connections in all pipes where indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations: a. At inlet and outlet of coils. (2) Connections shall be as, manufactured by Garlock Pacldng Company, Korfwid, Finn or approved equal (3) Connections to be equal to Garlock Packing Company spool type expansion joints full size of pipes. Joints shall be factory fabricated with pipe flanges at each end and installed to eliminate unit vibration being transmitted to piping. Piping to be supported in suw:h manner s3 to avoid excessive movement at connection. Chilled water service 450F. - 100 lbs, per square inch working pressure. i 42. ,BALAMIRG.' A. Upon completion of the air conditioning water piping system ' installation and at a time designated by the Architects, tests shall be made of all water piping. Water piping shall be tested hydrostatically and proved tight under a gauge pressure of 100 psi working pressure. B. After the air conditioning system has been completed and before the system is accepted, capacity and general operating tests on the sit- conditioning system shall be conducted by a competent and experienced Engineer for the Air Conditioning Contractor and the tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities of the various pieces of equipment. A direct reading velocity instrument that has been recently tested and calibrated shall be used to show that the air flow has been so regulated as to give the required cubic feet of air per minute for each supply and exhaust opening. C. The room air quantities (CFM) shown on the Plans are intended as a guide to the preliminary balancing of the air distribution . systems. Further adjustments necessitated by heat losses or gains within duets or variation in system construction shall be 1 performed by this design load as are obtainable, for uniforu temperature, by readjusting the air quantities as required so that all areas on the same equipment are at the same s temperature, as controlled by the thermostat for same. 1 1jr jikli-k~' kg t'- M-22 D. The tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architects or Their authorized representative. C. , The general operating test shall cove: a per, +od a All . . three days and shall demonstrate that the entire equipnenr is functioning in accordance with the Specifications and to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. The Subcontractor shall furnish all equipment, instruments and personnel required for the tests and the Owner will furnish the fuel, water and electri- l city. 43. INSULATION - DUCTING: A. Supply ind install all insulation required to insulate all fresh air, supply air ducting and plenums indicated on Drawings and as required to provide a complete system. B. Insulation shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville, Owens Corning, Pittsburg Plate Glass Co., Philip Carey Mfg. Co. or j approved equal. C. Refer to Ducting Section of Specifications for extent of internal duct insulation required. D. W.ct Insulation (Internal) (1) All supply air ducting and all fresh air ducting avid casings requiring internal insulation shall be insulated internally equal to Microbar Dual Fiber Glass duct liner 1" thickness as manufactured by Johns Manville. (2) Ducts to be lined by adhering liner with B,njamin Foster No. 82_18 Quick Tack Rubber Base Cement. Lining to be ' attached to sheet before folding in brake. The coated side of liner is to face the air stream. Exposed edges ' to be coated with above adhesive. (3) In addition to its adhesive,,liner shall be secured by sheet by mechanical fasteners of welded pin type at approximately 12" centers throughout on all side's of the duct. 44. DUCTING: A. Supply and install all supply air, free!-, air and exhaust ducting indicated on the Drawings and as required to form a complete system. s B. All supply air, fresh air ducting shall be insulated internally. C. All return air ducting shall be insulated internally for acous- w' M-23 tical reasons. D. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings allow for internal insula- tion where applicable and are actual duct sizes required. E. Refer to insulation section for insulation. F. Ducting shall be constructed of new clean galvanized prime grade copper bearing sheets of the following gauges: Up to 12" Largest Duct Dimension 26 U.S.STD.GA. 12" to 30" Largest Duct Dimension 24 U.S.STD.GA. 31" to 60" Largest Duct Dimension 22 U.S.STD.GA. 60" to 90" Largest Duct Dimension 20 U.S.STD.GA. G. Casings and plenum chambers shall be of 18 gauge galvanized sheet plate properly stiffened and braced with 1-t" x 1-4" x 1/811 angle iron and shall be of internal standing seam zonstruction. H. Type of duct construction shall be as recommended by A.S.H.R.A.E. Guide, latest edition. 1. All panels 12" and larger shall be cross broken for rigidity. a J. All square elbows shall have installed in them double thickness, duct turns. K. All ducting shall be sealed airtight with an approved sealer compound and 2" wide strip adhesive duet tape. L. Horizontal ducting shall be supported from structure above on a maximum of 8 feet 0 inches center with hangers as follaos: (1) 36" and smaller - 18 gauge galvanized metal strips (no perforated strips allowed). Strip to be wrapped around duct and securely fastened to duct by sheet metal screws and securely fastened to structure above in an approved manner. 1 (2) 60" lot-goat dimension 1" x 1/811 flat bar secured as in (1) above. (3) 61" and larger - trapeze type hanger of 1-J" x x 1/8" angle iron with 3/8" diameter rods securely fastened from structure above in an approved manner. M. Vertical ducts in duct chases shall be supported at each floor and at mid-point between floors with 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle iron securely fastened to ducts and structure in an approved manner. h, . M-24 45. HW]61 HC EQUIPMEAR: A. Supply and install air handling units of size, capacity and type as specified herein and as indicated on Drawings. 8. Air handling equipment shall be as manufactured by Carrier, Trane, or Buffalo, C, Equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on Trane. D, All units shall be factory built complete as follows: r (1) Factory Insulated fan section. (2) Factory insulated coil section with insulated drip pan and drain outlet connection, (3) Cooling coils for chilled water, with copper tubes and aluminum final 8 fins/ins, maximum air velocity S00 ft,/min, Max p.d. 10 ft. of water, Min, 8 rows, w. (4) Filter section complete with cleanable filters unless otherwise noted, (5) V-belt drive with adjustable pitch pulleys and belt guard, (6) Vibration isolators... (r) Open general purpose motor, W40 v/ 3 phase/60 cycle, 1800 R,P.M. (8) Starter 46. GUARANTEE: A. Contractor shall guarantee all items of workmanship, materials and equipment covered under the Plans and these Specifications against defects for a period of at least one year after the date of final acceptance and he shall furnish, free of cost to the Owner, all materials and labor necessary in the fulfilling of this guarantee, 47•0 LD-I•~FICATI0N3: A. Manufacturers' names are mentioned in these specifications to establish a standard of quality and construction and it is not intended to exclude the product of any reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the commercial production of specific equipment, provided all essential requirements of the specifi- 1 x M-25 cation relative to material, capacity and performance are met. Any substitutions must be submitted in ample time for approval, B. sWhere a base hall includebsuchsInphisfbidlwithaaneaddoor the Contractor equipment of any other manufacturer. C. The following shall be used as a basis for contract awards: Pipe Fittings Tube Turns, Ladish Pipe Supports Crane, Grinnell Valves Crane, Fairbanks, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, Walworth, Dezurik Vents Crane, Lunkenheimer Strainers Crane, Walworth, Leslie Gauges Weksler, Ashcroft, U.S.Gauge r` Thermometers Weksler, `i`rerice, U.S.Gauge Drain Valves Crane, Walworth, Jenkins Grilles, Registers, Diffusers Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat Titus Starters Westinghouse, G.E., Arrow Hart, Square "D", Allen Bradley Motors Westinghouse, Reliance, G.E. Vibration Eliminators Vibration ElWnator Co., Korfund, Vibration Mountings, Inc. Flexible Ducting Wiremold, Flexible Tubing Corp. Insulation (inside building) Johns Manville, Pittsburg Plate Glass Co., Philip Carey Manu. Co., Owens Corning, Pittsburg Corning insulation (underground) Foamglass by Pittsburg Corning Insulation Ducting Johno Manville, Owens Corning, Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., Philip Carey Exhaust Fans Trane, Buffalo, Carrier, American Standard z Air Handling Equipment Trane, Buffalo, Carrier Controls Johnson Service Co. (Base Bid) Duct Heaters Chromalox, Trane, Electromode t Baseboard Heaters Chromalox, Electromode f M-26 48. DUCT HEATERS: A. Provide and install duct heaters where indicated on the Drawings. B. Heaters to be Installed in an approved manner. C. Install heater in a duct section manufactured from minimum of 18 gauge sheet steel, 48" long. D. Do not internally insulate the duct heater section of duct. Insulate externally with 1" thick fiberglass with foil Jacket, E. Support duct heater section of duct with trapeze type hangers z as required for size and weight of units. Minimum angle iron - IV x W x 3/16" ahead and after heater. F. Duct heater shall be equal to Chromalox type FFT as scheduled on Drawings and as follows: (1) Heaters supplied under this specification shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear the appropriate UL label. ' (2) All frame-members, terminal-box, terminal-box cover, splice box and similar associated sheet metal parts shall be of heavy-gauge, die formed steel with integral corrosion-resisting coating. Assembly into a rigid structure shall be by means of spot welding of threaded fastenings. (3) Heating banks shall be composed of individually flange- mounted Fintube heating elements having highest quality alloy coiled reaiators centered within the tubes and embedded to con,;7acted insulating refractory material. 49. BASEBOARD HEATERS: A. Furnish and install baseboard heaters where indicated on the Drawings. B. Baseboard heaters shall be equal to Chromalox type WB-4L Prim Trim. C. Each "A" section indicated is 48" long and rated 400 watts at 277 volts. 5G. ROOF FRESH AIR INTAKES: A. Provide and install fresh air intakes on the roof where fi M-27 Indicated. 'r B. Intakes shall be equal to "American Way" typf VM-P-2971 self flashing of size indicated, alumirnm construction, C. Provide complete with birdscreeu. a 51. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: A. General Furnish and install a pneumatic temperature control system as manufactured by Johnson Service Company, Honeywell, Inc., or Powers Regulator Company. This system shall be complete with thermostats, valves, automatic dampers, dLmper operators, switches, panels, air piping and all other equipment and accessories necessary for the operation of this system in accordance with the intent of these sequences of equipment operation. All controls &id accessories shall be furnished and installed by the control manufacturer, with the excep- tion of valve bodies and automatic dampers, which shall be installed by the mechanical contractor. The temperature control manufacturer shall guarantee the equipment and the operation of the system, performing any needed service to the system for a period of one year from the date of job com- pletion at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Compressed Air Supply fit An air compressor sized to operate no Moore than 50% of the time shall be provided. This compressor shall be mounted on an { air vessel having an ASME rating for 160 prig operating pressure and shall be of sufficient size to prevent the air compressor from starting more than six times per hour while operating on a 15 psig tsnk pressure differential. This compressor shall be provided with a filter station, pressure reducing valve, relief valve, operating pressure switches, magnetic motor starter, belt guard and high and low pressure indicating gauges. A refrigerated air dryer capable of reducing the dew point of the compressed air at 20 lbs. per square inch to 5oF shall also be provided. This unit shall be located between the air compressor tank and the filter and pressure reducing valve station, and a three valve bypass shall be provided for this unit to allow for servicing of this unit without affecting the operation of 'he control system. C. Electric Wi•:ing All electric wiring in conjunction with the automatic temperature control system shall be provided by the electrical contractor under the electrical section of these Specifications. r M-28 n D. ConVreaaed Air Piping All compressed air piping for the temperature control system shall be hard drawn copper tubing in exposed a..-eas and shall be soft drawn or plastic in concealed areas accessible for replacement. Soft copper shall be utilized where plastic tubing is subject to damage by heat from electric lights, electric heating coils, or other heat sources. On the com- pletion of the piping installation, the entire r,ir system shall be tested under 30 paig air pressure for a period of 24 hours with a pressure drop not to exceed 3 paig. E. Valves ' Automatic control valves for chilled water coils shall be of the two-way normally closed body pattern complete with pilot positioner, self-adjusting packing, equal percentage ' modulating plug, renewable composition disc, screw wed Valve seat ring and shall have a body ratng of 150 psi. operators shall be of adequate size to provide a 100 paig close trate of l flow valve at a pressure drop not t~ot exprovide the designed 7 paig. F. Dampers Automatic dampers for fresh air, return air and relief air applications shall be Burnished with vsizes con- framesd shall locatbens, r, as acted on the galvanized sheet steel formed into structed of 13 gauge g channels with corner bracketed braces. Blades shall be single constructed of double 22 gauge galvanized 16 gauge steel and all mating surfaces shall be provided with butyl rubber seals, such that actual aair leeakage0 ft. ,00 less than 1% of full open ratedfllo4, water column static per minute approach velocity pressure. Maximum blade width shall be 6" and maximum blade length between bearings should be 48". G. Room Thermostats All room thermostats shall be of the single acting type and 11 1' shall be equipped with pneumatic feedback, adjustable sensi- tivity, pneumatic amplifying relays, and bimetallic sensing elements. In plastered areas, each th?rmostat shall be mounted on a brass pipehead with copper tubing leads securely mounted to the wall by means of a plaster ground plate. Room thermostat covers shall be plain cased without thermometers. y., M-29 H. Limit Controls Each air unit shall be provided with a high limit thermostat in the return air which shall de-energize the air unit fan motor anytime its sensed temperature is 125 or above. Each unit shall also be furnished a low limit thermostat with a 20' element serpentined across the cooling coil discharge, which shall de-energize the air unit fan anytime the tempera- ture sensed across any 1' section of this sensing element drops below 450. Both of the above units shall be manually reset and they shall be completely installed and wired by the job electrical contractor. I. Receiver Controllers Where receiver controllers are required by the system sequence of operation, they shall be provided complete with temperature indication gauges for temperature Inputs, and an output pressure gauge. Each unit shall be complete with ratio adjustment, sensitivity adjustment and set point adjustment. It shall be the control contractor's responsi- bility to insure that the ranges of these adjustments are J suitable for stable control for the sequenceR of operation specified. J. Equipment Room Panels L' All control equipment other than damper operators, valves and sensing elements, shall be installed in totally enclosed f panels, factory piped and wired to pneumatic and electric terminal strips. All equipment inside the panels shall be labeled with permanent type nameplates in the same manner as appear on "as built" control diagrams for this project. Two copies of the "as built" diagrams plus descriptive literature for all control equipment utilized in this system shall be left inside an instruction pocket located on the back side of the front of the door to this panel. All equip- ment and information inside this panel shall be secured by door latch with a lock and removable key. ' K. Sequence of Operat: un (1) Air Units No. 1, 2, 6 and 8 (and Unit No. 9 - Alt. No. 1) Each zone temperature Al b,a maintained by P. room thermostat controlling a zone mixing damper and a grogram switch serving the electric reheat coil associatzd with this zone in sequence to maintain the desired zone temperature. A high limit manuall.y ic_etable thermostat 9 I Y ~ •;Z $ ^~,ra'p " '.yr'.. fr P;L, i i .,rd X 4 i H-30 with sensing element located tidjacent to the heater coil section, shall cause the program. switch to de- energize all heating circuits whenever th temperature sensed by this thermostat rises above 150u. This program switch shall also cause all heater circuits to be de-energized whenever there is no air flow through the heater coil. The zone thermostat requiring the most k cooling shall reset a cold deck receiver controller such that when this zone mixing damper is completely closed to cooling, the cold deck temperature shall be 76"r. As this zone damper motor throttles to the fully open to cooling position, the set point of the sold deck controller shall be linearly reduced to 50 F. The cold deck receiver controller shah modulate the outdoor air, return air and relief air damper in sequence with the two-way valve on the cooling coil to maintain the desired cold deck temperature. In this cycle, the ventilation cycle uhwill be fully utilized before the normally closed cooling coil valve allows chit/ ed water flow through the cooling coil. Each ventilation cycle shall be provided with an adjustable minimum position switch and the ventilation cycle shall be returned to this minimum position any time the outdoor air temperature rises above 72 . Whenever the unit fan is de-energized, all ventilation cycle dampers shall return to their minimum positions, and fresh air damper shall close. (2) A. C. Units No. I find 4 The control of these units .hall he thu• same as for the multizone unit, with the exception that i.~kere is no zone mixing dampers and the zone thermostat requir.,mg the most cooling will reset the fan discharge receiver controller and the other zone will utilize a program switch on its reheat coil to maintain the desired area temperature. (3) A. C. Unite No. 5 and 7 The control of these units shall be the same as described for air units No. 3 and 4, with the exception that the room thermostat will reset a receiver controller sensing fan discharge temperature. This receiver con- troller shall then mrodulate, in sequence, a program switch on the reheat coil, a ventilation cycle, and a normally closed valve on the cooling coil in sequence to maintain the desired temperaturg. When the temperature at the recta thermostat is 1 Below its set point, the fan discharge shall be 130 F and when ~r IMES E x« ~ ♦ ;haw i , M-31 the temperature at the raarn thermostat is 1° above ~ Its set point, the fan discharge temperature is 55°. (4) Baseboard radiation Control A thermostat sensing the outdoor air temperature shall energize contactor(s) serving the baseboard heaters any time the outdoor air temperature drops below 40°F. (adjustable). 52. A-LTERNATFw,,NO. Z - E.O.C. AREA: A. Provide a separate price for that part of the building entitled E.C,.C, as shown on Drawing No. MB-3 and as follows: (1) Refer to items 1 thru 51 for Specifications of equip- n.ant shown. (2) Material Specifications for Items not listed above but required for the E.O.C. area are as follows: a. Air cooled condenser - Compressor chiller pf,ckages (1) Provide and install a package air cooled condenser on the roof over E.O.C. area where sham. Condenser shall be equal to Trane Model CA-2508 and shall be provided complete as catalogued. (2) Provide and install a packaged chiller com- pressor in equipment room where shown. Chiller package shi311 be equal to Trane Model No. CG20B and shall he provided complete as catalogued. Provide all necessary controls, to provide water at 440F. (3) Provide and install suction and discharge refrigerant piping of size recommended by supplier of equipment. Install as recommended by supplier of equipment complete with all valves, fittings, etc. (4) Piping shall be copper Type "L" with wrought copper fittings and hot tinned finish. Install complete with expansion valves, solenoid valves, strainers, sight glasses and shut 'off Valves,etc. (5) Refrigerant suction piping shall be insulated M-32 ' with 3/4" thick "Armstrong Armaflex" P.C. seal butt end joints and fitting joints with 520 adhesive. Apply Armstrong Armaflex finish on outdoor piping. (b) Equipment shall be suitable for ope?.ation with 208V - 3 phase - 60 cycle power. (7) Equipment by Carrier or Worthington will be considered as equal providing capacity, etc, to equal. (8) Install complete with refrigerant, oil, etc. to form a complete package to provide chilled water. b. Chilled Water Pump N (1) Provide and install a chilled water pump of size and type indicated on the Drawings. Pump to be installed in conjunction with above chiller. r~ f ~y k 1 ' 1 ELECTRICAL E-1 1 Item _ Pane 1. CONTRACT CONDITIONS E-3 ' 2. INTENT OF THE SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS E-3 3. GUARANTEE E-4 4. APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT E-4 5. CODES, ORDINANCES AND UTILITY REQUIREMENTS E-5 6. QUALITY OF WORK E-5 ' 7. COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES E-6 8. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS E-6 9. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION £-6 10. CUTTING AND PATCHING E-6 11. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING E-7 12. SAFETY GUARDS E-7 13. DRAWINGS E-7 ' 14. FEES AND PERMITS E-7 ' 15. SHOP DRAWINGS E-7 16. PAINTING E-8 ' 17. CLEAN-UP A44D TEST E-8 1 18. TELEPHOM SYSTEM E-8 19. GROUNDING E-9 E-2 ELECTRICAL Item Pa e 20. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS E-9 ' 21. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS E-9 22. OUTLET BOXES E-12 23. PULL BOXES, WIREWAYS AND JUNCTION BOXES £-13 24. WIRING AND CONNECTORS E-14 25. WIRING DEVICES E-16 26. COVER PLATES E-17 27. CABINETS E-18 28. LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS E-18 29. MAIN SWITCHBOARD E-20 30. DISCONNECT SWITCHES E-22 ' 31. FUSES E-22 32. TRANSFORMERS E-23 33. LIGHTING FIXTURES E-24 34. CONTACTORS £-24 35. DVJMERS E-25 36. TIME CLOCK/PHDTOELECTRIC CONTROL E-25 37. CLOCKS E-25 38. MUSIC SOUND SYSTEM E-2S 39. COURTROOM SOUND SYSTEM E-26 40. AUTOMOBILE ROAD SIGNAL E-26 ' 41. ALTERNATE NO. 1 - E. 0. Co AREA E-26 i E-3 ELECTRICAL WORK I~ 1. CONTRACT CONDITIONS: A. The Electrical Sub-contractor, hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, shall be bound to the Prime Contractor by the terms of the General Contract Agreement, the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions, the Drawings and Specifications and to assume toward him all the obligations and responsibilities that he, by those documents, assumes toward the Owner. The Electrical Specifications and Drawings shall be made a part of the Contract Documents. B. Certain paragraphs included in this section are supplemental to similar paragraphs in the General Conditions, the Supplemental General Conditions and the Special Conditions of the General Contract; they are not intended to supersede these paragraphs. ' Should any conflict exist, the matter shall be referred to the Owner's Representative for clarification prior to the bid opening. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, superintendence, material, equipment and operations necessary to provide for a complete and workable electrical system as defined in the Speci- fications and Drawings. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for visiting the site and checking the existing conditions. He shall also familiarize him- self with the Drawings and Specifications of work in other sections of the Prime Contract so as to determine the scope of this work and also to inform himself of work which he is to ' do directly or to assist in its completion. 2. INTENT OF THE SPECIFICATIONS an DRAWINGS: A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings that upon completion and testing of the electrical work the entire electrical system shall be ccxnplete and shall be in a finished, workable condition. This condition shall fulfill the requirements for the satisfactory operation of the facility in the manner intended. Any discrepancies or emissions which might prevent such workability shall be reported by the Contractor with his bid. B. All work that may be called for in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings or shown on the Drawings and not called for in the Specifications, shall be performed by the Contractor as if described in both and should any work be required which is not denoted in the Specifications of Drawings, but which is nevertheless necessary for the proper carrying out of the in- tent thereof, the Contractor shall perform all such work as fully as if it were particularly described. E-4 C. The use of the words "provide", "Install", "set". "connect" , "circuit", and the like shall be taken to mean that the Contractor shall both furnish the intended items of material or equipment and perform a:l necessary work for their Installa- ' tion unless explicitly stated that the Contractor shall only furnish or shall only install the intended items of material or equipment. 3. GUS The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the project by the Owner from the Prime Contractor. Any defects due to faulty material, equipment, methods of installa- tion or workmanship within the period shall be replaced or re- paired by the Contractor promptly upon notiee of the Owner and at the entire expense of the Contractor. 4. APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT: A. All materials and equipment shall conform to the requirements ' of the Contract Documents. They shall be new, free from defects of any character and they shall conform with standards of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. In every case where such a standard has been establiahed and shall be so labeled. r B. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is Identi- fied on the plans or in the specifications by reference to ' manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade names, catalogue numbers, etc., it is intended merely to estoblish a standard and any material, article or equipment of other manufacturers ' and vendors which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable provided the material, article or equipment so proposed is,in the opinion of the Arehitect/Engineer, of equal substance and 1 function. It shall not be purchased or installed by the Con- tractor without the Architect/Engineer's written approval. C. The details on the Drawings and the requirements of the Specifications shall be based on first listed Item of equip- ment or material. If the Contracto desired to furnish any of the other listed items of equipment or material other than that listed first In the Specifications, the Contractor alone shall be responsible for the correct function, operation and accommodation of the other listed items of equipment or materials. In the event of misfits, or changes in the work required, either in this section or other sections of the Contract, the Contractor alone shall bear all costs in con- junction with all changes arising out of the use of other listed items of equipment or material. i E-s D. The Contractor shall submit for approval five copies of submittal ' data as soon as practical after award of the Contract. The subm mittal data shall include manufacturers' names, catalog numbers and descriptive information. Should this submittal for approval ' not be received within twenty-one days after the award of the Contract, the equipment, article or material specified herein shall be furnished. The Contractor's submittal shall be made through the Prime Contractor to the Owner's Representative. r E. In the event the Contractor submits for approval any equipment,' article or material that is not in conformity with the Specifi- cations, or Drawings, the Owner's Representative reserves the right to reject the submittal and in this case, the Contractor shall submit for approval other equipment, articles or materials which is in conformity with the Specifications or Drawings. 5. CODES. ORDINANCES AND UTILJTXRMUIUMMS: A. The installation of the electrical system shall conform to the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and shall comply with the latest edition of the National Electrical ' Code as well as with local and state codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. 84 Codes having jurisdiction over the work shall serve as minimum requirements but, in areas where there are no codes having juriediction, then the minimum requirements shall be set by the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. If Specifics- ' tions and Drawings show requirements that are in excess of the codes, then the Specifications and Drawings shall be followed. Should there be any conflicts between the Specifications and ' the Drawings and the codes having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall report these with his bid. Any modifications required by the inspecting authority shall be made by the Contractor without coat to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall determine the requirements for the utility services as set by the utilities that will serve the facility and he shall pay for and perform all work as required by them. 6. QJM"TY OF WORK: The work shall be executed in the beat and most workmanlike manner by qualified, careful and efficient mechanics skilled in their respective trades. The standards of work required throughout shall be of the first class only and mechanics whose work is unsatisfactory to the Owner's Representative shall be instantly dismissed from the work upon written notice from the Owner's Representative. All work must meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. ' E-6 MOpERAT_ WITH OTHER TRADES: A. The work to be done under this Section must be done in such manner that will cause the utmost cooperation with work to be done under other Sections of the Prime Contract. The mechanics shall be expected to work with other trades stn determining exact locations of outlets, conduits, fixtures and other pieces of equipment to avoid Interference with lines as re- quired to maintain proper grades and proper installation of other work. Be She Contractor shall make such progress in his work that he will not delay the work of other trades unduly. He shall furnish sufficient labor or shall work overtire to accomplish t this end if required to do so. 8. CONSTRUCTIM RMUIREMW e. A. Locations and elevations of equipment are approximate and are subject to revisions as may prove necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. Should local conditions necessitate rearrangement of equipment or should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring specs conditions other than those shown, he shall obtain the approval of the Owner's Representative. Be The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of slots, holes or openings in the building structure ' and for the correct location of inserts and conduit sleeves for equipment furnished by him. Maintenance devices and parts of equipment rewiring adjustment shall be easily accessible. 9. EQU,IRENT PROTECTION: Installed work and material and equipment stored for the job shall be protected to prevent damage. Should any work, materiel or equipment become damaged, the Contractor shall repair it to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative or shall completely replace It. 10. CUTTING AND PATCHING: Necessary drilling, cutting and patching of walls, floors, parti- tions and ceilings as required for the proper installation of the work shall be done by the Prime Contractor. This shall be done at the Contractor's expense and upon his written request. No cutting of structural work shall be permitted except with the written approval of the Owner's Representative.. 1 1 Ile EXCAVATING AND BACXFZLLING: E-7 t The Contractor shall do all excavating as required for the electrical system, Excavations shall be sheathed or braced and pumping done as may be required to protect the workmen and adjacent structures. Backfilling shall be made with the same type of dirt excavated or with an approved material and it shall be thoroughly compacted with pneumatic tampers and the backfilled soil density shall be equal to the original undisturbed soil density. 12. SAFETY GUMWS: The Contractor shall install all safety guards required to obtain certificates of inspection from the city, state and Industrial Accident Commissioners. 13. DRAWIMS : A. The Drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely ' as actual construction and work of other Sections will permit. All deviations from the Drawings as required to make the work of the Contractor conform to the facility as constructed and ' to the work of other Sections shall be made by the Contractor without any additional cost to the Owner. ' Be The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of the work and the Contractor shall consult the appropriate detail drawings for the exact location of all equipment outlets. 1 14. FEES AND PERMITS: The Contractor shall pay all taxes anf fees for permits and ' inspections ar required in his work, 15. SHOP DRAWINGS: ' A. The Contractor shall submit quintuplicate (5 copies) prints of drawings and details of electrical equipment as called for in these Specifications and as may be required by the ' Owner's Representative. Be Approval of the shop drawings by the Owner's Representative ' shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing equipment of proper dimensions, quantity and ruality nor will such approval relieve the Contractor from responsibility for ' errors of any sort in the shop drawings. C. The Contractor shall bear all costs or damages which may result from the ordering of any equipment prior to the ' approval of the shop drawings and no work shall be done until the shop drawings have been approved. In case of correction or rejection, the Contractor shall resubmit shop '.t drawings until such time as they are acceptable to the E-8 ' Owner's Representative and such procedure will not be considered as a cause for delay. After approval of shop drawings, the Contractor shall supply as many prints of the approved drawings as may be ordered. 16. PAINTING: All manufactured equipment that is to be insta.led exposed shall be factory painted by the manufacturer, unless otheratse noted. In the event that manufactured equipment is to be field painted, ' It shall be furnished by the manufacturer with a prime coat or protected by corrosion resistant metal plating. Shop4uilt or assembled equipment shall be primed and finish pain%ed with two coats of ASA #49 standard grey paint. If any equipment is to be field painted on the job site, it shall be furnished to the site with prime coat and field painted with two coats finish paint of such character as directed by the Owner's ' Representative. Concealed equipment shall be primed and painted as above when noted or when requested by the Owner'a Representative. 17. CLEAN-UP AND TEST A. The entire installation shall be cleaned up by the Contractor after he finishes his work and shall be acceptable to the t Owner's Representative. No loose parts or scraps of equip- ment shall be left on the premises. Equipment and surround- ings shall be cleaned of all stains, grease and marks that may be made during the installation. Paint scars shall be re- paired by the Contractor and the equipment brought back to first-class condition. ' Be The entire installation shall be free from grounds and short circuits. Each panel shall be tested with mains disconnected from the feeder, branches connected, and switches closed, all fixtures in place and permanently connected, lamps removed and wall switchen closed. Feeders shall be tested with the feeders disconnected from the branch circuit panels. Each individual power circuit shall be tested at the panel with the power device connected for proper operation. In no case shall the insulation be less than that specified by the N.E.C. 1a. TELEPHONE SYSTEM: 11 A. Scope ' (1) The Contractor shall install a system of empty conduit, boxes and provisions for the telephone system as shown. (2) The Contractor shall check and verify the layout with w t~ f E-9 the telephone utility serving tt.e site. He shall comply with their requirements in every respect. B. Telephone Terminal Boards & Outlets: ' (1) Telephone terminal boards shall consist of 3/4 Inch ply- wood, securely fastened to wall and painted two coats of dead black. °fr (2) Cabinets will be furnished and installed by the telephone cempany, The Contractor shall stub off telephone conduit home runs at the cabinet location. (3) Telephone wall outlets shall consist of flush mounted boxes. All boxes shall be equipped with single gang covers with single bushed hole plates of material to match the wiring device plates. 19. ; A. Adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding shall be provided in accordance with the National Electric Code and local codes and subject to the following additional G, requirements. B. The service grounds and the equipment grounds shall have their common point of connection within the metallic enclosure con- taining the main service switchgear. The equipment ground shall be made to the system neutral bus. The system neutral bus shall be effectively grounded as shown. Co The electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems shall ' be assured. Wherever expansion Joints or telescoping fittings occur, bonding shall be provided. 20. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: A. The Contractor shall determine the wiring scheme for the various mechanical systems as supplied by other divisions. He shall install such wiring as required and completely connect all devices provided by others. e~ Be Motors and miscellaneous control devices furnished by other t divisions and thrt are not integrally mounted shall be set in place. Install supports or mounting devices as required. 21. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS: A. The Contractor shall install the conduit system in all ways to give the facility the utmost degree of reliability and maintenance-free operation. The conduit shall have an appearance of having been c~:,strueted by competent workmen. ' E-10 Kinked conduit, conduit inadequately protected or swabbed, carelessly threaded and joined do not give such reliability and maintenance-free operation and will not be accepted. B. All wiring of every deselption shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. All galvanized conduit and tubing shall be galvanized inside and outside, or Sheradized, and an additional coating of enamel on the inside and outside shall be provided. C. Conduits installed in damp or wet locations, or run under- ground, or installed in crawl spaces shall be heavy wall, ' rigid galvanized steel. All other conduit may be electrical metallic tubing in sizes not to exceed 2 inches. D. All conduits shall be run concealed from view in all areas except where otherwise indicated. F E. Exposed groups of conduits shall be run parallel with or i~ at right angles to the building walls. They shall be neatly racked. F. Conduits shall not be installed in close proximity to any steam pipes hot water pipe or other heating duct or appliance. In no case shall a conduit be run within three inches of such pipe or duct, except in crossing and such crossing shall be at least one inch from the covering of the pipe or duct crossed. G. Conduit sizes, where not specified on the Drawings, shall be such as to accommodate the number of wires to be pulled into the conduit. H. Plug each end of conduit with approved capped bushings as soon as placed to prevent filling with material. I. Conduit seals shall be installed where conduits pass from non-cooled areas into cooled areas, for example, fan plenums and cold rooms. J. All conduit ends shall be reamed out after threading and kept corked and dry during construction. All conduit shall be swabbed out before the wires are pulled in. Bends in rigid conduit or tubing shall be made with an approved bending device unless factory bends are called for. K. Metallic-flexible conduit shall be used to extend conduit equip connections to motors, unit heaters and that may have to be removed for servicing, But, of in no ment - But no E-11 case shall the length of flexible conduit exceed 4811 for connection to any one piece of equipment. L. Neoprene jacketed flexible steel conduit shall be used for connections to motor driven equipment and motors which are ' located outdoors and when specified for use on indoor applica. tions. It shall also be used for connections to other outdoor or indoor,where indicated, appliances and devices. All Neo- prene jacketed flexible steel conduit shall be American Brass "Sealtite", type UA, or equal. 'and light grar color shall be furnished. All fittings shall be "Sealtite' or equal. r M. All empty conduit shall have a #14 galvanized steel pull wire left for later pulling of conductors. Identify each terminus of each pull device with a linen tag with complete information as to service and the location of its other terminus. N. Suspended multiple runs of conduit shall be supported at .y 10 foot maximum intervals by means of Steel City Kindorf, or equal, pipe hangers. Conduit shall be strapped to the hanger with conduit straps. I, 0. Suspended individual runs shall be supported by means of Steel City or equal, adjustable hangers. 1/211 through 2" conduit shall require 3/8" rod hangers; 2-1/2" and larger shall require L2" rod hangers. Hangers from concrete slab3 shall be made by means of a suitable hanger Insert, ' P. Strap iron hangers will not be permitted. Q. Conduit shall enter all panelboards, pull boxes, junction boxes, outlet boxes and the like straight and true. Conduit 1 installed, cocked or not plumb will not be accepted. Any work so installed shall be replaced by the Contractor. R. All conduit buried in the ground shall either be installed within a 311 envelope of concrete or shall be installed with a water- proof protective covering consisting of two coats of asphalt base paint, or wrapped with Scotch No. 50 or equal tape, half lapped. All buried conduit shall be installed at least 18 Inches below the finished grade. S. Where conduit crosses above or below expansion Joints and where other lengths of runs make it necessary, an expansion joint such as OZ type AX expansion fitting with AJ bonding Jumper, shall be installed. Where conduit crosses an expansion joint within a concrete slab, an 02 type BX expansion and deflection fitting small be installed. }a~ To All conduit shall be equipped with double locknute and steel i E-12 i body, plastic insulating bushings where such conduit enter panel boards, pull boxes, junction boxes, wireways and the like. i All conduit that enter into equipment free of the metal cabinet work and also where indicated, shall be equipped with a grounding type insulated bushing. A copper grounding coviductor shall be bonded to the cabinet framework and to the grounding lugs. U. Pipe sleeves shall be installed for all conduits that pass through concrete floors or masonry walls. Pipe sleeves shall be made of #22 gage galvanized steel. The sleeve shall be properly secured in place with approximately k" space between each sleeve and the surface of the pipe. Where conduits enter the trailding underground from outside, I.P.S. wrought iron pipe sleeves shall be provided. The space between the sleeves and the conduit shall be caulked with a suitable plastic expandible compound that will prevent entrance of moisture. V. Rigid, heavy-wall galvanized steel conduit shall be Triangle or National "Sheraduct" and E.M.T. shall be Republic "Electrunite", or approved equal. W. All rigid, heavy-wall conduit lengths shall be joined with galvanized threaded couplings. All EMT lengths shall be joined with compression type fittings such as Appleton rain and concrete tight machine steel couplings and connectors. Set screw or indentor fittings shall not be used. 22. OUTLET DOM A. Unless otherwise indicated, install at each outlet or device of whatever character, a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. All outlet boxes shall be of the proper size to accommodate the wiring or device for which function they are provided. R. Exact locations of all outlets shall be determined from the Architectural Drawings or by actual determination on the site by the Owner's Representative. Outlet locations may be modified from those shown on the Drawings to accommodate change in door swings or to clear other details that may arise from time to time. The Contractor shall check these conditions throughout the entire job and shall notify the Owner's Representative of any discrepancies that may occur before proceeding to install this work. Wall switch boxes shall be set in advance of new wall construction and shall be securely blocked in place to prevent displacement. Readjustment shall be made where re- quired for any outlets which are displaced during the operation of other trades without expense to the Owner. C. Switch boxes shall not be used as junction boxes. E-13 D. On ceiling outlets 1nvolv1n3 fixtures hanging from boxes, 3/811 no-bolt fixture studs shall be used for light loads and no-bolt fixture studs shall be used for heavy loads. E. In instances in which fixtures are hung from pipe stems, swivel hanger covers shall be used. These swivel fittings shall have cushioned mechanisms, permitting natural swinging of fixtures, such as Appleton No. 7165. F. Outlets exposed to the weather shall be malleable cast iron Crouse-Hinds "Condulets", Appleton "Unilets", or Pyle National "Pylets All such outlet boxes shall be furnished with threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Outlets exposed inside such as in equipment rooms shall conform to Article G Specification, G. All outlet boxes recessed in the construction, except as otherwise indicated, shall be made of 14 gauge steel, gal- vanized. They shall be of Raco, National, or Steel City, or approved equal manufacture and shall be of the size, type and design best suited to the purpose. All such boxes shall conform to U. L. Standard No. 514. H. Recessed boxes for lighting fixtures shall be 4" octagonal boxes. All recessed boxes for wall switches, receptacles, and communications use shall be of the 4" long type. Where wall thi:knesses and finished will permit, all such boxes shall be 4" x 4" size with proper plaster cover. Sectional type gang boxes will be permitted only where wall thicknesses do not allow the use of solid boxes. 1. Outlet box locations for fluorescent fixtures are diagramatic. The outlets shall be positioned to coincide with suspension hangers where they occur, or knockouts in fixtures on surface mounted units. J. Only one 277 volt circuit may be installed in a single wall switch box. Where more than one such circuit is to be run to a multiple wall switch location, involving different phases, separate conduits and separate switch boxes shall be used for each phase. K. Outlet boxes in flaar slab shall be adjustable type with screw plug cover and shall be equipped with fittings where indicated. When installed with a fitting, furnish to the Owner the screw covers left over. All floor boxes shall be cast construction, water tight, threaded hubs, and equipped with grounding means through leveling screws. Floor boxer shall be Russell & Stall Company, Inc. 2503, type FD, or w E-14 approved equal. Floor box fittings shall be horizontal standard type with 3/4" straight pipe thread, Russell & Stoll No. FD1A, complete with stainless steel cover and staiiLlese steel housing. Covers shall be suitable for the device; duplex - R & S type D, bushed telephone - R & S type T. or blank - R & S type 0. Receptacle type fittings shall be single duplex and the floor boxes without fittings shall be single receptacle. All receptacles in floor boxes or floor box fittings shall be as specified under the Article "Miring Devices". 23. PULL BOXES L WIREWAYS AND JUNCTION DOO(ES: A. Pull boxes and junction boxes used in walls and ceilings shall be of code-gage galvanized steel with sheet steel covers. ' Covers and boxes In exposed areas shall be painted with undercoat and two coats finish paint. B. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be installed where shown 's and wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties due to arrangement of conduit runs, the fixed character of the build- ing or other obstructives which would cause extra conduit bends to reach the service outlets. Conduit runs indoors and above floor slabs shall have pull boxes Installed,at not more than 100 feet apart, where conduit rtme are not broken ' by junction boxes or outlet boxes. C. Pull boxes and function boxes shall be of sizes and shapes to best meet the needs of both the purposes and locations, except that the sizes of such boxes shown dimensioned shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. Pull boxes and junction boxes in concrete shall be designed to be watertight on the surfaces to the concrete. E. Wireways shall be Square D or approved equal, lay-in duct, of the sizes shown or required. Wireways shall be complete with all required fittings, couplings, end caps and accessories. They shall be enamel finished at the factory. F. All pull boxes, wireways and junction boxes shall have knockout seals placed in conduit openings in the event extra holes are cut and the seals shall be painted to match the enclosure. r' E-15 24. WIRING AND CONNECTORS: A. Conductors may be copper or aluminum. Each wire shall be con- tinuous without weld, splice or joint throughout its length; It shall be uniform in cross section, free from scales, burrs and other imperfections. All conductors shall be vigorously cleaned with a bru h and an inhibitor shall be applied to all connections. Be All wire #6 and larger shall be stranded. C. All conductors shall be the 'size as shown and where no size is given, other than con'.rol and signal wiring, the conductor size shall be 4112 unless specified otherwise. ' Be On runs longer than 75 feet from the panelboard to the first outlet, one wire size larger than specified shall by used for all lighting, receptacle and miscellaneous device circuits unless otherwise specified. t E. Motor control wiring shall be #14 size. F. Wire insulation for branch circuits shall be type TW or type T}bi. G. All feeder and subfeeder conductors shall have type THW insula- tion. N. No wire shall be drawn into a conduit until all work of a nature which may cause injury is completed. An Underwriter's approval cable pulling compound shall be used as a lubricant where necessary. No material which may be injurious to the wire covering or insulation may be used. I. Feeders abd subfaeders shall run their entire length 3h- con-tinuous pieces without taps or splices. J. Taps and splices in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide as shown on the Plans. Taps and splices shall not be pulled into conduit. K. All taps and splices in stranded conductors in dry locations shall be made with approved solderless bolted pressure connectors as manufactured by OZ* Solid conductors in dry locations shall ti be joined with approved solderless bolted connectors, or with "Scotchlok", T & B. or Ideal electrical spring connectors. Ideal, T & B or "Scotchlok" brand electrical spring connectors shall be used for splicing at lighting fixture taps. All other types of wire nuts and crimped pressure connectors are pro- r r, E-lb hibited. After a splice or tap that is made with uninsulated connectors, the tap or splice shall be covered with rubber tape and friction tape so as to make the insulation on the splice or tap equal to that of the conductor itself. Vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least 4 layers (half-lap in two directions) with all large taps and splices. Sharp corners and voids shall be protected by application of insulation putty before wrapping with the vinyl plastic tape. L. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturers' recommendations. M. All connectors, lugs and terminals shall be compatible with copper or aluminum. N. Branch circuit Identification shall be as follows: Neutral ? conductors shall be finished in white or natural gray color. All phase conductors shall be identified with solid color- coded covering. Black, Red and blue shall be used for phases A, B, and C, respectively with other colors utilized as necessary to identify other circuiting. Coding shall be standardized throughout the job. All grounding conductors shall be provided with a green cover. 0. Feeders and subfeeders shall be identified by means of non-ferrous tags or tape, securely fastened to each wire. Identification shall be made for each phase and for the circuit. This shall be done in all pull boxes, wire-waysi, r panelboards and switchboards. a; P. The neutral conductor of branch circuits shall be connected to the white screw in wiring devices and to the screw shell of lamp sockets. ~5. WIRING DEVICES: A. Wiring devices shall conform to the following listings: Where Arrow-Hart devices are listed, equal devices of P & S, General Electric, flubbed or Bryant make will be acceptable, provided they will fit within the available space. B. All wiring devices mounter: in walls finished in light colors shall have ivory finish. All devices mounted in dark- finished walls, unfinished spaces, pedestal outlets, condulet bases or in surface boxes shall have brown finish. C. Wall switches controlling loads not more than 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: t E-17 TVe Arra:-Hart No. Single Pole 1891 or 1891-I Three Way 1893 or 1893-I Four Way 1894 or 1894-I Lock 1891-L series as required D. Wall switches controlling loads from 1501 through 2000 watts at 120 volts or from 3001 to 4000 watts at 277 volts. Lae Arrow-Hart No. t Single Pole 1991 or 1991-I Three Way 1993 or 1993-I Four Way 1994 or 1994-I Lock 1991-L series as required E. Pilot lights at wall switches: Arrow-Hart No. 1711 lamp receptacle with 6 watt lamp and No. 87 red jewel for 120 volt switches, all in the same gang box and under the same plate as the switch and Arrow-Hart No. T-1375-277 or No. T-1475-277 for 277 volt switches, mounted in the second gang of a two- gang box on a No. T-1347 mounting strap, with switch and pilot light under a common cover plate. F. 15 Ampere, 125 volt, 3 pole, 2 wire, grounding single receptacle: Arrow-Hart No. 5261. G. 15 Ampere, 125 volt, 3 pole 2 wire, grounding type duplex receptacles: Arrow-Hart No. 5262 or No. 5262-I. H. 20 Ampere, 3 pole, 2 wire grounding twistlock receptacles: Arrow-Hart No. 7310-B-B with No. 7211-G cap, 1. 20 Ampere, 4 pole, 3 wire grounding receptacles: Arrow-Hart No. 7250-G with No. 7351-G cap. J. 30 Ampere, 3 pole, 2 wire grounding receptacles: Arrow-Hart No. 9333-G or No. 9333-I-G with No. 9336 plate and No. 9338 cap. K. 50 Ampere, 3 pole, 3 wire receptacles: Arrow-Hart No. 7987 or No. 7987-I with No. 9326 plate and No. 4525-G cap. 26. COVER PLATFB;, r w A. All cover plates for flush mounted switches, receptacles, telephone and signal otitlets and kindred devices shall be Sierra Electric Corp., Type "S" 0.040" stamped satin finished x E-l8 stainless steel plates, except where directed or specified other- wise arJ except in unfinished or machinery room areas, in which ireas the plates shall be Sierra Electric Corp., Type "P", smooth plastic to match devices. B. All cover plates for surface-mounted wiring devices shall be of zinc-coated sheet metal having rounded or beveled edges, and of the same size as the boxes which they cover, except for plates on pedestal outlets which shall be as hereinbefore specified and except that suitable condulet fitting covers shall be used on all exposed condulet boxes. 27. CABINETS: A. Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, cabinets ' to serve the various purposes indicated. Cabinets for tele- phone, public address, television and other caw=lcation or signal systems shall be of sizes indicated and shall have wood backboards, Cabinets for the various panelboards shall be of the sizes required. B. All cabinet boxes shall be rigidly constructed of sheet steel. Material gauge shall conform to Underwriters' Laboratories requirements. Corners shall be overlapped or welded. Edges shall be turned over to receive trim, Each cabinet front shall be the sane size as the cabinet box if surface mounted and shall overlp-n the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. Fronts shall be cut from single sheets of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel and shall be fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing. Each door shall be provided with a substantial flush-type tumbler lock and catch and two keys, All locks shall be keyed alike, Fronts and boxes shall be shop painted with a prime coat only. Flush mounted boxes which are galvanized neeC. not be painted. ' 28. LIGNrING AND POWER PANELBQARDS: A. Panelboards shall be Federal Pacific, Square D or approved equal and shall be equipped with the number and sizes of bolted-in circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings. All circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break on both manual and automatic operation and shall be trip-free, thermal magnetic, indicating-type breakers, unless specified otherwise. All multiple pole breakers shall be provided with a common internal trip which will open all poles simultaneously and with a single operating handle for all poles. Handle ties between breakers are not acceptable. All circuit breakers shall be connected with sequence phasing. Panelboards shall be equipped with lugs only on the mains unless specified or schedule otherwise. 1 E-19 B. All lighting panelboards for 208YA20 volt service shall be equal to Square D Type NQOB with QOB breakers in 15 to SO ampere sizes and QIB frame breakers in 70 to 100 ampere sizes, and KA frame breakers in 125-22S ampere sizes. Where main breakers occur, they shall be QIB or KA frame breakers as required. C. All lighting panelboards for 480Y/277 volt service shall ' be equal to Square D Type NY1B with FA frame breakers for 1S and 20 ampere, single pole sizes, and EH or KA frame breakers for larger sizes and for all multi-pole branches. Where main breakers occur they shall be EH or KA frame breakers as required. D. All power distribution panelboards for 208 volt service containing branch circuit breakers not larger than 100 ampere size shall be equal to Square D - NQOB panels. All branch breakers shall be QOB frame. Where main breakers occur, they shall be QID, KA or LA frame breakers as required. E. All power distribution panelboards for 208 volt service containing branch circuit breakers in excess of 100 ampere size shall be equal to Square D Typo ML convertible panels. Branch and main breakers shall be as follows: 15 - 100 A FA frame 12S - 225 A KA frame ¢ 250 - 400 A LA frame 4SO - 800 A MA frame F. In all cases where s lighting and/or appliance branch circuit panelboard may contain more than 42 overcurrent devices, as defined by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. "Standard for Panelboards", the assembly shall consist of two or more separate enclosures bolted together and covered by s common ' multiple-door front. G. Where a vertical feeder serves more than one panel, first entering one panel and then proceeding upward to others, the feeder shall be carried full size through the side gutter of the lower panels to serve the upper panels. The gutters on that side shall be made at least 4 inches wider than normal (more if necessary) to accommodate the wiring and the tap from the feeder to the lower panels shall be made with suitable bolted pressure T-cable-tap connectors. Under no circumstances shall feed-through lugs be used on the panel bus, with the current drawn by a panel botng oarrIPA throt,gh the buses of the preceding panel. H. Where one panel is sub-fed from another panel by the use of multiple lugs on o1thor the top nr the bottom of the panel E-20 buses, the wiring gutter on the top or the bottom of the panel shall be of extra height to provide adequate room to route the conductors and to make the connections. I. All panelboards shall be mounted in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, shall be U. L. labeled and shall be arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on the Drawings. J. Each panelboard shall be provided with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a cardholder on the Inside of the panelboard cabinet. 24. MAIN SWITCHBOARD: A. Furnish and install the main switchboard where shown. It shall be Federal Pacific, Square D or approved equal, fabri- cated in accordance with all current NEMA and AIEE standards, insofar as applicable. The switchboard shall be NEMA 1 design and all components shall be housed In a weatherproof outdoor enclosure. Enclosure shall have gasketed access doors across the front of the unit. B. The switchboard shall be a completely enclosed, self supporting metal structure, of the required number of formed and welded vertical panel sections, incorporating circuit interrupting and protective devices and other associated devices as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Adjacent vertical panel sections shall be bolted } together, not welded, to provide flexibility during Installa- tion, Top, side and rear enclosing sheet steel plates shall be removable. All screwed-on front covers shall be flanged r on all four sides so that no sheared edges will be visible. All enclosures shall be constructed of not less than No. 12 4 gauge sheet steel. C. Adequate ventilating openings shall be provided at the top and bottom of each vertical panel section. D. The switchboard shall contain the number and sizes of fused a~ switches and molded case circuit breakers scheduled on the Drawings. R E. The main switch shall be a Pringle bolted pressure contact switch with dead front mechanism which locks mechanically in the closed position and shall be equipped with Sussman Hi-Cap, type XRP-C, Chase-Shawmut Amp-Trap, Forst 480, or General Electric Type CLF current-limiting fuses. Provide one set of spare fuses. Switch jaws shall have initial contact pressure in addition to final bolted pressure in ~S E-21 closed position. The switch shall nave extended jaw design to prevent arcing at main contact areas, shall be capable of opening 1SC% rated load at full voltage, 7596 to 80% power factor, at least 50 times without affecting continued satisfactory full load operation, and shall be able to withstand a short circuit current of 130,000 amperes at rated voltage, both when closed and when closing into an existing short circuit, without affecting continued full ' load operation. The switch shall be capable of carrying rated current continuously where equipped with the above- specified fuses, with temperature rise not exceeding 30 de- grees C. The switch enclosure shall be designed to minimize magnetic induction heating, and so ventilated that at full load operation the air in the enclosure will not exceed 1S degrees C. rise above room air, and switch temperature rise will not exceed 30 degrees C. above air in the enclosure. The switch shall be equipped with are chutes, induced maG- netic blow-out, barriers between jaws and blade lock. The t' switch shall meet Underwriters' Laboratories Standard for Service Equipment, except that fuses specified herein shall be provided. If a switch other than a Pringle is offered, satisfactory evidence shall be submitted to show that it will meet all of the above specified requirements. Y, F. All circuit breakers shall be molded case breakers. All such circuit breakers shall be Square D or Federal Pacific circuit breakers of the bolted-in type. They shall be quick-make, quick-break on both manual and automatic operation and shall be of the trip-free, thermal-magnetic, indicating type unless specified otherwise. All multiple- pole breakers shall be provided with a common trip which will open all poles simultaneously and with a single opera- tion handle (no handle ties) for all poles. The frame size for each circuit breaker is scheduled on the Drawings, based on Square D catalog designations. 0, Unless shown otherwise, all buses shall be sized to carry continuously a current equal to 70 per cent of the sum of the full rated capacities of all current-interrupting de- vices connected to them, except that no bus need be rated higher than the main switch ahead of it, and except that no bus serving a single breaker shall be rated lower than the w~ frame size of its breaker. Bus ratings shall be based on a maximum temperature rise of 30 degrees C. in a 40 degree C. ambient temperature. H. Buses shall be mounted on high-impact, nontracking, high quality insulators, and shall be adequately braced to with- stand a short circuit current of 50,000 amperes W asymmetri- eel applied directly to the main bus. All bus connections in the board shall be silrec plated. E-22 I. A cardholder shall be provided adjacent to each protective device, containing a neatly typewritten card designating the function of the device. 1 J. All hardware shall have a suitable protective finish. K. All metal surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated. Chemical treatment shall provide a bond between paint and metal. The entire outer surfaces of the board shall be primed and then factory-painted two coats of grey lacquer. ' L. The switchboard shall be completely assembled at the factory to insure proper fit of all parts. It shall be shipped in sections as required for caPa of shipment and access into the building. M. Submit five copies of switchboard shop drawings fo: approval before beginning fabrication. They shall Indicate dimensions, ' type and gauge of materials; methods of construction; the number, type and size of all protective devices; the number, type size and arrangement of all buses; and any other data needed to determine compliance with the Plans and Specifica- tions. ' N. The entire switchboard assembly shall be set on a 4-inch high concrete base as indicated on the Drawings. Steel channels shall be set flush in the concrete, running full length of the board at front and back to which the board ' shall be bolted. 30. DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. All disconnect switches shall be NEMA Type HD unfused safety switches unless noted or required otherwise. If installed ' exposed to the weather, they shall be in NEM 3R raintight enclosures. In other locations they shall be in NEMA I general purpose enclosures. Where space considerations do not permit the use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, suitable horsepower. rated tumbler switches with boxes and cover plates may be used as unfused disconnects. H. All disconnect switches shall be Square D, Federal Pacific or approved equal. 31. FUSES : A. Furnish all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order. All fuses shall be of the type hereinbefore specified for the main switch in the Main 1 E-23 Switchboard. Any others required shall be Buseman Fusetrons of proper capacities. B. Upon completion of the work, furnish and deliver to the Owner a full box of each size of each type of fuse used, except that in no case shall less than three spare fuses of each type and size be furnished. These fuses are in addition to those in spare switches and those blown during construc- tion and testing. 32. TRANSFORMERS : ' A. Install transformers of the air-cooled dry-type where indicated and of the ratings shown on the Drawings. Trans- formers shall be of Federal Pacific, Sorgel or approved equal. All transformers shall be rated as "quiet-type" transformers. All three-phase transformer core and coil units shall be triplex design, "T" connected will not be acceptable. i B. Transformers rated 45 KVA and below shall have 2 - 5% full capacity tape below rated normal voltage and those rated above 45 KVA shall have 4 - 2-1/2% full capacity taps below rated normal voltage. t C. Noise levels of the transformers shall not exceed the following when measured in strict accordance with NEMA Standard ST. 1.411: ' 15 KVA and below 40 db 30 - 150 KVA 45 db ' 167 - 300 KVA 55 db 500 KVA 60 db D. The transformers shall be floor or wall mounted as shown or required. Where designed for wall mounting, they shall be so mounted, with suitable vibration and noise eliminators located between mounting brackets and the wall. All floor- mounted transformers shall be set on spring-type vibration and noise eliminators on concrete bases not less than 41' high. All vibration isolators shall be properly selected by their manufacturer for the specific duty involved. E. All conductors feeding to and from each transformer shall be installed in flexible metallic conduit not less than 24 inches in length. Suitable neoprene grommets shall be employed to prevent metallic contact between the conduit and the trans- former housing. Copper grounding jumpers shall be securely installed between the metallic conduits and the housings. E-24 F. Dry-type transformers located out of doors shall be housed in a ventilated weatherproof enclosure. 33. LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. Provide and Install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Fixtures shall be in accordance with the designations on the Plans and as specified herein. Should any designation be omitted on the Drawings, the fix- tures shall be of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. B. All fixtures shall be complete with best grade lamps, of General Electric, Westinghouse or Sylvania manufacture. All incandescent lamps shall be inside froated unless specified or recommended otherwise by fixture manufacturer. All fluroescent lamps shall be standard ccol white unleatt noted otherwise. All 40 watt cool white fluorescent lamps ' shall be equal to General Electric F40CW, rated not less than 3100 lumens output after 100 hours of operation. C. All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with high power factor, "A" sound rated, UL and ETL labeled ballasts. Where such rating is available, the ballaets shall be CBM certified. All ballasts shall be either General Electric "Bonus Line" type with dual internal non-resetting thermal protectors, or shall be equipped with properly selected dual-element external fusing. Ballasts shall be suitable ' for use on 265 volt current, except where 120 volt ballasts are hereinafter specified. D. Large scale drawings, catalog data, photographs, samples of finish, distribution curves and any other data required by the Architect shall be furnished for every type of fixture which differs from those specified. E. Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. +t. CONTACTORS : ' A. All contactors shall be electrically held or mechanically held units as indicated and shall have a continuoub current rating as indicated on the Drawings. This rating shall be based on enclosed operation. ' B. Install control wiring for units applied on duct heater feeders such that the overtemperature thermostats in the duct heaters, sensing an overtemperatime, will cause the contactor to trip. E-25 Ce All contactors shall have fused 120 volt control circuit transformers mounted integrally with each unit. D. Each heater contactor shall hikve in its cover a red run pilot 1 with legend plate reading "Heater On% E. All contactors shall be Square D, Federal Pacific, or approved equal. 35. DDNERS: ' A. All dimmers shall be sized as shown and shall be capable of carrying these loads continuously without overheating at any stage of dimming level. Each dimmer shall be complete t with its dimmer control switch, located as indicated. All dimmers shall be rated 208Y/120V, three phase, four wire. Be Dimmers shall not cause audio or video interference. C. All dimmers shall be auto-transformer type with motor driven contact arm. Operation shall be smooth and flickerless. Units shall be capable of de-energizing the connected circuits. Travel from off to full-on shall be 5 seconds. i D. Dimmers shall be Superior Electric Company's MD series as indicated on the Drawings. 36. TIME CLOCK/PWMLECTRIC CONTROL: A. Certain circuits for outside lighting shall be controlled by a time clock/photo-cell combination. The photocell shall ' turn the lights on and the time clocks shall turn them off. Be Refer to the Drawings for time clock and photoelectric control device type and identification. 37. CLOCKS: A. Install where indicated synchronous motor non-coded indicating clocks. Clocks shall be Simplex, or approved equal. ' Be Single face wall clocks shall be Simplex type 78 semi-flush unira. C. Double face wall clocks shall be Simplex type 88 bracket units. 38. MUSIC SOUND SYSTEM: A. A music system consisting of FM antenna, FM receiver, ampli- fier, and speakers shall be installed as indicated. 5 1 1 hvy 1 B. Antenna shall be roof-mounted Dukane #111-1. Install E-26 300 ohm lead-in cable to receiver. C. FM receiver shall be Dukane ICA65 tuner. ' D. Amplifier shall be Dukane # 1B670, E, Paging microphone shall b kane #7A.290. ' 39. COURTROOM SOUND SYSTEM: A. Sound system for courtroom shall consist of microphones, ' microphone stands, cable, connectors, outlets, amplifier, control and loudspeakers, All items shall tie Dukane or approved equal, B. Install where shown floor outlets and microphone receptacles. Furnish number and type of microphones indicated, ' C. Amplifier shall be Dukane OIA725/3ASO flush mounted in the walls. Amplifier shall have integral controls as well as a remote volume control station that will individually control each microphone volume, Remote staflon shall be mounted am indicated, D. Loudspeakers shall be column type, mounted concealed in the wall as indicated, Loudspeakers shall be Dukrne #6A312, ' 'gyn. AUTOMOBILE ROAD SIGNAL: A. Road signal shall be V long signal strip that will provide electrical signal inside the building whenever a car passes over the strip, Install unit in driveway and wire as indi- cated on the Drawings. ' B, Road signal shall be 6' long Eagle Cat. No. EW6 non-direction- al pressure detector. 41. ALTERNATE 140, 1 - E.O,C, AREA`.: A. Provide a separate price for that part of the building entitled E. 0. C. as shown on the Drawings. B. Refer to Articles No. 1 through 40 for specifications of wiring, material and equipment. Not listed above, but re- quired for the E. 0. C, area shall be an emergency generator. C. Emergency Generator ' (a) Emergency generator shall be a kerosine fuel engine 1 E-27 driven, air cooled unit. The unit shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of engine driven emergency standby generator sets. t (b) Engine shall be 6 cylinder, 4 cycle, kerosene fueled unit. It shall be radiator cooled and include pusher type fan and water circulating pump with thermostat. Self lubricated adjustable mechanical governor shall maintain speed regulation within S% from no-load to full- load. Unit shall have auxiliary integrally mounted fuel tank and a fuel filter. Starting shall be accom- plished by 24 volt automotive cranking. Engine accessories shall be as follows: ' (1) Auxiliary fuel pump (2) Low oil pressure cutout (3) High water temperature cutout (4) Overspeed cutout (S Lubricating oil cooler 6 Oil filters Oil pressure gauge (8) Batteries and battery cables (9) Exhaust muffler t (r) A completely automatic battery charger shall be furnished. The charger shall be capable of maintaining the starting battery at full charge, and shall incorporate a voltage sensitive relay to automatically reduce the charge from high rate to a safe tricle-charge rate. Battery charger shall be integral with the transfer switch. (d) Generator shall have a continuous KW rating 0 0.8 pf as indicated on the Drawings with a 60 cycle, 208Y/120 voltage rating. Frequency regulation shall be within ' 3 cycles. Control panel shall include the following: (1) Shock mounting t (2) Start-stop switch 3) Alarm circuit contacts 4) Overcranking Protection ' (S) Two minute time delay for permitting unloaded running of stand-by plant after shutdown. (6) Voltage adjusting Rheostat. (7) Frequency Meter (8) Volt meter and phase selector switch (9) Ammeter and phase selector switch (e) Engine generator set shall be direct connected with a semi-flexible coupling and shall be mounted through 1 E-28 vibration dampers onto a steel skid base. Spring type vibration isolators equal to those manufactured by Korfund Company shall be provided to mount between the engine-generator sub-base and foundation. Install a concrete foundation as shown on the Drawings. (f) Engine generator shall be completely housed in a weatherproof enclosure suitable for outdoor installation. (g) Transfer switch shall be an automatic unit and shall automatically transfer the load to stand-by plant when normal voltage falls below 70% and return the load to normal when all normal voltages have been restored to 90% or more. Full relay protection shall guard against phase failure. Transfer contacts shall be ' capable of handling rated output of plant. The transfer switch shall be a double throw switch with no possibility for neutral position. A built-in test switch to simulate power failure shall be provided for maintenance check and testing. On-off switch shall also be provided on the generator set to permit testing engine without interrupting normal service. Transfer switch shall be installed in the main switchboard. jh) Emergency generator and transfer switch shall be by Kohler Manufacturing Company, or approved equal. 1 1 P ING P-1 Item Page 1. SCOPE P-3 2. SPECIAL CONDITIONS P-3 3• FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS P-5 4. INSPECTION OF BUILDING SITE P-5 5. PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS P-5 6. CHECKING AND TESTING OF EQUIpMENT BY CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTUtERS+ REPRESENTATIVES P-5 7. SPECIFICATIONS P-5 8. CUTTING, BORING AND EXCAVATION P•6 9. CUTTING AND PATCHING P-6 10. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION P-6 11. DAMfAM TO WORK P-6 12. CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING P-6 13. EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE P-8 ' 14. WORK BY OTHERS P-8 15. EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKPIL.LING P-8 i ' 16. PIPING MATERIALS P-9 17. PIPING INSTALLATIONS P-10 180 PIPE JOINTS P•13 199 UNIOW, P-13 20. BUILDING SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM SOIL, f~ WASTE AND VENT LINES AND RAINWATEtt DRAINAGE PIPING P-14 21. FUSHINGS P-14 22. PIPE SLEEVES AND FIXT U SOppORTB P-15 i P-2 I.~. PLUMBING 23. FLOOR AND WALL PLATES P-15 24. TRAPS P-15 25. VALVES P-16 26. CLEANOUT PLUGS AND TEST TEES P-16 27. HYDRANTS P-16 a 28. ELECTRICAL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH PLUMBING CONTRACT P-16 29. INSULATION P-17 30. PAINTING P-18 s 31. DOMESTIC COLD WATER DISTRIBUTION P-.19 32. IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING P-19 33. EXTRA SUPPLIES P-20 349 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM P-20 3S. TESTS AND CERTIFICATES P-21 36, FLOOR DRAINS AND SHOWER DRAINS P-21 4 37. ROOF DRAINS P-22 38. WATER HEATERS P-22 39. HOSE CABINET P-22 409 DOMESTIC HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION P-23 41. HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS P-23 42. GUARANTEE P-23 43, TYPES OF FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS P-23 44. ALTERNATE NO. 1 - E.O.C, AREA P-26 P-3 1 PLUMBING 1. SCOPE: A. The work covered under this section of the Specifications con- y sists of furnishing all labor, materials, devices, appliances, fixtures and equipment and in performing all operations in con- nection with the installation of a complete plumbing system, (1) As required and implied by the Drawings (2) As discussed in these specifications and (3) As necessary to provide a complete, integrated and sa~is- factorily operating installation. The work shall generally include but is not limited to: (1) Plumbing fixtures and accessories (2) Sanitary Sewer System' (3) Cold Water Supply Distribution System (4) Domestic Hot Water Distribution System (S) Storm Water Drainage System (b) Fire protection Piping to Hose Cabinets and all other items indicated or specified or as required or necessary to complete the work, whether each item is specifically shown or referred to or not. B. This Contractor shall include in his bid all the concrete sup- ports, miscellaneous steel and other general construction labor and materialb necessary to the installation of a complete plumb- ing system. 2. SPECIAL CONDITIONSI: A. These special conditions shall supplement the general conditions and the supplementary general conditions of the contract which are hereby included in this section of the Specifications, B. Codes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations: Perform all work under this contract in strict accordance with the plumbing code of the City of Denton, Texas and the Directives of the Inspector of Plumbing therein and all other pertinent codes, ordinances and per NEC, AGA and NMPC requirements, where applicable. r: . P-4 Report any conflicts with these requirements found in the Specifications and the accompanying Drawings to the Architect who will issue the necessary instructions or addenda to the Contract Documents, C. All electrical devices and equipment shall be labeled by National Board of Fire Underwriters' Laboratories. D. In no case shall a bidder base his bid on a class of material or workmanship less than that required by the contract documents nor the above codes or ordinances. All modifications which may be required by a local authority having legal jurisdiction over all or any part of the work shall be made by this Contractor without additional charge. In all cases where such authority E requires deviations from the requirements of these Specifica- tions and accompanying drawings, this Contractor shall report same to the Architect and shall secure his approval before work is started. EA Completeness: It is the responsibility solely of this Contractor for the cam- pleteness of his work and for giving timely and adequate Informa- tion to other Contractors where required for proper routing and support thereof. F. Workmanship and Installation: All work shall be performed in the beat and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their respective trades and properly licensed. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and the beat standard practice to bring results of first class only. G. Contractor shall schedule his work to permit inspections by the Architect and/or authorities having jurisdiction, before the work is concealed. H. If the Contractor performs any work contrary to the applicable 1 codes, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or contract documents without written notice to and approval from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom to correct such work. I. Contractor shall lay out his work carefully at the site to con- form to the building and site conditions and to avoid all obstruc- tions. He shall coordinate his work with that of other trades to avoid delays and expessse to others. F .T. Except where specifically noted, the plans do not give exact elevations and locations. This Contractor shall acquaint him- self thoroughly with the details of the proposed construction, i P-5 including exact elevations, locations of necessary points or connections and obstructions to be considered, using visit to site prior to bidding where necessary, 3. FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS: This Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and licenses required for work. He shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and contract requirements bearing on the work, I 4. INSPECTION OF BUILDING SITE: Before handing in his bid, it is necessary that the Contractor visit the building site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met there in installing the new work and make due provisions for same in his bid. It will be assumed that the Contractor, in handing in his bid, has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install all the work required or shown. Failure to visit the site shall not furnish excuse for faulty workmanship or emission of equipment or work under this contract, 5. PRODUCTS AND~tATEUM : € The equipment to be furnished under this Contract shall be the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same equipment are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. 6. SHECKING AND TESTING OF EQUIPMNT BY CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS' PRESENTATIM : A, In order to place responsibility for furnishing of proper mechanical equipment and to see that it is installed as intended by the manufacturer, the Contractor, during construction, shall request supervisory assistance from the equipment manufacturers' representatives to inspect and see that the equipment is in proper working order. B. Before final payment is issued the representatives shall submit to the Architect, through the Contractor, a signed statement certifying to their inspection and that the equipment is properly installed and ready for operation. 7. SPECIFICATIONS: In the matter of specifications, there are intricacies of construc- tion which are impractical to specify in detail, but in such matters the. current rules of good practice shall govern. Any point which P-6 requires clarification will be fully explained if application is made to the Architect. The plans and specifications are intended to be coopcrativc and of equal binding force. Anything called for in the specifications and not shown on the Plans, or vice versa, shall be furnished by this Contractor. 8. MING. BORING AND EXCAVATION: A. No cutting, boring or excavating, which may be necessary for this work in or about the building, which may in any way interfere with the work of another Contractor, or weaken the structure in any way, shall be undertaken without receiving the approval of the Architect before starting same. B. All excavations made by this Contractor shall be properly filled, flooded and tamped to the original grade, Vils shall be done under the Architeet's supervision and to their entire approval. Where excavations occur below floors on grade or below pavement tamping shall be done by mechanical means. C. All excavations and baekfilling shall be ilone in accordance with governing codes, 9. CWTING AND PATCHING,: This Contractor shall coordinate his work to avoid cutting of con- struction, where it becomes necessary to cut through walls or floors to permit the installation of work under this Contract, or to repair defects which may appear up to the expiration of guarantees, such cutting shall be done ruder the supervision of the Architect by their Contractor. The damage shall be repaired after the necessary work has been completed by the same Contractor or trade. 109 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall at all times take precautions as necessary to properly protect his work and equipment from damage. B. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installa- tion, Equipment shall be covered tightly and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. 11. DAMAGE TO WORK: This Contractor shall pay for all injury and damage to the work of another Contractor, which may be done by him or his workmen. The Architect shall be the arbiter in such matters as may arise. 12. CLEANING. TESTING AND ADJUSTING: A. During the progress of the work and upon its completion, Con- tractor shall, at his own expense, make such tests of his work as I a P-7 herein specified and as required by the Architect or by Authors- ties having jurisdiction. He shall provide all apparatus, tempo- rary piping connection, or other requirements necessary for such tests and shall take all due precautions to prevent damage to the building or Its contents incurred by such tests. Contractor shall furnish a certified report of compliance or non-compliance on each test to Architect. B. The Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of adjusting all of the systems covered under the Contract for proper opera- tion. At the completion of the work, the materials and equipment shall be cleaned thoroughly and delivered in new, bright condi- tion satisfactory to the Engineer. C. Leaks, defects or deficiencies discovered as a result of the tests shall be repaired or made good immediately and tests shall be repeated until the test requirements are fully complied with. No caulking of pipe joints to remedy leaks will be permitted. D. Tests of sanitary drainage, rainwater drainage: The entire sani- tary drainage, rainwater drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the top of the highest vent stack above the roof, and proven tight at all points. Each riser shall be tested separately. The system shall hold this water for 30 minutes without showing a drop in level greater than four inches; the water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. Where a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be con- ducted in the same manner as described for the entire system except that no portion of the system need be submitted to a test of less than a 10 ft. head of water (except the upper- most 10 feet of the system). All requirements of the CODE OF RULES REGULATING THE WORK OF PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE IN THE CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS shall be met by Contractor. F E. Tests of Water Systems: Upon completion of the roughing-in-and before setting fixtures, the entire cold water piping system and domestic hot water piping system and fire protection piping to hose cabinet shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 pounds per square inch gauge and proven tight at this pressure for not less than 30 minutes. The water used for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply. Where a portion of the water piping system is to be concealed before completion, this portion shall be tooted separately in a manner described for the entire system. F. Defective Work: If inspection or test shows defects, such de- fective work or material shall be replaced and inspection and EIKI- P-B tests repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new material. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable. ' Defects discovered shall be eliminated by resetting the fixtures and equipment with new gaskets. G. Certificate of Approval: Upon the satisfactory completion and final test of the plumbing system, Contractor shall obtain from the proper Authority having jurisdiction and shall deliver to the Engineer and to the Owner, a certificate of approval thereof. 13. FQUIPMENT SPECIFIED BISEWHERE: A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor and shall connect to the plumbing system all fixtures and equip- ment having plumbing connections and which are specified or shown in other sections of the contract documents. 4 14. WORK By OTR3: The electric wiring and conduit for the motors, controllers, inter- locks and controls will be accomplished by the Electrical Contractor unless otherwise specified. 15. EXCAVATING. TRENCHING AND BACXFILLING: ` A. Excavation: (1) Excavate trenc.es of sufficient width for pr-ner installa- tion of work and grade bottom of trenches evenly, providing bellholes as necessary so that barrel will have a solid bearing full length of pipe. Refill all cuts below trench grade with sand or fine gravel firmly compacted or with concrete. 6. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches :.a required by the governing plumbing code. C. After pipe lines have been tested, inspected and approved and prior to backfilling, forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. Material for backfilling shall consist of sand, gravel or other materials approved by the Architect and shall be free of debris. Under pavements and other surfacing, mechanically tamp backfill in layers not exceeding 6 inches. Do not use any rock in backfill for depth of 2 feet over top of pipe and exclude cinders around metal pipes. Backfill must be placed and sheeting removed in such manner that pipe will not be disturbed. 4 P fit,. P-9 D. Fittings at bends in the pipe line shall be firmly wedged against the vertical face of the trench. j E. Frost Protection: (1) All plumbing work shall be installed to insure protection from freezing of contents and frost closure of vents. Trenching shall be deeper than the established ground frost line recommended. lb. PIPING MATERIALS: A. Provide first quality plumbing materials as specified herein with materials and device~i identified by make, weight, types and classes of product. B. Provide and install with all piping systems all fittings, nipples, adapters, unions, ,joints, traps, connections and other accessories as required to execute the layout shown or implied by the drawings and specifications. C. Sanitary soil, waste and drain pipe and fittings and rainwater drainage piping within the building, under concrete slab and to a distance of 51-0" beyond building line shall be extra heavy asphaltum coated eabt iron drainage pipe and cast iron sanitary drainage fittings - ASTM A74, unless otherwise noted. D. Above ground sanitary soil, waste and vent pipe and fittings: Where chase or wall thickness is inadequate to conceal the required size in cast iron, shall be type "DWV" copper properly connected into the cast iron hub (utilizing heavy ,wed brass ferrule and caulking in compliance with the local plumbing code.) E. Above ground sanitary waste, drain and vent piping: 21" and smaller may be of zinc-coated wrought iron except where cast iron, lead, brass or copper is required by local code. Wrought iron pipe shall be equal to Byers genuine galvanized wrought iror, pipe with matching sc,.,ewed fittings, ASTM A72-45. Copper drainage pipe shall be Type L seamless copper with solder joint sanitary drainage fittings - ASTM-B3060 F. Cold water domestic hot water, fire protection, an4 equipment drain piping above ground and within the building shall be Type L seamless copper tube and wrought copper solder-joint fittings - ASTM C75. G. Water piping underground within buildingXnd to a distance of five feet beyond building line and where indicated on the drawings, when larger than 3 inches in size shall be Type "k" hard drawn seamless copper tubing, ASTM Specification B-88-51 , P-10 with wrought copper sweat joints or cast iron pipe A.S.A. Specification A 21-6 class 150 with boltless gasketed joints and cast iron fittings. I H. Water piping underground within building and to a distance five feet beyond building for sizes 3 inches and smaller shall be Type "L" hard-drawn seamless copper tubing ASTM Specification B-88-51 with wrought copper solder fittings or cast brass brazed fittings. I. Sanitary sewer pipe and rainwater drainage pipe underground from cast iron line beginning approximately 51-0" outside of building, shall be of extra heavy clay pipe as follows: (1) Extra strength clay pipe shall cr)nform to C.S.P.A.-2-63 specifications. (2) The installation of extra strength clay pipe shall conform to A.S.T.M. Specification C12-58T. (3) All joints in clay pipe steal conform to A.S.T.M. Specifi- cation C-4=40T. type 1 or type 3. 17. PIPING INSTALLATIONS: A. Horizontal sanitary soil and waste pipes shall be given a grade of % inch per foot and must be so laid as to insure that the slope toward the main sewer will be continuous. Clean-outs shall be provided where shown on the drawings or where required ' by code of for proper maintenance and shall be the same size as the pipe except where otherwise noted on the drawings. Use brass cover plates on walls and floors over cleanouts. Recess cleanouts behind wall and floors over cleanouts. Be All main vertical sanitary solo and waste stacks shall be extended fell size to and above the roo:F line as vents, terminating not less than twelve inches above the roof. Where practicable two or more vent pipes shall is connected together and extended as one pipe through the roof. fi C, Changes in pipe sizes on soil, waste and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by 45 degree wyes, half wyes, long sweep % bends, 1/6, 1/89 1/16 bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks and short k bends or elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in direction of flow in from the F! horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge from water F closets. D. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by Contractor and shall be worked into place without P-11 springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the structural portion of the building. Service pipe, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other surfaces to permit not less than k inch between finished coverings oa the different surfaces. Changes in pipe sixes shall be made with reducing fittings, E, Equipment drains specified, required or indicated on the drawings shall consist of ~ inch Globe valves with renewable discs and 3/4 inch hose nipples. Additional drains with k inch Globe valves with renewable and 3/4 inch hose nipples shall be installed at low points on the hot and cold water piping, All piping shall grade to the drains. F. Air chambers, 12" long and same pipe size as ricer shall be provided at top of each Plumbing Riser. In addition, air chambers shall be provided on all branch lines to fixture groups and shall consist of 12 inch vertical lengths of pipe of same diameter as branch supply with cap, G. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of piping. Runs of pipe over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or to the supporting ccnstruction about midway on the run. H. Locations and sizes of chases and openings necessary for the proper intrtallation of the work shall be determined in advance and provided during the erection of the work. Where pipes pass through waterproofing membranes, flashing sleeves shall be installed with an integral flashing flange to which a ' flashing ahield can be soldered and the space shall be made watertight. I. Pipe Hangers shall be of a type suitable for each use. Perforated straps shall not be used in any work. For ferrous pipes, use malleable iron, adjustable, split ring, swivel hangers. Where several pipes are parallel at the same elevation, trapeze ' hangers may be used. For copper pipes up to and including three inches (311) in size, use malleable iron, copper plated hangers. For copper pipes larger than three inches (3") use copper. plated clevis hangers. Hanger rod sizes shall conform to the following schedule: Pipe up to and including 21, 3/8" rods Pipe 211, 3" and 3h" 1/2" rods Pipe 4" and 5" 5/8" rods Pipe 6" 3/4" rods All horizontal runs of exposed ferrous piping shall be suspended by means of hangers with the following maxirnma spacing: P-12 Pipe u to and including 1" 8 feet Pipe 1t" and 211 - 10 feet Pipe 2 " and 3" 12 feet Pipe 3" and 4" 14 feet Pipe 5" and 6" 16 feet Pipe 8" and 10" 20 feet All horizontal runs of exposed copper piping shall be suspended by means of hangers with the following maximum spacing: Pipe up to 3/4 in size 5 feet " Pipe 1" and lit" 8 feet Pipa 1k" and larger 10 feet There shall be a hanger within two feet (21) of each elbow or tee. Additional supports shall be provided for valves, strainers, etc. Cast iron pipe shall have not less than one hanger per length of pipe. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps at each floor. Vertical pipes within a space shall have not less than two (2) supports. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and con- traction in the piping systems. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be guided and firmly anchored. No piping shall be self-supporting nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. Domestic cold water and hot water, fire protection pipe hangers shell be sized to go around specified insulation with saddles being provided to ti protect the insulation. J. Floor, Wall and Coiling Plates: Where exposed pipes pass through floors or finished walls, they shall be fitted with chromium- plated escutcheons of an approved pattern. K. Valve Chart and Label: Prepare and install, in suitable glazed frame, typewritten valve charts giving the number, location and function of each line valve installed. Install on each valve stem a stamped one and one-half inch (lk") diameter brass tag plainly numbered corresponding to the number indicated on the above chart. Tag shall be secured to valves by heavy brass figure eight hooks. I L. Cleaning: All piping shall be thoroughly flushed with water before placing in operation. As soon as the water in the piping runs clear, the strainers shall be cleaned and the system placed in operating condition, M. Ends of screw-jointed pipes must be cut square so as to seat in bottom of recess of the fittings and must be reamed out. Bend- ing of soil, waste, drain and vent pipes will not be permitted. No Particular care shall be taken in running piping so as not to P-13 Interfere with finished electrical work. In the event of con- flict, location priority shall be afforded electrical work so as to not affect the appearance of the building adversely. 18. RIM JOINTS : A. Joints in hub-and-spigot cast-iron soil, waste and vent pipes and threaded pipe or caulking ferrules, sha'1 be firmly packed with oakum and caulked with molten caulking lead at least one Inch deep in one pouring and finished flush with hub. B. Threaded Joints shall have American National taper screw threads, with graphite-end-oil compound applied to the male thread. Connections between threaded pipe and soil pipe shall be similar and the threaded pipe shall have a ring or half-coupling screwed on to form a spigi3t end. C. Fl:ttings on copper tubing shall be solder-Joint type of wrought a- c,Opper and shall be assembled with special solder, using a non- corrosive flux, all as recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing and fittings. Surfaces to be soldered shall be cleaned bright. Use 9S-S solder for water piping and SO-SO solder for " drains and vents. Heat copper tubing larger than 1" with ring torch. Wrap copper tubing with electrical tape wherever tubing touches a dissimilar metal. F D. Connections between lead and cast-iron hub and spigot pipe shall be made with red brass ferrules and wiped Joints. E. Joints between cast-iron and clay pipes shall be made with hot pour, mineral, filled bituminous joint compound. Packing shall be oaken. F. Bituminous joint compound shall be a product which has been in successful use for at least five years. It shall adhere tightly to the pipe surface and when set, shall have sufficient elasticity to permit slight movement of the pipe without injury to the Joint. Compound shall form tight Joints under all condi- tions of trench and weather and shall not deteriorate when sub- merged in water or domestic sewage. 19. iW M : A. Unions on ferrous pipe two inches In diameter and smaller shall be zinc-coated malleable iron and on ferrous piping 2-k inches in diameter and larger shall be zinc-coated cast iron, flange pattern. 6. Unions on brass or copper pipe two inches In diameter and smaller shall be brass and on non-ferrous water piping 2-J" in diameter P-14 and larger shall be flange pattern brass or bronze, 150 pound class. C. Gaskets for flanged unions shall be of the best quality fiber or plastic. D. Unions shall not be concealed in walls and unions shall not be covered by insulation. 20. B LD NG SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM SOIL WASTE AND VENT LINES AND-RAINWATER-DRAINAGE PIPING: A. Supply and install a complete watertight gravity system of sanitary drainage between plumbing fixtures, floor drains, special equipment, etc, and the point of termination indicated on the drawings. Be Soil, waste, vent and drain piping for sanitary drainage and rain water drainage must be of the sizes noted and be run as indicated. Where elevations are given, pipes must be run in , . straight lines and have a uniform grade beLi,?een the elevations noted and no branch drain shall have a lesser grade than that indicated for the main drain to which it is connected. Where elevations are not given, pipes shall be given a uniforru grade of h inch per foot, except that where such grade on overibied pipes would reduce the head room materially, the grade may :%e reduced to not less than 1/10 inch per foot, if so directed by the Engineer. All overhead pipes must be kept as close to ceilings as possible, unless otherwise indicated or noted. The soil and waste pipes so shown and noted on the drawings shall be extended as vent pipes to above the roof sine and p eject above roof line not less than twelve inches nor more than eighteen inches. Where so noted or indicated on the drawings, two or more vent pipes shall be connected together and extended as i one pipe. Connections of vent pipes shall be made in concealed space at least three feet above floor on which the fixture vented is located so as to prevent the use of any vent line as a waste. C. Provide traps for each untrapped fixture or device. Traps shall be as close to fixture as practicable. Do not double trap any fixture or line. 21. FLASHNGS : A. The flashing of vent lines through the roof shall be accomplished under the responsibility of the general and plumbing Contractors. Be Flashing Connections: At all points where the vents pass through the roof, the openings shall be flashed with sheet lead flashing P-15 weighing not less than four (4) pounds per square foot. The flashing shall be made absolutely watertight at the roof line and shall be extended up, over and down at least two (2) inches into the pipe. Each flange shield shall extend not less than fourteen (14) inches in all directions '-rom the respective vent, underneath the roofing material on the upper roof slope and over the roofing material on the lower slope of the roof. 22. PIPE SLEEVES AND FZ~TURE SUPPORTS : A. Pipe sleeves, han}yQrs and supports and fixture supports shall be furnished and set in proper and permanent locations. Pipe will not be permitted to pass through structural members unless noted on the structural drawings or approved In writing by Structural Engineer. B. Pipe sleeves made of schedule 40 steel pipe properly secured in place with approximately one-quarter inch (h") space between ,p each sleeve and the surface of the pipe and/or insulation passing through it, shall be provided for all pipes passing through concrete floors or masonry waLts. Where appriwed pipes pass through footings, cast Iroi sleeves shall be provided no less than four (4) Inches larger in diameter than the pipes for which they are installed. All pipe sleeves shall be built in place as the walls and floors are built up. The spaces between sleeves and pipes through concrete floors and exterior masonry walls shall be made watertight with approved plastic materials. Paint visible surfaces of sleeves to match adjacent surfaces. 23. FLOOR & WALL PLATES: Uncovered exposed pipes, where passing through floors and/or finished walls shall he fitted with chranium-plated castbrass plates on chromium-plated pipe or with cast-iron or steel plates on ferrous pipe. Plates shall be large enough to completely close the hole around the pipes and shall be square or round, with the least dimension not less than one-eighth inch larger than the diameter of the pipe. Plates shall be secured to pipe by set screws in hub of plate. Paint unfinished plates to match adjacent building surfaces. 24. TRAPS: A. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connection to the drainage system, shall be equipped with a trap. 8. Each trap shall be placed as near to the fixture as possible. Traps Installed on cast iron hub-and-spigot pipe shall be extra heavy cast-iron. Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. All traps shall be vented. 25. VALVES: P46 r A. Valves shall be provided on all supplies to fixtures as specified. Be Valves indicated on drawings in connection with runouts, risers, branches and mains shall be in accordance with paragraph (c) below. Valves shall be gate valves unless otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. C. Valves up to and including two inches shall be all-brass with solder-joint, rough bodies and finished trimmings. Valves 2-k inches and larger in diameter shall have iron bodies, brass mountings and either screw or flange ends. D. Valves shall be equal to Crane, Fairbanks, Jenkins, Walworth. 26. CLEANOLTZ UM AND TEST TEES: A. Cleanouts installed in connection with cast-iron hub-and-spigot pipe shall consist of a long-sweep % bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to an easily-accessible place or where indicated on the Drawings. An extra-heavy cast-brass ferrule with counter- sunk trap screw cover shall be caulked into the hub of the fittings. Be Cleanoute shall be provided at each change of direction, in interior horizontal runs at intervals not exceeding 50 feet. Cleanouts shall be brass caulked into the lines and, where they occur in walls or floors of finished areas, shall be pro- vided with access plates. All interior cleanouts shall be same size as the pipe served up to four (4) inch size as indicated on Plans for all larger lines. Exterior cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased wye in the line with cleanout leg extend- ing upward theWrom and terminating in a concrete slab below grade. A standard cast iron cleanout casting shall be set on this slab in such a manner as to be flush with finished grade and to provide access through its cover to the cleanout. A removable concrete stopper shall be set in the open top of the cleanout pipe. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer. 27. WRANTS: A. Provide three-quarter (3/4) inch freezeproof box type WAIA hy- drants in brass flush boxes with hinged locking cover, removable key. Locate hydrants where indicated on drawings. Be Hydrants shall be equal to Josam 1410. 28. ELECTRICAL WORK ASMIATED WITH PL MING CONTRACT: A. Motors, controls and switching and protective devices required P-17 for the proper operation of equipment shall be furnished by this Contractor and shall conform to the Electrical section except where such apparatus is furnished,mounted and connected integral with the motor driven equipment. B. Final con,A:etions to equipment, including motors, together with the installation and connections to all related control and protective equipment, shall be accomplished as a part of the electrical work under the Electrical Specifications. C. This Contractor shall provide all wiring diagrams and other information required to properly wire up all electrical equipment and controls furnished by him and hand over to Electrical Con- T tractor. 0. This Contractor shall supervise the installation and wiring by the Electrical Contractor and shall assume full responsibility for a correctly wired job and acceptable in all respects to the Architect and NSFU. 29. 2UGATION: A. After satisfactory tests have been completed on piping systems the lines shall be cleaned and insulated as follows: 'w D. Insulation shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville, Owens Corning, Philip Carey Mfg. Co. or equal. C. General: (1) Insulation shall be applied with all joints carefully fitted to eliminate voids. Where voids occur, insulation shall be refitted or replaced. (2) The application or insulation in the field shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer. No section or insulated pipe shall be concealed prior to the Engineer's approval. (3) The utmost care is to be taken to ensure that the installed insulated pipe is of the best possible workmanship. Any section of insulation which becomes damaged whatever the cause, is to be cut out and replaced. U. Cold water domestic hot water and firs protection run above ground: (1) To be covered with equal to 1" thick fiberglas pipe covering III P-18 with white flame retardent vapor barrier jocket. Longitudi. nal joints to be firmly butted and covered with a 4" wide strip of jacket material heavily coated with vat.,)r barrier cement of the same color as the jacket. Adhesive shall be equal to Bond-Master's K218. (2) Fittings and valves shall be covered with mitred pipe insulation or molded fittings to the same thickness as adjacent ?iping. (3) Smooth out Irregularities with asbestos finishing cement. (4) Pipe, fittings and valves to be finished with standard weight canvas jacket and a coat of white vapor barrier cement. (5) Insulation to be protected with saddles at pipe hangers and supports. 30. P N : A. Exterior surfaces of piping installed in or through concrete floors or tile floors and underground shall be given one coat of acid-resisting paint Laving a bituminous base. Finish paint- ing of exposed pipe, pipe covering, hangers, supports and other iron work In finished spaces shall conform to the painting schedule of the Architectural portion of the Contract Documents and such other painting as provided herein. B. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be marred In transit or during installation, it shall be finished to present a neat, workmanlike appearance. C. All insulated lines in uninhabitable or crawl spaces or concealed In pipe chases shall be painted with a heavy coating of asphalt emulsion to a thickness of 1/16" inch. All insulated lines in equipment or mechanical rooms shall be sized with a heavy coat of glue sizing. When the sizing is dry, it shall be painted two coats of enamel gloss Pittsburgh Industrial Paint. Color as per architectural schedule. D. All uncovered steel or wrought Iron lines, supports and hangers in pipe chases and In uninhabitable or crawl spaces shall be painted two (2) coats of black asphalt varnish. Uninsulated copper and cast iron lines in these spaces need not be painted, but shall be thoroughly cleaned. All other uncovered lines and all other hangers and supports shall be primed and painted two (2) coats of lead and oil paint. The primer on cast iron litres shall be a material that will contain the asphaltum or coat tar coating. P-19 E. All painting done under these contracts shall be in colors speci- fied herein or designated at the time of the installation. Successive coats of paint shall be of different shades. Paint materials shall be Pittsburgh Industrial in all cases. L 31. DOMESTIC COLD WATER DISTRIBUTION: A. Supply and install complete systems of cold water distribution from cold water supply source indicated on the Drawings to fixtures, hydrants, etc. as shown and/or implied. B. Supply and install control and automatic valves as shown on ' drawings and as required. (1) Shut off valve at bottom of each riser. (2) Shut off valves at each cold branch supply to each fixture. C. Provide sealed air chambers as noted on drawings and install as per manufacturers' recommendations to eliminate water hammer. D. Properly pitch pipe, vent, etc, as noted and directed. E. Branch fixture connections shall be as follows with reductions at fixtures as required by terminal outlet. Fixture Cold _Hot Hydrants 3/4" Special Equipment As noted As noted F. Supply and install pressure gauges with gauge cocks at the cold ' water inlet into the building and other points indicated on drawings. G. Supply and install titer-m meters with wells and separable sockets ' at cold water entry to building and ,ether places indicated on drawings. 32. IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING: A. All piling exposed in mechanical or equipment rooms or in un- inhabitable spaces, including crawl spaces or concealed in accessible pipe spaces or in other accessible spaces shall be color coded using colors and color banding as follows (the piping shall be painted a solid color in short lengths as indicated in the first column and banded as shown in the second column): 1. 2. Cold Water Green No Banding P-20 B. Piping shall be painted in short lengths of about fifteen Inches (15") and banded over the painted strip as required. Banding shall be approximately ten (10) feet on centers with the bands being about one and one-half (1~) inches wide with one and one- 1 half (1k) inches of space between bands. Arrows, same color as banding, approximately six (6) inches in length and spaced about ten (10) feet on centers shall indicate the direction of flow in the pipe. Vertical piping shall be marked on each floor. 1 Markings shall be placed adjacent to valve and fittings, except valves and fittings on toilet room fixtures. All painting for purposes of identification shall be in addition to painting as specified elsewhere. 33. XTRA SUPPLIES: { Furnish and place in the mechanical equipment room one dozen com- plete sets of washers. Each set shall consist of one washer of each size used in faucets, bibbs, wall hydrants, etc. This extra equipment is to be enclosed in a wall mounted wood or metal box with hinged cover. Box to have compartments of ample size for the differ- ent sizes and kids of washers. 34. DISINFECTION OF WAT'Ett~_: A. upon the completion of all tests and necessary repairs Le re- placements, all eater piping systems shall be subjected to a disinfection procedure as herein specified. The systems to be disinfected shall include hot and cold water piping, drinking water piping, fire protection piping and any other aystems that may be connected to the same supply source. The disinfection shall be applied to all piping included in the contract from the main cut-off valve through all appurtenances connected thereto. B. These systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water to remove sediment. Following this flushing, they sha:.I be disinfected in accordance with one of the following methodis: (1) The system shall be so chlorinated that a chlorine residual of not less than 10 ppm remains in the water after 24 hours standing. Water from the source of supply shall be con- trolled so as to flow slowly during the application of chlorine. The rate of chlorine mixture flow shall be in such proportion to the rate of water er,tering pipe that the chlorine dose applied shall produce 10 ppm after 24 hours standing. This may be expected with an application of 25 ppm, although some conditions may require more. In the process of chlorinating the system, all valves and other appurtenances shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the ehlorating agent. J ON" ?-21 (2) For emergency repairs where a shorter retention is necessi- 1 tated, it will be permissible to have a contact period of one hour with a 100 ppm chlorine concentration. C. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly 1 flushed from the system at its extremeties until the replace- ment water throughout its length shall upon test, be approved by the public health authority having jurisdiction. This satis- factory quality of water delivered by the new system should continue for a period of at least three (3) days as demonstrated by laboratory examination of samples taken from a tap located and installed in such a way as to prevent outside contamination, After the systems are drained, they shall be thoroughly flushed with fresh water and returned to service. 35. TESTS AND CERTIFICATES: A. Costs of testa and disinfection shall be borne by the Contractor who must furnish the Owner,with a copy to the Engineer, a certificate authenticated by proper public health authority ' that all required water and piping tests and disinfection have been satisfactorily made. g. Certificates of factory tests, guarantees, warranties, copies of operating instructions, maintenance guides, etc, on all equip- ment and devices shall be furnished to the Owner through the Engineer. 36. FLOOR DRAINS AND SHOWER DRAINS: A. Supply and install floor drains where indicated on the Draw- ings and as required to properly service equipment. Confirm exact location of floor drains required at mechanical equip- ment rooms. r B. Floor and shower drains shall be equal to Josam, J. R. Smith or turn of size indicated on the Drawings. Install complete with trap and vent as required. Floor drains shall be of types scheduled below. (1) Floor Drain "A" (F.D."A") shall be equal to Josam Cat. No. 5420, (sizes as noted on Drawings), cast iron floor drain with polished bronze top and vandal proof screws. (2) Floor drain "B" (F.D."B") shall be equal to Josam Cat. No. 300-E1 (sizes as noted on Drawings), cast iron floor drain with polished bronze top. ' (3) Shower Drain "A" (S.D."A") shall be equal to Josam Cat. No. 302X - 35A (2" dia.) cast iron floor drain with 5w n 1 f P-22 polished bronze Vop and vandal proof screws. (4) Shower drain "B" (9.D."B") shall be equal to Josam Cat. No. 302X - 35A (2" die.) cast iron floor drain with nicksloy top. 37. ROOF DMINSI: e A. Supply and install roof drains where indicated on the Drawings. t Be Roof drains shall be equal to Josam Series No. 4110 cast iron roof drain with large sumps bott•:m outlets removable dome and flashl,:r clamp device Integral with gravel stop. Size of drains to be as indicated on the Drawings. 38. WATER HEATERS: A. Supply and install water heaters where shown on the Drawings. Be Heaters shall be of size indicated on the Drawings. C. Piping to heaters shall be as indicated by diagrams. D. Heaters shall be equal to "Day & Night Jetglas" "Century" water heaters. E. Install complete with watts temp-press. Relief valves - pipe to floor drain. 39. HOSE CABINET: A. Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings a hose cabinet with the following accessories: (1) Nose cabinets shall be W.D. Allen Co. No. R7169NSL with 20 gauge steel body and 12 gauge steel door and trim with break glass latch shield. Cabinet to have prime coat of paint Inside and outside and be Underwriter's Laboratories listed. Install one Allenco aluminum door F plaque to read "Fire Hose". (2) Hose rack shall be Allenco with hose clip on back of cabinet. Rack to be mounted to allow 180 degree swing. Hose valve to be Figure 170 Underwriters Labeled angle valves size 2k inches rough brass body of 175 PSIC working pressure. Furnish 2j" to 1k'reducer. Fire hose to be figure 475 Underwriters labeled unlined liner Fire hoses size lk inch, 7S feet long complete with Allenco brass fog nozzle and brass couplings attached. Fire extinguisher to be Figure 3080 S Underwriters labeled 2j gallon Soda Acid extinguisher of stainless steel construction complete with charge. P-23 40. DOMEST_ IC L. WATER DISTRIBUTION: A. Supply and Install complete systems of hot water distribution from water heaters as indicated on the drawings to connect to fixtures as shown and/or implied. B. Supply and install control & shut off valves as shown and as required. (1) Shut off valve, at bottom of each riser. (2) Shut off valve at each hot branch supply to each fixture. C. Provide sealed air chambers and install as per manufacturer's recommendations, to eliminate water hammer; D. Properly pitch pipe as required and as directed. E. Branch fixture connections shall be as follows with reductions at fixtures as required by terminal outlet. 41. WT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS: A. Provide and install where indicated on the Drawings hot water recirculation pumps. B. Pumps shall be equal to Bell & Gossett No. 75 with 1/12 N.P. motor. Single phase - 60 cycle - 120 V 10 G.P.M, at 7 ft, pumping head. C. Install complete with strap on aquastat. 42. G",iA I, E6: A. Contractor shall guarantee all items of workmanship, materials and equipment covered under the Plans an:: Specifications against defects for a period of at lie.-+t: one year after the date of final acceptance and he shall furnish, free of cost to the Owner, all materials and labor necessary in the fulfilling of this guarantee. 43. TYPES OF FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS: A. Supply and install all fixtures indicated on the Drawings. B. See Architectural Plans for locations of any plumbing fixtures or equipment not specifically located on the Plumbing Drawings. Provide necessary plumbing fixtures and connections as required to make same operate to meet code. Mai x•24 C. Plumbing Fixtures: Fittings and piping shall be brass and wherever exposed, shall be polished chrome plated, Provide ' tight fitting wall or floor eacute'ieona of chrome plated brass wherever pipes pass through :calls, floors, or ceilings. All porcelain or vitreous china shall be clean, smooth and bright. All shall be warranted not to craze, color or scale, All plumbing fixtures shall be white in color; all water closet seats to be white, All hot and cold water supplies shall have chrome plated brass stops. Plumbing fixtures shall be of vitreous china unless otherwise specified and shall be of the following types, furnished complete with all fittings, mounting flanges, carriers, caps, setting compound, etc, t Svmbol Item Description W.C, Water Closet Equal to American Standard F-2205 "Standard Afton" vitreous china siphon jet action, elongated bowl, lk" top spud, 110-FM Sloan Royal flush valve with vacuum breaker and quiet flush; 9500 church seat white open front less cover. i Y W,C,"A" Water Closet Equal to American Standard F2515 - "Instento" vitreous china, blow out action toilet, elongated bowl, wall hung, complete with concealed chair carrier equal to Josam, 1~" back spud and 144 YV-Royal flush valve, Confirm wall thickness with Architect, UR, Urinal Equal to American Standard F6570 r "Jetbrook" vitreous china blowout urinal with flushing rim, 3" I,F,S, outlet, 180 TYV Sloan Royal flush valve with vacuum breaker and Josam C-c40 single carrier with hanger and bearing plate with adjustable extension. S.S. Service Sink Equal to American Standard P-7705 22" x 18" "Argo" cast iron acid resisting service sink with rim guard, R-5003-VO exposed double service sink faucet with vacuum breaker, P4798-3" trap standard with R-4551 strainer, r r. ' S of Item Description P•25 Lev. Lavatory Equal to American Standard "New Lucerne" vitreous china wall hung lavatory, modified for use with concealed arm carrier equal to Jos= C-300 with concealed arms, and with N-2044 Heritage centerset fittings with aerator and drain plug with internal grid, 3/8" angle flex lavatory supplies with stops, R-7000-44 - lk" C.P. cast brass adjustable "P" trap with cleanout and tubing to wall. Lev. "A" Lavatory Equal tc American Standard - P430-2 "Prison Lavatory" vitreous china, with integral spout and drinking nozzle - soap dish - rear outlet connection to slip 1%" tubing, Provide trap and cutoff volves,etc, behind wall. Mount on wall as required. E.W.C. Electric Water Equal to "Halsey Taylor" wall mounted Cooler electric water cooler, size WM-14A complete with - 3/8" annggl1e flex. Supply with stop, R.S. L.A. pattern "P" trap. Sink Sink Equal to American Standard Harvest, 14" x 14" - SHR 1414 complete with all drain outlet, R4300-1 faucet, R4510 crumb strainer 3/8" flexible risers with stops, 14" C.P. cast brass "P" trap with cleanout and tubing to wall. Sink "A" Sink Refer to Alternate No. 1 for loca- tion of this item, E.O.C. area. Equal to American Standard "Harvest Line" SH 3221 - 32" x 21", complete with Hudee frame, R41SO-1 faucet, R4510 crumb cup strainers, 3/8" flex tube risers with stops, lk" C.P. cast brass "P" trap with cleanout and tubing to wall. -3 c Symbol Item Description P-26 S.H."A" Shower Head Equal to Sloan Valve Co. Model A:V-600 complete with actomatic shower head model No. AC-110 and concealed Sloan flush valve (time controlling type) with exposed push button operator. Install a mixing valve in chase to provide tempered water, mixed water temp. to range from so r, to 130oF. Install shut off valves in chase. Install shower head with anchor plate behind wall. S.H."B" Shower Head Equal to American Standard C-217-1 complete. 44• &~TZ NO - 0 C : A. Provide a separate price for that part of the building entitled E.O.C. as shown on Drawing No. PB-3 and as follows: (1) Refer to Items No. 1 thru 43 for specifications of equip- ment shown. (2) Material specifications for items not listed above but required for the E.O.C, area are as follows: a. Well water piping. (A) Supply and install well water piping as Indicated. on the Plans. (B) Well water piping shall be as specified for cold water piping. (C) Well water piping shall terminate 51-0" from outside of building for continuation t.y others, b. Well Water Storage Tank (A) Provide and install where shown on the Drawings a well water storage tank. (B) Tank shall be approximately 48" dia, and 71-0'.' long and shall be constructed of black iron, cement lined. P-27 (C) Tank shall be A.S.M.E. constructed and shall have manhole and connections indicated on Plans. (D) Tank shall be mounted on a structural steel stand of all welded construction. c. Fuel Oil Storage Tank (A) Supply and install an underground fuel oil storage tank in association with E.O.C. area. (B) Oil tank shall be manufactured from black steel plate and shall be suitably stiffened in an approved manner for underground use. (C) Tank shall be coated externally with an approved type rust inhibitor. (D) Tank shall be anchored to concrete blocks by means if saddles and straps as.indieated on the Drawings. (E;) Tank shall be of capacity noted on Drawings and shall be of all welded construction using a minimum manufacturers' standard guage number 7 designed for 7.5 lb./sq,, ft. Tanks labeled "Under- ~,-round storage tanks" by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. may be considered as meeting above requirements. (F) Provide filler pipe with cap, etc, vent connec- tions, etc, as indicated on the Drawings, d. Fuel Oil Piping (A) Provide and install fuel oil piping between tank and equipment as indicated. (B) Piping to be of black iron, Schedule 40 of screwed construction with appropriate screwed couplings, etc. (C) Underground pipe shall be coated with an approved type rust inhibitor. r,• "j ,?r G ~+'r:'Y r.1 3'~.n?S~ik ',P3i, ~iF, 'k+,~ wig.. '.L•„i_..t~:'x'ey:~a ~Pt.rlt .~iu'a'i,'a ''t. NaL